remove seminar, nonfree

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@3278 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

31 files changed, 0 insertions, 11142 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e4c4ae3fa5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,539 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN 2up.doc
-%%
-%% Documentation for 2up.tex/2up.sty.
-%% Run through LaTeX, with or without the NFSS.
-%%
-%% See below if you want to try out two-up printing.
-%%
-%% LaTeX version of this documentation courtesy of
-%%    H. David Todd <hdtodd@mockingbird.wesleyan.edu>
-%%
-%%
-\documentstyle[12pt,twoside]{article}
-
-\def\FileDate{January 28, 1993}
-\def\FileVersion{1.2}
-
-%% INSTRUCTIONS FOR TWO-UP PRINTING.
-%% 1. Change \iffalse below to \iftrue.
-%% 2. Uncomment \special{landscape} if using Rokicki's dvips, or otherwise
-%%      remember to print the document out in landscape mode.
-%% 3. Uncomment one of the booklet options, if desired.
-%%
-\iffalse
-  \input 2up.tex
-  \targetlayout{twosided}
-  \TwoupWrites
-  % \special{landscape}     %% This works with Rokicki's dvips
-  % \targetlayout{Booklet}  %% Booklet printing with 2-sided printer/copier.
-  % \targetlayout{booklet}  %% Booklet printing with 1-sided printer/copier.
-\fi
-
-\makeatletter
-
-%% PAGE NUMBERING:
-%% Adjust page numbering if using booklet layout option.
-\setcounter{page}{0}
-\def\next{\if@leftpage\else\stepcounter{page}\fi}
-\@ifundefined{target@stop}{}{\next}
-
-%% CONTENTS:
-\def\tableofcontents{%
-  \par\begin{center}
-  \large\bf Contents
-  \end{center}
-  \begin{quote}\@starttoc{toc}\end{quote}}
-
-%% PAGE PARAMETERS:
-\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}          % paragraph indent
-\setlength{\parskip}{4pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
-\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt}
-\setlength{\headheight}{12pt}        % height of running head
-\setlength{\headsep}{30pt}           % distance between header and text
-\setlength{\textheight}{8.2in}        % height of text on page
-
-%% DATES, VERSIONS AND TITLES:
-\def\@maketitle{%
- \begin{center}
-   {\Large\bf \@title \par}
-   \vskip 1.2em {\lineskip .5em
-   \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\end{tabular}\par}
-   \vskip .8em {\@date}%
-  \end{center}
-  \par
-  \vskip .5em}
-
-%% Page Style:
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-\markboth{Two-Up Style Guide}{Version \FileVersion, \FileDate}
-
-%% Special list:
-\newcommand{\namelistlabel}[1]{\mbox{\bf #1}\hfil}
-\newenvironment{namelist}[1]%
-  {\begin{list}{}%
-    {\let\makelabel\namelistlabel
-    \settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}
-    \setlength{\leftmargin}{1.1\labelwidth}}}%
- {\end{list}}
-
-%% VERBATIM:
-%%
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
-  \catcode`\(=1 \catcode`\)=2
-  \catcode`\+=0 \catcode`\\=12
-  +gdef+|(\)          % \| = character \
-  +gdef+{({)          % \{ = character {
-  +gdef+}(})          % \} = character }
-+endgroup
-\def\Backslash{\protect\|}
-%%
-%% Define some functional font commands:
-%%
-\def\MainFont{\tt}      % For macro definitions.
-\def\UsageFont{\tt}           % For in-line macro names.
-\def\InlineFont{\tt}          % For other in-line snipets of code.
-\def\MetaFont{\rm\it}            % For meta arguments.
-%%
-%% Short-cuts for font commands:
-%%
-\def\s#1{\string#1}
-\def\t#1{{\InlineFont\string#1}}   % For other in-line code.
-\def\m#1{{\MetaFont #1\/}}         % For just putting things in italics
-\def\M#1{{\InlineFont\{\m{#1}\}}}  % Arg is in italic, enclosed in tt braces.
-\let\N\t                           % For in-line macro names.
-\catcode`\<=13 \def<#1>{\m{#1}}    % <meta>
-\catcode`\"=13\def"{\verb"}        % Short verb
-%%
-%% This is for listing macro definitions in a quote-like environment.
-%%
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\[=1 \catcode`\]=2
-  \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12
-  \gdef\@MD[%
-    \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12
-    \def{##1}[\{[\MetaFont ##1]\}]]
-\endgroup
-\def\MD{%
-  \quote
-  \begingroup
-    \@MD
-    \def\end{\endgroup\end}%
-    \def\\{\@centercr\s}%
-    \MainFont
-    \s}
-\def\endMD{\endquote}
-%%
-
-%% End preamble.
-\catcode`\@=12
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\title{Documentation for 2up.tex:\\
-  Two-up printing for Generic TeX}
-\author{Timothy Van Zandt\thanks{The documentation was put into
-  \LaTeX\ format by David Todd.}\\ Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu}
-\date{Version \FileVersion\\[3pt] \FileDate}
-
-\maketitle
-\thispagestyle{empty}
-
-  "2up.tex"/"2up.sty" allows one to print a document two-up, with
-considerable flexibility as to paper size and layout. It produces a standard
-dvi file, and does not involve an additional dvi or PostScript filter. It
-should work with most \TeX\ macro packages.
-
-  {\bf Usage:} Input "2up.tex", or include "2up" as a LaTeX style option.
-There is a good chance you will get the desired layout. (But you will probably
-need to generate new font bitmaps to get high quality output.) See the rest of
-this documentation for detailed information on controlling 2up.tex.
-
-\begingroup
-\def\baselinestretch{.8}\large\normalsize
-\tableofcontents
-\endgroup
-\clearpage
-
-\section{Comparison with other methods}
-
-There are other tools for two-up printing:
-\begin{description}
-\item[PostScript filters]
-These work well as long as you only use PostScript fonts (as opposed to the
-usual Metafont fonts). Otherwise, the PostScript filter scales bitmapped
-fonts, and the quality is lower than with "2up.tex".
-
-\item[Rokicki's dvidvi]
-"dvidvi" is a versatil tool that does much more than
-2up printing. However, if only rearranges the pages, and does not adjust the
-magnification to ensure that the pages fit properly in a two-up format. It
-also adds one more step to the \TeX-dvi-printer cycle. "2up.tex", on the other
-hand, combines the changes to \TeX's magnification and page layout with the
-rearranging of the pages, all with an easy-to-use interface and from within
-your \TeX\ document. (See Section \ref{dvidvi} on using both "2up.tex" and
-"dvidvi" together.)
-\end{description}
-
-\section{A warning about fonts}
-
-Two-up printing generally involves reducing a document, and thus using fonts
-sizes that are not typically found on your system. If you are using bitmapped
-fonts (standard for \TeX\ users), and you do not have and cannot generate the
-extra fonts bitmaps, you will find 2up.sty (and any other method of two-up
-printing) to give very poor quality output.
-
-If you are using a program like Rokicki's "dvips" that can generate extra font
-bitmaps as needed, you will find that it takes a long time to print your 2up
-document the first few times, as "dvips" is busy making the extra fonts. This
-problem will go away. Be thankful you have such an easy way to get extra font
-bitmaps.
-
-\section{Usage}
-
-Input "2up.tex". \LaTeX\ users can include "2up" as a style option.
-
-Then set the target and source layout:
-\begin{MD}
-  \source{mag}{width}{height}\\
-  \target{mag}{width}{height}
-\end{MD}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The ``source'' layout is the layout of your document
-the way it is usually printed.  The ``target'' layout is the layout when it
-is printed two-up.
-
-\item <width> and <height> are the true width and height of the paper,
-when looking at the output right-side-up.
-
-\item <mag> refers to the source and target magnification. It should be an
-integer, equal to 1000 times the magnification factor. There are also some
-magic magnification numbers:
-\begin{description}
-\item[$\setminus$magstep<n>] for a magnification of 1.2$^n$ (n=0,...,5), or
-
-\item[$\setminus$magstepminus<n>] for a magnification of 1.2$^{-n}$
-(n=0,...,5).
-\end{description}
-Using these magnification values will make best use of the available fonts on
-your system.
-\end{itemize}
-
-"2up.tex" takes each source page, and centers in half a target page. To get
-the pages to fit, the magnification of the document typically has to be
-reduced. If you find that the pages are too crowded, try reducing the target
-magnification. If they are too lonely, try increasing the target
-magnification.
-
-If you want to adjust the positioning of the scaled pages, try changing the
-values of "\hoffset" or "\voffset" with "\advance" or \LaTeX's "\addtolength".
-
-Don't change the magnification of your document after using the "\target"
-command, as you will override the settings made by 2up.tex.
-
-You can also specify some options:
-\begin{MD}
-  \targetlayout{options}
-\end{MD}
-where <options> is a comma separated list with no spaces. Valid
-options are:
-\begin{namelist}{topbottomxxx}
-
-\item [topbottom] The two source pages are printed one on top of the other.
-\item [twosided]  Odd pages are always printed on the right or the bottom.
-\item [booklet]   Pages are printed like a booklet. See Section \ref{booklet}.
-\item [Booklet]   Like "booklet", but for two-sided printers/copiers.
-\item [dvidvi]    For arranging in two-up layout with "dvidvi". See Section
-\ref{dvidvi}.
-
-\end{namelist}
-
-The only other changes you might want to make to your document are the
-following:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item You have to see to it that the target output is printed with the
-correct orientation (landscape or portrait). See the documentation for your
-dvi driver for details.
-
-\item "2up.tex" will inserts a line between pages if you change the following
-dimensions:
-\begin{namelist}{pagesepwidthxxx}
-\item [$\setminus$pagesepwidth]   Thickness of line. (Default 0pt)
-\item [$\setminus$pageseplength]  Length of line. (Default 6.5in)
-\item [$\setminus$pagesepoffset]  Distance from bottom of page to bottom of
-line, or (with "topbottom" layout) from side of page to beginning of line.
-(Default 1in)
-\end{namelist}
-
-\item You can, but do not need to, use the following commands:
-\begin{namelist}{twoupemptypagexxx}
-
-\item [$\setminus$twoupemptypage] inserts a completely blank half page
-in the target.
-
-\item [$\setminus$twoupclearpage] \LaTeX\ users: ejects a complete target
-page.
-
-\item [$\setminus$twoupeject] Plain \TeX users: ejects a complete target
-page.
-
-\end{namelist}
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Defaults}
-
-  The following commands set the parameters for some common sources and
-targets. The definitions of these commands are also useful examples.
-
-  For A4 paper, just replace "8.5in" and "11in" in the definitions below by
-the width and height of A4 paper.
-
-\begin{description}
-
-\item [$\setminus$twouparticle]
-
-This is the default for \LaTeX.
-\begin{namelist}{Sourcexx}
-
-\item [Source:] A portrait document on 8.5x11 inch paper with wide margins as
-used in \LaTeX's article style, and without marginal notes.
-
-\item [Target:] A landscape document on the same size paper, with the source
-pages printed side by side.
-
-\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\target{\magstepminus1}{11in}{8.5in}
-\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{namelist}
-
-If you use narrower side margins, or if you use marginal notes, then you
-will need to use "\twoupplain" or \\ "\twouplegaltarget", defined below.
-
-\item [$\setminus$twoupplain]
-
-This is the default for non-\LaTeX.
-
-It is the same as "\twouparticle", but for source documents with narrower
-margins.
-\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx}
-
-\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\target{\magstepminus2}{11in}{8.5in}
-\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{namelist}
-
-\item [$\setminus$twouplegaltarget]
-
-\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx}
-\item [Source:] A portrait document on 8.5x11 inch paper with just about any
-margins and perhaps with marginal notes.
-
-\item [Target:] A landscape document on legal size paper (8.5x14 inches),
-with the source pages printed side by side.
-
-\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\target{\magstepminus1}{14in}{8.5in}
-\source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{namelist}
-
-\item [$\setminus$twouplandscape]\hspace{1pt}
-\begin{namelist}{Sourcexxx}
-
-\item [Source:] A landscape document on 8.5x11 inch paper with just about any
-margins.
-
-\item [Target:] A portrait document on the same size paper, with the
-source pages stacked vertically.
-
-\item [Definition:]\hspace{1pt}
-\begin{verbatim}
-\target{\magstepminus2}{8.5in}{11in}
-\source{\magstep0}{11in}{8.5in}
-\targetlayout{topbottom}
-\end{verbatim}
-\end{namelist}
-
-\end{description}
-
-
-\section{True Dimensions}
-
-\TeX\ lets you use `true' dimensions, as in
-\begin{verbatim}
-    \topmargin 1truein
-    \setlength{\topmargin}{1truein}
-\end{verbatim}
-This sets the length to 1 inch
-as it appears on the page, no matter what the magnification.
-
-Once you use `true' dimensions, it is impossible to change the
-magnification of your document, and hence it is almost impossible
-to use 2up.tex. You will get an error like:
-\begin{verbatim}
-    ! Incompatible magnification (833);
-      the previous value will be retained (2000).
-\end{verbatim}%
-
-The use of `true' dimensions might be hiding in macros or style files
-you are using. For example, Plain \TeX's "\magnification" command uses
-true dimensions; use "\mag" instead, and then set "\hsize" and
-"\vsize" appropriately scaled. If you can't find the culprit `true'
-dimension in your document or input files, try putting this on the
-(very) first line of your document:
-\begin{verbatim}
-    \mag 143 \voffset 1truein \mag 1000
-\end{verbatim}
-
-You will get the error listed above wherever true dimensions are used
-(and in some other places as well).
-
-
-\section{Page Cross-References}
-
-  Page cross-references (e.g., in an index or table of contents) will not be
-accurate with "2up.tex", because finished pages are not immediately shipped
-out. This can also cause problems with some special \LaTeX\ styles that have
-multiple ".aux" files (e.g., for each chapter).
-
-  To get better, but not perfect, page cross-references, try putting the
-command
-\begin{verbatim}
-    \TwoupWrites
-\end{verbatim}
-at the beginning of your document, after inputting "2up.tex". This is good for
-drafts, and may fix problems with \LaTeX\ styles that have multiple ".aux"
-files. "\TwoupWrites" makes "\write" and "\read" "\immediate", if you know
-what that means. It might cause problems of its own, but try it and see.
-
-  To get accurate page cross-references:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Run the job without "2up.tex", until all cross-references
-are properly resolved. Run any index utility at this point.
-
-\item Run the job ONE MORE TIME with "2up.tex"; it will use the
-correct cross-references from the previous runs. (In \LaTeX\ documents,
-it is useful at this point to include the "\nofiles" command, so that
-the correct cross-references are preserved.)
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\section{Booklets\label{booklet}}
-
-Here are some special considerations for making booklets:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-
-\item  Use the "booklet" target layout if your printer or copier cannot print
-two
-sides directly. "2up.tex" prints out the ``tops'' of the pages, and then the
-``bottoms'', so that you can copy or print on both sides by doing one side,
-flipping the output over, and doing the other side.
-
-\item Use "Booklet" if your printer or copier can print directly on two sides.
-
-\item You must have enough memory and box registers to hold all the pages in
-the document. A Big\TeX\ should be able to handle at least a 32-page booklet.
-
-\item Sometimes booklet printing is part of the design of a document, rather
-than an afterthought. In this case, you should set up the margins for the
-target half-page rather than using "2up.tex" to scale the document. For
-example, if using \LaTeX, 8.5x11 inch paper, \LaTeX's twoside style option,
-and headings, try the following page parameter changes:
-\begin{verbatim}
-    \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.2in}
-    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{-0.5in}
-    \setlength{\textwidth}{4.2in}
-    \setlength{\textheight}{6.5in}
-    \setlength{\topmargin}{-.4in}
-\end{verbatim}
-If you do this, "2up.tex" isn't adjusting margins or scaling the
-document. You coould therefore get by without "2up.tex" by using "dvidvi".
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Using dvidvi\label{dvidvi}}
-
-  With the "dvidvi" layout option, "2up.tex" takes care of adjusting the
-margins, and you then use "dvidvi" to arrange the pages in a two-up
-format. The advantage is that cross referencing comes out right.
-The disadvantage is that it involves one more step.
-
-Start by \TeX ing your document with "2up.tex" and the "dvidvi" layout option.
-Then run the dvi file through "dvidvi". Specify the offsets for "dvidvi" at
-the middle of the page. E.g., for
-a side-by-side layout on 8.5x11in paper, use
-\begin{verbatim}
-    dvidvi '2:0,1(5.5in,0in)' foo bar
-\end{verbatim}
-For other paper sizes, replace "5.5in" by half the target paper width. For the
-"topbottom" layout, reverse the dimensions, e.g.,
-(0in,5.5in). For booklet printing, see the
-the documentation for "dvidvi".
-
-
-\section{Compatibility\label{compatibility}}
-
-  These macros should work with most \TeX\ macro packages, except for
-the following possible but unlikely compatibility problems:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-
-\item If you use a macro package other than \LaTeX\ that does unusual things
-to end a document and/or that modifies the definition of "\end", you may
-find that the last page is nor printed or that an extra page with headings
-is inserted at the end of the document. This is fixable on a case-by-case
-basis. See the redefinition of "\end" in "2up.tex".
-
-\item "2up.tex" might not work if you meddle with \TeX's "\shipout" primitive
-after loading "2up.tex".
-
-\item If the first page of the source document is not on the first two-up
-target
-page (possible, for example, with two-sided printing and the "booklet"
-option, but generally unlikely), "\special"'s that come at the beginning
-of the document also do not get onto the first page of output. This can mess
-up "\special"'s for landscape printing or
-including a PostScript header file. In this case, you have to specify
-these things as command line options when using your dvi driver.
-
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\section{Changes}
-\begin{namelist}{V0.9xxx}
-\raggedright
-
-\item [V0.9a] Everything redone. Too many differences to point out.
-
-\item [V0.9b] Interface redone again. "booklet" option added.
-
-\item [V0.9c] Pages ship out a little earlier. A few bugs fixed.
-
-  Parameters "\pageseplength" and "\pagesepthickness" added.
-
-\item [V0.9d] Fixed bug with "\twoupclearpage" and "\twoupeject".
-
-\item [V0.9e] Made pages be counted (from dvi driver's viewpoint) by the
-physical page number.
-
-\item [V0.9f] Parameter "\pagesepoffset" added, and "\pagesepthickness"
-changed to "\pagesepwidth".
-
-\item [V1.0]  None. Just seemed seemed like it was time to call it 1.0
-
-\item [V1.1] Added "Booklet" and "dvidvi" target layouts.
-
-  "\hoffset" and "\voffset" in source document now have expected effect.
-
-\item[V1.2] Fixed incompatibility problem with AmS-\TeX/AmS-\LaTeX.
-
-  Added "\TwoupWrites" command.
-
-\end{namelist}
-\end{document}
-%% END 2up.doc
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b9cea2d0dc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1268 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN fancybox.doc
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1992, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu.
-%% For copying restrictions, see fancybox.sty.
-%%
-%% Documentation for fancybox.sty.
-%% Run through LaTeX, with or without the NFSS.
-%%
-\def\FileVersion{1.3}
-\def\FileDate{2000/09/19}
-%%
-%% This creates two temporary files: \jobname.ex1 and \jobname.tmp
-
-\documentclass[12pt]{article}
-
-\makeatletter
-
-%% INPUT FANCYBOX.STY HERE TO CHECK FILE VERSION.
-
-\usepackage{fancybox}
-
-\ifx\FileVersion\fileversion\else
-  \@latexerr{Fancybox style file and documentation do not have the same
-    version}\@ehd
-\fi
-
-%% DATES, VERSIONS AND TITLES:
-
-\def\expanddate#1/#2/#3/{\year=#1 \month=#2 \day=#3}
-\begingroup
-  \expandafter\expanddate\filedate/
-  \xdef\thefiledate{\today}
-\endgroup
-
-\title{Documentation for fancybox.sty:\\
-  Box tips and tricks for \LaTeX}
-\author{Timothy Van Zandt\\ Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu}
-\date{Version \fileversion\\ \thefiledate}
-
-\def\@maketitle{%
- \begin{center}
-   {\Large\bf \@title \par}
-   \vskip 1.2em {\lineskip .5em
-   \begin{tabular}[t]{c}\@author\end{tabular}\par}
-   \vskip .8em {\@date}%
-  \end{center}
-  \par
-  \vskip .5em}
-
-%% PAGE STYLE:
-
-\pagestyle{myheadings}
-\if@twoside
-  \markboth{Documentation for fancybox.sty}%
-    {Version \fileversion, \thefiledate}%
-\else
-  \markright{fancybox.sty, Version \fileversion}
-\fi
-
-%% PAGE PARAMETERS:
-
-% Paragraphs are marked by large space rather than indentation:
-\parindent 0pt
-\parskip 7pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt}
-\setlength{\headheight}{12pt}        % height of running head
-\setlength{\headsep}{30pt}           % distance between header and text
-\setlength{\textheight}{8.2in}       % height of text on page
-
-%% TABLE OF CONTENTS
-
-\newskip\myskip
-
-\def\tableofcontents{%
-  \par\vfill
-  \begin{quote}
-    \begin{center} \Large\bf Contents \end{center}
-    \def\numberline##1{\hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 1em}}%
-    \let\oldaddvspace\addvspace
-    \def\addvspace##1{%
-      \myskip##1\relax
-      \oldaddvspace{.5\myskip}}
-    \@starttoc{toc}%
-  \end{quote}
-  \thispagestyle{empty}
-  \vfill
-  \clearpage}
-
-
-%% VERBATIM HACKS:
-
-\VerbatimFootnotes
-
-% Short meta (works in verbatim. Can't use < for other purposes.
-\catcode`\<=13 \def<#1>{{\rm\it #1\/}}    % <meta> (works in verbatim)
-
-% Short verbatim. " can appear in verbatim environments.
-\def\temp{\Verb"}
-\expandafter\def\expandafter\dospecials\expandafter{\dospecials\do\"}
-\catcode`\"=13
-\let"\temp
-
-% Verbatim item:
-\newcommand{\vitem}{\SaveVerb[{\def\bf{}\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}]}]{\MyTemp}}
-
-%% EXAMPLES:
-
-\setlength{\fboxsep}{6pt}
-
-\begin{VerbatimOut}{\jobname.ex1}
-% 1. Save example verbatim to \jobname.tmp,
-% 2. Input verbatim with \catcode`\"=14 (" is a comment).
-% 3. Input again with \catcode\`"=9 (" is ignored).
-
-\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{}
-
-\renewcommand{\EveryVerbOutLine}[2]{}
-
-\newcommand{\BeginExample}{%
-  \VerbatimEnvironment\begin{VerbatimOut}{\jobname.tmp}}
-
-\newcommand{\EndExample}{%
-  \end{VerbatimOut}%.
-  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}{}%
-  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimCodes}{\catcode`\"=14}%
-  \LVerbatimInput{\jobname.tmp}%
-  \catcode`\"=9}
-
-\newenvironment{example}{\BeginExample}{\EndExample
-  \begin{center}\input{\jobname.tmp}\end{center}}
-
-\newenvironment{example*}{\BeginExample}%
-  {\EndExample \input{\jobname.tmp}}
-
-\newenvironment{example**}{\BeginExample}%
-  {\EndExample \globaldefs=1 \input{\jobname.tmp}}
-
-\end{VerbatimOut}
-
-\input{\jobname.ex1}
-
-%% END PREAMBLE:
-\makeatother
-
-\begin{document}
-\setcounter{page}{0}
-\maketitle
-\begin{quote}
-"fancybox.sty", together with its documentation, gives extensive answers to
-and solutions for many questions about how to frame or rotate this or that in
-\LaTeX. It also contains commands for shadow, double and oval frames.
-\end{quote}
-
-\tableofcontents
-
-\section{Fancy frames}
-
-"fancybox.sty" has five variants of \LaTeX's "\fbox" command:
-\begin{quote}\raggedright
-"\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" (with "\thinlines") and "\Ovalbox"
-(with "\thicklines").
-\end{quote}
-Here are examples:\footnote{In this documentation, the default value of
-"\fboxsep" has been changed from 3pt to 6pt.}
-\begin{example}
-  \shadowbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch}
-\end{example}
-\begin{example}
-  \doublebox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch}
-\end{example}
-\begin{example}
-  \ovalbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch}
-\end{example}
-\begin{example}
-  \Ovalbox{\large\bf New Glarus Birdwatch}
-\end{example}
-
-The distance between the box and the frame is "\fboxsep", as with \LaTeX's
-"\fbox" command. The commands use other parameters as well:
-\begin{description}
-\vitem"\shadowbox" The width of the frame is "\fboxrule" (the same as with
-"\fbox"). The width of the shadow is "\shadowsize" (default: "4pt").
-
-\vitem"\doublebox" The width of the inner frame is .75"\fboxrule", and the
-width of the outer frame is 1.5"\fboxrule". The distance between the two
-frames is 1.5"\fboxrule" plus .5pt.
-
-\vitem"\ovalbox" The width of the frame is set by the "\thinlines"
-declaration. The diameter of the corner arcs is set with the "\cornersize"
-command.
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \cornersize{<num>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-sets the diameter of the corners arcs to <num> times the lessor of the width
-and height of the box.
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \cornersize*{<dim>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-sets the diameter of the corner arcs to <dim>. This is all approximate,
-because \LaTeX\ has a limited range of arc sizes to choose from. The default
-is
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \cornersize{.5}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-\vitem"\Ovalbox" This is like "\ovalbox", except that the width of the lines
-is set by the "\thicklines" declaration.
-\end{description}
-
-There are no analogs to \LaTeX's "\framebox" command, which has various
-optional arguments not supported by "\fbox". You can get the exact same
-functionality by putting the argument of the above framing commands in a
-"\makebox".
-
-There is also a variant "\fancyoval" of \LaTeX's "\oval" picture object. The
-difference is that "\oval" always makes the diameter of the corner arcs as
-large as possible, and "\fancyoval" uses the "\cornersize" command to set the
-diameter.
-
-\section{A short course on boxes}
-
-\begingroup\sloppy
-The "\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" and "\Ovalbox" commands described
-in the previous section are examples of LR-box commands, meaning that their
-argument is processed in LR mode. \LaTeX\ LR-box commands include "\mbox",
-"\makebox", "\fbox", "\framebox", "\sbox" and "\savebox". All the PSTricks
-commands whose argument is text are LR-box commands, including, e.g, the
-framing, rotating, scaling and positioning commands, and some of the node
-commands. Any rotation command is an LR-box command.
-
-\endgroup
-
-The purpose of the rest of this documentation is to provide answers to, and
-solutions for, frequently asked questions about using LR-box commands with
-\LaTeX. I will use "\fbox" for the leading example of a box framing
-command,\footnote{In the examples using "\fbox", be aware that the default
-value of "\fboxsep" has been changed in this documentation from 3pt to 6pt.}
-and "\rotateleft" for the leading example of a box rotation command.
-("fancybox.sty" does not contain a "\rotateleft" command, as this must be
-implemented via "\special"'s, but there are numerous box-rotation style files
-around.) However, most of what is said here applies to any LR-box command.
-
-In each LR-box command, the text is processed in restricted horizontal mode,
-which is referred to as ``LR-mode'' in Lamport's {\em \LaTeX: User's Guide and
-Reference Manual}. In restricted horizontal mode, the input, consisting of
-regular characters and boxes, is made into one (long or short) line. There is
-no line-breaking, nor can there be vertical mode material such as an entire
-displayed equation. However, the fact that you can include another box means
-that this isn't really a restriction.
-
-For one thing, alignment environments such as \LaTeX's "tabular" are just
-boxes, and thus present no problem. Picture environments and the LR-box
-commands themselves are also just boxes. Entire paragraphs or other vertical
-mode material such as displayed equations can be nested in a "\parbox" or
-"minipage".
-
-\section{Defining LR-box environments}
-
-To frame a "minipage", you have to write
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \fbox{%
-    \begin{minipage}{3in}
-      blah
-    \end{minipage}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-You might want to define an environment "fminipage" that frames its contents,
-but you can't use
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newenvironment{fminipage}%
-    {\fbox{\begin{minipage}}%
-    {\end{minipage}}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-because the braces are not balanced in the definition.
-
-"fancybox.sty" contains an "Sbox" environment that makes it easy to define
-your own LR-box environments. It is a variant of \LaTeX's "\sbox" command that
-saves the contents of the environment in a storage bin that can be retrieved
-with the command "\TheSbox".\footnote{The difference between
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{Sbox}
-    blah
-  \end{Sbox}
-  \TheSbox
-\end{LVerbatim}
-and
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newsavebox{\mybox}
-  \sbox{\mybox}{blah}
-  \usebox{\mybox}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-is that "Sbox" saves the contents globally, and "\TheSbox" erases the contents
-globally.}
-For example, here is a framed minipage:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{Sbox}
-    \begin{minipage}{3in}
-      blah
-    \end{minipage}
-  \end{Sbox}
-  \fbox{\TheSbox}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-and here is an "fminipage" environment that works:
-\begin{example**}
-  \newenvironment{fminipage}%
-    {\begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}}%
-    {\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}\fbox{\TheSbox}}
-\end{example**}
-Let's see that it really works:
-\begin{example}
-  \begin{fminipage}{2in}
-    Since the former doesn't use braces to delimit
-    the contents of the box, $\ldots$
-  \end{fminipage}
-\end{example}
-
-
-\section{Math}
-
-In-line math, or pieces of a displayed equation (as opposed to a whole
-equation), are horizontal mode material, but most LR-box commands switch out
-of math mode when they occur in math mode. Thus, you have to explicitly switch
-back in to math mode when desired.\footnote{This is {\em not} true for the
-PSTricks LR-box commands.}
-For example:
-\begin{example}
-  $x + y = \fbox{$\Omega$}$
-\end{example}
-
-You also have to explicitly write
-\begin{quote}
-  "\scriptstyle", "\scriptscriptstyle" or "\displaystyle"
-\end{quote}
-if you want one of these special math styles. For example, here I will frame
-an equation, but not the equation number:
-\begin{example*}
-  \begin{equation}
-    \fbox{$\displaystyle
-      \int_{\Omega_0} \zeta(\omega) d\omega
-      \geq \bar{r}$}
-  \end{equation}
-\end{example*}
-
-Entire displayed equations or "eqnarray" environments work differently because
-they are vertical mode material. Thus, they have to go inside a "\parbox" or
-"minipage". E.g.,
-\begin{example*}
-  \newlength{\mylength}
-  \[
-    \setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt}
-    \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}
-    \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep}
-    \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule}
-    \fbox{%
-      \parbox{\mylength}{
-        \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{0pt}
-        \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{0pt}
-        \begin{equation}
-          x + y = z
-        \end{equation}}}
-  \]
-\end{example*}
-The outer "\[" "\]" are just used to display the boxed equation, rather than
-actually switch into math mode. Note how I set the width of the "\parbox" so
-that the displayed box would exactly have width "\linewidth".\footnote{That is
-what "\mylength" is for. It is better to define a single scratch length that
-you reuse rather than creating a new one each time.}
-
- I also set the display skips to "0pt" and increased the size of "\fboxsep" so
-that I would have the same distance all around between the equation and the
-frame.
-
-This is again a mouthful, and so I might instead define:\footnote{The reason
-for using "\minipage" instead of "\begin{minipage}", and so on, is that with
-AmS-\LaTeX, "\begin" and "\end" cannot appear in the definition of a new
-equation environment.}
-\begin{example**}
-  \newenvironment{FramedEqn}%
-    {\setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt}
-      \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}%
-      \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep}%
-      \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule}%
-      \Sbox
-      \minipage{\mylength}%
-         \setlength{\abovedisplayskip}{0pt}%
-         \setlength{\belowdisplayskip}{0pt}%
-         \equation}%
-    {\endequation\endminipage\endSbox
-      \[\fbox{\TheSbox}\]}
-\end{example**}
-"fancybox.sty" doesn't bother defining any such environments, because there
-are too many possible designs. But let's see if the one above works:
-\begin{example*}
-  \begin{FramedEqn}
-    \Rightarrow P\sim\xi(P_\gamma)- \frac{1}{3}
-  \end{FramedEqn}
-\end{example*}
-
-"fancybox.sty" contains a "Beqnarray" environment, which is like the
-"eqnarray" environment but it is not vertical mode material. Instead, it
-produces a box just large enough to hold all the equations. For example:
-\begin{example}
-  \fbox{%
-    \begin{Beqnarray*}
-      x & = & y\\
-      y & > & x \\
-      \int_4^5 f(x)dx & = & \sum_{i\in F} x_i
-    \end{Beqnarray*}}
-\end{example}
-The unstarred version produces standard equation numbers on the right (even
-with the "leqno" style option and AmS-\LaTeX). It might not work with special
-equation numbering macros.
-
-
-\section{Floats}\label{floats}
-
-A common mistake is to put a whole "table", "figure" or other float
-environment inside an LR-box command. Instead, you should put everything that
-is {\em inside} the environment (including the "\caption", if you want that
-boxed too) inside a "minipage" of the desired width, and then put the
-"minipage" inside the LR-box command.
-
-For example:
-\begin{example*}
-  \begin{table}[h]
-    \begin{center}
-      \fbox{%
-        \begin{minipage}{.8\textwidth}
-          \begin{center}
-            \begin{tabular}{rl}
-              foo & bar
-            \end{tabular}
-          \end{center}
-          \caption{A table of foo and bar.}
-        \end{minipage}}
-    \end{center}
-  \end{table}
-\end{example*}
-Note how I had to use "center" twice: once to center the framed box, and again
-to center the stuff inside the box.
-
-That is a mouthful, and so I might define a "FramedTable" environment like the
-following, which sets the size of the "minipage" so that the framed box is
-exactly the width of the page (no need for the first "center" environment this
-time):
-\begin{example**}
-  \newenvironment{FramedTable}%
-    {\begin{table}[h]
-      \begin{Sbox}%
-      \setlength{\mylength}{\textwidth}%
-      \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxsep}%
-      \addtolength{\mylength}{-2\fboxrule}%
-      \begin{minipage}{\mylength}}%
-    {\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}\fbox{\TheSbox}\end{table}}%
-\end{example**}
-Now let's see if it works:
-\begin{example*}
-  \begin{FramedTable}
-    \begin{center}
-      \begin{tabular}{rl}
-        foo & bar
-      \end{tabular}
-    \end{center}
-    \caption{A table of foo and bar.}
-  \end{FramedTable}
-\end{example*}
-
-The most common reason to want to rotate an entire float, caption and all, is
-to put it on a page by itself in landscape mode, centered both horizontally
-and vertically. Compared to the table framing we did above, we just have to
-replace "\fbox" by our box rotation command (e.g., "\rotateleft" or whatever),
-set the width of the minipage to "\textheight" (if you want to use the full
-size of the page), and use the float position specifier "[p]". "fancybox.sty"
-contains an environment,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{landfloat}{<float>}{<rotation command>}
-    ...
-  \end{landfloat}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-that automates this. It has two arguments: the name of the floating
-environment, and your rotation command. For example, if "\rotateleft{foo}"
-rotates "foo" by 90 degrees, and you want a landscape mode "table", then try
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{landfloat}{table}{\rotateleft}
-    ...
-  \end{landfloat}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-If the whole document is in landscape mode, then "landfloat" gives you a
-portrait-mode float---good for a table that is too tall to fit in landscape
-mode.
-
-If you don't add a caption to a float, it doesn't matter much what floating
-environment you use (e.g., "table", "figure" or whatever). Thus, you can put
-anything in a landscape float. For example, suppose I have a very wide
-equation. Then I can write:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{landfloat}{table}{\rotateleft}
-    \begin{equation}
-      ...
-    \end{equation}
-  \end{landfloat}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-"fancybox.sty" defines a generic caption, "\GenericCaption", that doesn't
-affect the numbering of floats, doesn't make an entry in a list of floats, and
-doesn't add anything to the argument you give. I could have used this if I
-wanted to add a caption to the previous example.
-
-\section{Center, flushleft and flushright}
-
-There are two ways to box a "center", "flushleft" or "flushright" environment.
-If you have long lines and you want \TeX\ to do the line breaking, then put
-the environment inside a "minipage".\footnote{List and other such environments
-work best inside a "minipage" environment rather than a "\parbox".} If you
-have short lines and you want the frame to adjust itself to the size of the
-longest line, then use "fancybox.sty"'s
-\begin{quote}
-  "Bcenter", "Bflushleft" or "Bflushright"
-\end{quote}
-environment instead.
-
-These are basically just "tabular" environments with a single column, and so
-each line should end with "\\", or "\\["<dim>"]" to insert extra space, and
-the text on each line must be balanced. Also, each line is sitting in its own
-group, and so, e.g., if you want to change the font for the whole environment,
-you should do this before the environment rather than after.
-Like the "tabular" environment, the box that is produced has the baseline at
-the center, unless you include an optional argument "[t]" to align the box
-with the top line or "[b]" to align the box with the bottom line.
-
-For example:
-\begin{example}
-  \setlength{\fboxsep}{10pt}%
-  \fbox{%
-    \begin{Bcenter}
-      Love of life\\
-      and other short stories\\
-      by Policarpa Salabarrieta
-  \end{Bcenter}}
-\end{example}
-Compare this with:
-\begin{example}
-  \setlength{\fboxsep}{10pt}%
-  \fbox{%
-    \begin{minipage}{6cm}
-    \begin{center}
-      Love of life and other short stories
-      by Policarpa Salabarrieta
-    \end{center}
-    \end{minipage}}
-\end{example}
-
-In either case, if we want the resulting framed box centered, we have to
-include it inside another "center" environment.
-
-Here is another example:
-\begin{example}
-  My list: \fbox{%
-    \begin{Bflushleft}[b]
-      Galanga root\\
-      Coconut\\
-      Tempeh
-    \end{Bflushleft}}
-\end{example}
-
-
-\section{Lists}
-
-There are again two ways to box a list environment such as
-\begin{quote}
-  "itemize", "enumerate" or "description".
-\end{quote}
-You can put it in a "minipage" of pre-determined size and let \TeX\ do the
-line breaking, or you can use
-\begin{quote}
-  "Bitemize", "Benumerate" or "Bdescription"
-\end{quote}
-instead, and let the box adjust to the size of the longest line.
-
-For example.
-\begin{example}
-  \fbox{%
-    \begin{Bitemize}
-      \item Groceries
-      \item Clean hamster cages
-      \item Pick up Peter
-    \end{Bitemize}}
-\end{example}
-
- Most of the usual list parameters are irrelevant except for "\itemsep" and
-"\labelsep". These environments are also based on the "tabular" environment,
-and so each item should be balanced text. You can't write "\vspace{4pt}"
-either, but you can insert an extra amount of space before an item by writing
-"\item(4pt)" (or "\item(4pt)[label]" if you have a label). Also, you can break
-lines within an item using "\\" or "\\[<dim>]". For example:
-\begin{example}
-  \fbox{%
-    \begin{Bdescription}
-      \item[David] Groceries
-      \item[Eli]  Hamster cages\\
-                  Surreal numbers
-      \item(3pt)[Doris] Pick up Peter
-    \end{Bdescription}}
-\end{example}
-
-These environments also have an optional argument, "[t]" to align the box with
-the top line, and "[b]" to align the box with the bottom line.
-\begin{example}
-  To do:
-  \fbox{\setlength{\itemsep}{0pt}%
-    \begin{Benumerate}[t]
-      \item Groceries
-      \item Hamster cages
-      \item Pick up Peter
-    \end{Benumerate}}
-\end{example}
-
-There is also a generic "\Blist" command that is analogous to \LaTeX's
-"\list".  It has the same two obligatory arguments, plus a third optional
-"[t]" or "[b]" argument for changing the alignment.
-
-\section{Superimposing boxes}
-
-The command
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \boxput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff1>}{<LR stuff2>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-puts <LR stuff1> either behind (the default) or in front of (with the "*") <LR
-stuff2>.\footnote{You will only notice the difference between "\boxput" and
-"\boxput*" if you are using color implemented by "\special"'s} The resulting
-box has the dimensions of <LR stuff2>.
-
-The coordinates "(<x>,<y>)" determine where the center of <LR stuff1> is
-positioned. For example, "(0,0)" puts it at the center of <LR stuff2>, "(0,1)"
-puts it at the center-top, and "(-1,-1)" puts it in the bottom-left corner.
-
-More generally, the origin of the coordinate system is at the center of <LR
-stuff2>, one unit in the vertical direction is half the vertical size of <LR
-stuff2>, and one unit in the horizontal direction is half the width of <LR
-stuff2>. Thus, <x> and <y> should always be numbers (without units such as
-"pt" or "cm"), with one exception: If <y> is "b" or "B", <LR stuff1> is
-positioned vertically at the baseline of <LR stuff2>. "(<x>,<y>)" is
-optional---the default is "(0,0)".
-
-Except for the funny coordinate system, "\boxput" is like the "\put" command
-in a "picture". In particular, you can use "\makebox" in <LR stuff1> to
-fine-tune the positioning, and <LR-stuff1> can contain a "picture"
-environment.
-
-You might use "\boxput" to put a ``water mark'' in the background of a box, or
-to put a label next to a box, when you don't want this label to take up any
-space. Here is a lazy example:
-\begin{example}
-  \boxput{\makebox(0,0){\Huge Censored!}}{\parbox{3in}{%
-    The origin of the coordinate system is at the center of
-    {\em LR stuff2}, and one unit in the x-direction
-    is half the width of {\em LR stuff2}.}}
-\end{example}
-
-This would be a lot more interesting using PSTricks, with ``Censored!'' in the
-foreground, rotated 30 degrees, and red:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \boxput*{\rput{30}{\Huge\red Censored}}{\parbox{3in}{%
-    blah blah}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-Here is another example using PSTricks:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newcommand{\titledframe}[2]{%
-    \boxput*(0,1){\psframebox*{#1}}%
-      {\psframebox[framesep=12pt]{#2}}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-\newcommand{\titledframe}[2]{%
-  \boxput*(0,1){#1}%
-    {\fboxsep=12pt \fbox{#2}}}
-The following example illustrated roughly how it works, but ``My title'' does
-not blot out the frame behind it because this documentation does not use
-PSTricks. \begin{example}
-  \titledframe{My title}{%
-    \parbox{2in}{The title is superimposed
-      on the top part of the frame.}}
-\end{example}
-
-\section{Framing a whole page}
-
-The commands
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \fancyput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff>}
-  \thisfancyput*(<x>,<y>){<LR stuff>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-are pretty much like "\put" commands in a \LaTeX\ picture environment whose
-origin is 1 inch down and to the right from the top left corner of the
-page.\footnote{Don't blame me for \TeX's peculiar 1 inch margins.} The only
-differences are that (i) that any LR-mode material is permitted (including
-\LaTeX\ "picture" environment, of course), (ii) the coordinate is optional
-"(0pt,0pt)" is substituted by default), and (iii) if the coordinate is
-included, you {\em must} specify the units.
-
-"\thisfancyput" affects only the current page, and is a global declaration
-(analogous to "\thispagestyle").
-
-If you include the optional "*", then the command adds to, rather than
-replaces, other things that have been inserted with "\fancyput" or
-"\thisfancyput".
-
-These commands are particularly useful for framing a page, because you can get
-a frame that is, e.g., 1 inch from each side of the physical page without
-having to worry about what margins you are using for the document. Here is an
-example:
-\begin{example*}
-  \thisfancyput(3.25in,-4.5in){%
-    \setlength{\unitlength}{1in}\fancyoval(7,9.5)}
-\end{example*}
-You could also use "\fancyput" to add some kind of ``watermark'' or background
-image (e.g., a light gray ``DRAFT'').
-
-There are other commands that directly frame or in some other way box the page
-of text:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \fancypage{<cmds1>}{<cmds2>}
-  \thisfancypage{<cmds1>}{<cmds2>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-Each finished page, before adding the headers and footers, (and thus having
-width and height "\textwidth" and "\textheight", is boxed with
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  <cmds1>{<pagebox>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Thus, <cmds1> should be, or should end with, a command whose argument can be a
-box, such as "\fbox" or "\rotateleft".
-
-Then the headers and footers are added, using the new width of the page, and
-this is boxed with
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  <cmds2>{<pagebox>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-The same rules apply to <cmds2> as to <cmds1>.
-
-Here is an example:
-\begin{example*}
-  \thisfancypage{%
-    \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}%
-    \setlength{\shadowsize}{8pt}%
-    \shadowbox}{}
-\end{example*}
-
-{\bf Warning:} The commands described in this section change \LaTeX's output
-routine, and may not work with document styles that do the same. Also, bad
-arguments can cause serious errors with uninformative error messages.
-
-\section{Switching to landscape mode midstream}
-
-The most common reason to switch to landscape mode midstream is to rotate a
-float, such as a table or figure. This was discussed in Section \ref{floats}.
-
-If you want to rotate one or more pages, without rotating the headers and
-footers, use the
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{LandScape}{<cmd>}
-    ...
-  \end{LandScape}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-environment. <cmd> should be the command for rotating the page 90 degrees to
-the left or right. (E.g., "\rotateleft", or "\rotate[l]".)
-
-If you want to rotate the headers, footers and margins as well, use the
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{Landscape}{<paperwidth>}{<paperheight>}{<cmd>}
-    ...
-  \end{Landscape}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-environment (the small "s" makes the difference) to rotate the pages left
-(counterclockwise), and use the "Landscape*" environment (same arguments) to
-rotate the pages right (clockwise). The three arguments are the width of the
-paper, the height of the paper, and the rotation command you are using. For
-example, if I have a portrait mode document using the US 8.5in by 11in paper,
-and if "\rotateleft{foo}" rotates "foo" 90 degrees counterclockwise, then I
-can write
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{Landscape}{8.5in}{11in}{\rotateleft}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-You can use "\LandScape", "\Landscape" and "\Landscape*", rather then the
-"LandScape", "Landscape" and "Landscape*" environments, if you want the rest
-of the document to be in landscape mode.
-
-If your document is being printed in landscape mode, then these environments 
-switch to portrait mode.
-
-For example, suppose I have a landscape mode document, and I want to switch to
-portrait mode for the rest of the document, rotating the pages to the
-``right'' with "\rotateright". Then I would write
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \Landscape*{11in}{8.5in}{\rotateright}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-These environments switch the text width and height, leaving the margins
-exactly as they were before. It is quite possible that you want to make other
-changes to the page parameters after switching to landscape mode, but as
-Lamport points out the \LaTeX\ {\em User's Guide and Reference Manual}, this
-generally doesn't work right in the middle of the document. "fancybox.sty" has
-a command "\UsePageParameters" which gets around this. It should be used right
-after you change the page parameters (and the page parameter changes should
-come right after the beginning of the landscape environment, or "\clearpage").
-
-{\bf Warning:} The commands and environments described in this section change
-\LaTeX's output routine, and may not work with document styles that do the
-same. Also, bad arguments can cause serious errors with uninformative error
-messages.
-
-\section{Verbatim}
-
-If you try to frame some verbatim text by typing
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \fbox{%
-    \begin{minipage}{5cm}
-      \begin{verbatim}
-        \My \Program \Listing
-        if { foo } { bar } fi
-      \end{verbatim}
-    \end{minipage}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-you will get nonsense at best. This is because the argument to "\fbox" is read
-before the "\begin{verbatim}" is processed. But then it is too late for \TeX\
-to go back and interpret the contents of the verbatim environment literally
-rather than as special \TeX\ commands and characters.
-
-One solution is to use the "Sbox" environment:
-\begin{example}
-  \begin{Sbox}
-  \begin{minipage}{5cm}
-  \begin{verbatim}
-  \My \Program \Listing
-  if { foo } { bar } fi
-  \end{verbatim}
-  \end{minipage}
-  \end{Sbox}
-  \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}
-  \fbox{\TheSbox}
-\end{example}
-
-"fancybox.sty" also contains a command that ``fixes'' \LaTeX's LR-box commands
-for use with verbatim text:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \VerbBox{<cmd>}{<LR stuff>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-This is like
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  <cmd>{<LR stuff>}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-but <LR stuff> can contain verbatim text.\footnote{Or other tricks that
-involve "\catcode" changes, as occurs with some foreign language macros.} For
-example:
-\begin{example}
-  \VerbBox{\fbox}{\verb+\foo{bar}+}
-\end{example}
-
-For footnotes, put the command "\VerbatimFootnotes" in the preamble, and then
-you can use verbatim commands or environments in the argument of "\footnote".
-This is an optional feature because it might conflict with somebody else's
-modification of the footnote system.
-
-If you try to define your own framed verbatim environment with
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newenvironment{FramedVerb}%
-    {\begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}{5in}\begin{verbatim}}
-    {\end{verbatim}\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}
-      \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}\fbox{\TheSbox}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-and then type
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{FramedVerb}
-    if { foo } { bar } fi
-  \end{FramedVerb}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-you will again run into trouble because after the "\begin{verbatim}", \LaTeX\
-is searching for the literal string "\end{verbatim}" as the end of the
-verbatim text. It just skips right over the "\end{FramedVerb}" and may well
-continue to the end of the file or until it throws up.
-
-"fancybox.sty" contains some verbatim environments that get around this
-problem and that have other advantages for LR-boxing verbatim listings, when
-compared to the standard \LaTeX\ "verbatim" environment. Admittedly, many of
-their special features have nothing to do with boxes.
-
-Here are the basic verbatim environments:
-\begin{description}
-  \vitem"Verbatim" Works pretty much like \LaTeX's "verbatim".
-  \vitem"LVerbatim" Like "Verbatim", but "list" rather than "trivlist" is used
-to display the listing, and so it is indented from the left margin. (This is
-what I am using for verbatim listings in this document.)
-  \vitem"BVerbatim[<pos>]" Produces a box with the same width as the longest
-verbatim line. The baseline is in the center, unless you include the optional
-argument "[t]" for alignment with the top line or "[b]" for alignment with the
-bottom line.
-  \vitem"VerbatimOut{<file>}" Writes the verbatim text to <file>.
-  \vitem"SaveVerbatim{<cmd>}" Saves the verbatim text as <cmd>. <cmd> is
-defined globally, without checking whether <cmd> is already defined. Use
-obviously innocuous names like "\MyTemp".
-\end{description}
-
-{\bf Important:} For any of these verbatim environments, or new verbatim
-environments you define yourself (see below), nothing should come after
-"\begin{Verbatim}" or before "\end{Verbatim}" on the same line --- not even
-spaces!%
-  \footnote{If you need to allow something to come before "\end{Verbatim}",
-then you have two options:
-  \begin{itemize}
-  \item Put the command "\AltGetVerbatim" in the preamble. This switches to a
-scheme where anything preceding "\end{Verbatim}" is simply ignored. This can
-cause problems if you do really weird things with active characters or other
-commands within the verbatim environment (e.g., active conditionals that are
-not balanced within a line of verbatim text), but in this case you are
-probably a good enough hacker to use the next option.
-  \item "\EndVerbatimTokens" is a token register that you can set to the
-tokens that should precede "\end{Verbatim}" on the same line, with their
-verbatim "\catcode"'s.
-  \end{itemize}}
-If you put something after "\begin{Verbatim}" on the same line, it is simply
-ignored. However, if you put something after "\end{Verbatim}" on the same
-line, or if you misspell "\end{Verbatim}", you will get an error such as
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  ! File ended while scanning use of \Verbatim.
-\end{LVerbatim}
-and the document will end at that point.
-
-You can define new verbatim environments using "\newenvironment". You just
-have to start the definition with
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \VerbatimEnvironment
-\end{LVerbatim}
- For example, here is the framed verbatim environment we tried earlier:
-\begin{example**}
-  \newenvironment{FramedVerb}%
-    {\VerbatimEnvironment
-      \begin{Sbox}\begin{minipage}{5cm}\begin{Verbatim}}%
-    {\end{Verbatim}\end{minipage}\end{Sbox}
-      \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}\fbox{\TheSbox}}
-\end{example**}
-Let's give it a try:
-\begin{example}
-  \begin{FramedVerb}
-  if { foo } { bar } fi
-  \end{FramedVerb}
-\end{example}
-
-Here are three commands for inputting a whole file verbatim. The file must end
-with a new line.
-\begin{description}
-  \vitem"\VerbatimInput{<file>}" Like "\Verbatim".
-  \vitem"\LVerbatimInput{<file>}" Like "\LVerbatim".
-  \vitem"\BVerbatimInput[<pos>]{<file>}" Like "\BVerbatim".
-\end{description}
-
-Here are three commands for making use of verbatim text that has been saved to
-a command:
-\begin{description}
-  \vitem"\UseVerbatim{<cmd>}" Like "\Verbatim".
-  \vitem"\LUseVerbatim{<cmd>}" Like "\LVerbatim".
-  \vitem"\BUseVerbatim[<pos>]{<cmd>}" Like "\BVerbatim".
-\end{description}
-The "SaveVerbatim" environment and the "\UseVerbatim" commands are useful for 
-including verbatim text in the argument of "\marginpar", "\fbox" and other
-commands. For example, here is another way to define the "FramedVerb"
-environment:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newenvironment{FramedVerb}%
-    {\VerbatimEnvironment
-      \begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp}}%
-    {\end{SaveVerbatim}%
-      \setlength{\fboxsep}{8pt}%
-      \fbox{\begin{minipage}{5cm}\UseVerbatim{\MyTemp}
-        \end{minipage}}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-Here are some verbatim commands for short-pieces of (in-line) verbatim text:
-\begin{description}
-  \vitem"\Verb<char> <literal> <char>" \ \\
-  Like \LaTeX's "\verb" command, but it will complain if it encounters a new
-line in <literal>.\footnote{Be careful that your word processing does not
-insert one for you.} For example:
-\begin{example*}
-  "\begin{quote}
-  The main use for the \Verb+SaveVerbatim+
-  environment and the \Verb+\UseVerbatim+
-  commands is to include $\ldots$
-  "\end{quote}
-\end{example*}
-  \vitem"\UseVerb{<cmd>}" Like "\UseVerbatim", but without any particular
-formatting. It is intended for including short pieces of literal text saved
-with "\SaveVerb" (below).\footnote{But it can also be used for multiple lines
-saved with the "SaveVerbatim" environment if you want to do the formatting
-yourself. E.g., try this in a tabbing environment with "\VerbatimTab"
-appropriately defined.}
-  \vitem"\SaveVerb[<whatever>]{<cmd>}<char> <literal> <char>"\ \\
-  This is like "\Verb", but it saves <literal> as <cmd>, and then returns to
-the optional argument <whatever>. Like the "SaveVerbatim" environment, it
-defines <cmd> globally without checking whether <cmd> is already defined.
-Without the optional argument, the most common use is for including verbatim
-text in a "\marginpar", "\section" or other command argument.
-
-  The optional argument can be used for special tricks. For example, all the
-listings of commands in this documentation use "\vitem" in a "description"
-environment, where "\vitem" is defined by:\footnote{The braces enclosing the
-optional argument of "\SaveVerb" prevent the "]" inside the argument from
-being mistaken for the end of the argument.}
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newcommand{\vitem}%
-    {\SaveVerb[{\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}]}]{\MyTemp}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Whereas
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \item[\Verb"\foo"]
-\end{LVerbatim}
-would not work because after "\item" reads its argument it is too late to
-interpret "\foo" literally,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \vitem"foo"
-\end{LVerbatim}
-does work because it is equivalent to
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \SaveVerb{\MyTemp}"foo"\item[\UseVerb{\MyTemp}]
-\end{LVerbatim}
-\end{description}
-
-
-These environments and commands use various parameters that make it easy to
-customize their behavior. However, until you want to find the need for such
-customization, you might as well ignore the rest of this section.
-
-Internally, "fancybox.sty" separates the reading and formatting of verbatim
-text. Most of the environments and commands perform both functions, but
-"SaveVerbatim" and "\SaveVerb" only read the text, while "UseVerbatim" (and
-company) and "\UseVerb" only format the text. "VerbatimOut" gets special
-treatment. The parameters that apply to each class of verbatim environment or
-command is listed in Table \ref{verbtable}.
-
-\begin{table}
-\begin{center}
-\renewcommand{\arraystretch}{0}
-\setlength{\tabcolsep}{7pt}
-\newcommand{\vs}{& \\[\tabcolsep]}
-\newcommand{\VS}{\\ \vs \hline \vs}
-\begin{tabular}{|l|l|}
-\hline \vs
-{\em Where} & {\em What}
-\\ \vs \hline
-\hline \vs
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    Environments\\
-    that format
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-&
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    "\VerbatimSpace"\\
-    "\VerbatimTab"\\
-    "\VerbatimFont"\\
-    "\VerbatimFuzz"\\
-    "\EveryVerbatimLine"\\
-    "\EveryVerbatim"\\
-    "\ThisVerb"
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-\VS
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    Environments\\
-    that read
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-&
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    "\EveryVerbatimCodes"\\
-    "\ThisVerbCodes"
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-\VS
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    "\Verb" and\\
-    "\UseVerb"
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-&
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    "\VerbSpace"\\
-    "\VerbTab"\\
-    "\VerbFont"\\
-    "\EveryVerb"\\
-    "\ThisVerb"
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-\VS
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    "\Verb" and\\
-    "\SaveVerb"
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-&
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    "\EveryVerbCodes"\\
-    "\ThisVerbCodes"
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-\VS
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    "VerbatimOut"
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-&
-  \begin{Bflushleft}
-    "\EveryVerbOutCodes"\\
-    "\ThisVerbCodes"\\
-    "\EveryVerbOutLine"\\
-    "\ThisVerb"
-  \end{Bflushleft}
-\\ \vs \hline
-\end{tabular}
-\caption{Parameters for the verbatim environments and
-commands.\label{verbtable}}
-\end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-All the parameters, including "\VerbatimFuzz", are ordinary commands, and
-should be changed with "\renewcommand".
-
-Here is a description of each of the parameters for environments that format
-the verbatim text:
-\begin{description}
-  \vitem"\VerbatimSpace" The insertion text for spaces. The default is "\ ",
-which produces a blank space. Change it to "\ttspace" to get \ttspace.
-  \vitem"\VerbatimTab" The insertion text for tabs. The default is
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \
-\end{LVerbatim}
-  \vitem"\VerbatimFont" The font to use for verbatim text. The default is
-"\tt"
-  \vitem"\VerbatimFuzz" This is the amount by which lines can be too long in a
-"Verbatim" or "LVerbatim" environment before you get overfull "\hbox"
-warnings. This threshold is usually .1pt, but the default definition of
-"\VerbatimFuzz" is "2pt" because verbatim lines won't break and are therefore
-often too long.
-  \vitem"\EveryVerbatimLine" This is inserted at the beginning of each line of
-verbatim environments or verbatim files. By default it does nothing. I like to
-indent each line in the verbatim environment in the input file by 2 spaces, so
-I define
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-to eat those spaces. (But I have to remember to put in two spaces or space
-markers for blank lines too.) You might also use it to number the lines. For
-example:
-\begin{example}
-  \newcounter{VerbLineNo}
-  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}%
-    {\makebox[10pt][r]{%
-       \stepcounter{VerbLineNo}%
-       \tiny\rm\arabic{VerbLineNo}}%
-    \hspace{10pt}}
-  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatim}%
-    {\setcounter{VerbLineNo}{0}}
-  \begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp}
-  \setlength{\fboxsep}{15pt}
-  \setlength{\mylength}{\linewidth}
-  \end{SaveVerbatim}
-  \fbox{\BUseVerbatim{\MyTemp}}
-\end{example}
-  \vitem"\EveryVerbatim" Whatever else you want to say before formatting the
-verbatim text. By default, it does nothing.
-  \vitem"\ThisVerb" This is executed before any of the commands above, and
-then its value is cleared. Use this to customize a single verbatim formatting
-environment.
-\end{description}
-
-Here is a description of the parameters for environments that read the
-verbatim text:
-\begin{description}
-  \vitem"\EveryVerbatimCodes" This command is inserted just before reading the
-verbatim text. Use it to play with "\catcode"'s (see the {\em \TeX book}). For
-example, I might type
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimCodes}{\catcode`\"=14}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-if I want to use \Verb+"+ as a comment character in verbatim text.%
-%% The use of SaveVerbatim and \SaveVerb is not necessary here because
-%% \VerbatimFootnotes is in effect. This is just a test.
-\begin{SaveVerbatim}{\MyTemp}
-  \def\MyQuote{"}    % \MyQuote is now the character ",
-  \def\temp{\Verb"}  %    in case I need it.
-  \catcode`\"=13     % Now " is like a command.
-  \let"\temp         % Now "foo" is like \Verb"foo"
-  \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}      % Now " can be used in verbatim
-  \edef\dospecials{\dospecials\do\"}  % environments anyway.
-\end{SaveVerbatim}\SaveVerb{\Foo}+"+\SaveVerb{\FFoo}+\Verb"foo"+%
-\footnote{Here is another "\catcode" trick. We make \UseVerb{\Foo} a short
-verbatim command, so that we can say \UseVerb{\Foo foo\Foo} instead of
-\UseVerb{\FFoo}:
-\LUseVerbatim{\MyTemp}}
-  \vitem"\ThisVerbCodes" This command is executed before "\EveryVerbCodes",
-and then it is cleared. Use this to fool with the "\catcode"`s of a single
-verbatim environment.
-\end{description}
-
-The parameters for "\Verb", "\UseVerb" and "\SaveVerb" and the "VerbatimOut"
-environment are analogous to the similar commands for other environments.
-
-Here is an example of the use of "\ThisVerb" to define a variant of "\Verb"
-that uses \ttspace\ to mark spaces:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newcommand{\SVerb}{%
-    \renewcommand{\ThisVerb}%
-      {\renewcommand{\VerbatimSpace}{\ttspace}}%
-    \Verb}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-Finally, without further comment, here are the definitions of the "example"
-and "example*" environments that were used for the examples in this document:
-{\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}{}\LVerbatimInput{\jobname.ex1}}
-
-\section{Changes}
-\raggedright
-
-\paragraph*{Version 0.9, November 23, 1992} First release.
-
-\paragraph*{Version 0.91, November 25, 1992}
-\begin{enumerate}
-  \item "\shadowsize" is now a length, to be set with "\setlength" or
-"\addtolength".
-  \item "\fancypage" split into "\fancypage" and "\fancyput"
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\paragraph*{Version 0.92, December 20, 1992}
-\begin{enumerate}
-  \item New "\boxput" command for superimposing boxes.
-  \item New "\VerbatimFootnotes" command.
-  \item New "\VerbBox" command for verbatim boxes.
-  \item New "Sbox" environment. Makes "\beginsbox" and "\endsbox"
-    obsolete, but the latter have been retained for compatibility.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\paragraph{Version 0.93, January 20, 1993}
-\begin{enumerate}
-  \item New "\EndVerbatimTokens" for tokens that precede "\end{Verbatim}".
-  \item New "\AltGetVerbatim", to allow any tokens to precede
-"\end{Verbatim}".
-  \item Fixed bug in "\BVerbatimInput" that caused second line to be repeated.
-  \item New "LandScape" environment, for rotating pages without rotating
-headers and footers.
-  \item Slide frames "Oval", "oval", "shadow" and "double" are defined when
-"seminar.sty" v0.93 (and maybe later) is loaded.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\paragraph{Version 1.0, February 10, 1993}
-\begin{enumerate}
-  \item Fixed bugs in "\boxput".
-  \item New "Beqnarray" environment.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\paragraph{Version 1.1, 1997 (D.G./S.R.)}
-\begin{enumerate}
-  \item Minimal adaptations for \LaTeX{} 2e compatibility (macros
-  "\fancypage", "\thisfancypage", "\fancyput", "\thisfancyput",
-  "\@Landscape", "\LandScape").
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\paragraph{Version 1.2, February 27, 1998 (D.G./S.R.)}
-\begin{enumerate}
-  \item Other adaptations for \LaTeX{} 2e.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\paragraph{Version 1.3, September 19, 2000 (D.G./S.R.)}
-\begin{enumerate}
-  \item Corrections of the output routine for \LaTeX{} 2e compatibility
-  (from Marcin Wolinski and Heiko Oberdiek).
-  \item Add a "\ProvidesPackage" command (from Heiko Oberdiek).
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\end{document}
-%% END fancybox.doc
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e
deleted file mode 100644
index a220dca4561..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,62 +0,0 @@
-THIS IS A SUPPLEMENTARY READ-ME FOR V1.0e OF THE SEMINAR PACKAGE
-
-***********************************************************************
-****    "readme" file for the Seminar package, v1.0e, 94/09/12     ****
-***********************************************************************
-
-COPYRIGHT 1993, 1994 by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-
-BUGS: If you have problems using this seminar package with LaTeX2e,
-      report them to Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu. The problem probably lies
-      with seminar.cls. You can probably continue to use the seminar
-      package with LaTeX2e in compatibility mode, while waiting for a bug
-      fix, by renaming seminar.cls to something else.
-
-ABOUT V1.0e:
-
-  The V1.0e distribution is identical to v1.0 of 93/04/01,
-  except for a few changes so that Seminar can work with
-  NFSS2 and LaTeX2e:
-
-   - semhelv.sty and semlcmss.sty have been modified to work
-     with NFSS2 and LaTeX2e (but they still work with NFSS).
-
-   - seminar.cls has been added. This is a LaTeX2e document class,
-     derived from seminar.sty v1.0 by Sebastian Rahtz.
-
-  If you already have have seminar.sty v1.0e, then all you need
-  are this read-me file plus these files from the inputs
-  directory:
-
-    seminar.cls semhelv.sty semlcmss.sty
-
-USING SEMINAR WITH LATEX2E:
-
-  !!! YOU MUST BE USING A LATEX2E RELEASED AFTER 19 FEBRUARY 1994
-
-  You can either use seminar.sty in compatibility mode:
-    \documentstyle{seminar}
-  Or use the seminar.cls document class:
-    \documentclass{seminar}
-
-  Unless you are using other macros that only work in
-  compatibility mode, you might as well use the document class.
-
-  You can use the following options with \documentclass{seminar}:
-
-    article  slidesonly  notes  notesonly  notesonly*
-    noxcomment  portrait  a4 (or a4paper) semhelv semlcmss
-    semlayer semrot semcolor slidesec
-  
-  plus appropriate options for the article document class
-  (e.g., 11pt)
-
-  NOTE: Use `a4' or `a4paper', not `sem-a4'.
-
-  `seminar.cls' is a minimal modification of seminar.sty. The
-  next release will take advantage of more of LaTeX2e's special
-  capabilities.
-
-
-Tim Van Zandt
-August 24, 1994
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst
deleted file mode 100644
index 8d489f677e7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,204 +0,0 @@
-			       ---------------
-			       | PSTricks 97 |
-			       ---------------
-
-
-
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-PSTricks is the work of  Timothy van Zandt <tvz@nwu.edu>
-
-PSTricks 97 is edited by Denis Girou <Denis.Girou@idris.fr>
-  and Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@computing-services.oxford.ac.uk>
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
-
-
-1 - Copyright
-    ---------
-
-COPYRIGHT 1993, 1994, 1999 by Timothy Van Zandt, tvz@nwu.edu.
-
-This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms
-of the LaTeX Project Public License Distributed from CTAN
-archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt.
-
-2 - Introduction
-    ------------
-
-This package is a re-release of PSTricks, incorporating all of the
-beta releases and bug fixes made up to March 1997. It is *not*
-intended as a full new release of PSTricks, but as a consolidation and
-cleaned distribution. Because Timothy van Zandt does not currently have
-enough time to work on PSTricks, he gave permission for Denis Girou
-and Sebastian Rahtz to produce this interim solution.
-
-No new features have been added in PST97, except the release of the
-small pst-fill package for filling (tiling) arbitrary regions and the
-various evolving contributions, but we have merged in all the bug fixes
-and beta addons which Timothy produced.
-
-We have renamed some of the files that make up PSTricks, for consistency.
-
-
-3 - Installation
-    ------------
-
-3.1 - (La)TeX files
-
-      a - You have to move all the files from the "generic" subdirectory
-to a directory part of your TEXINPUTS environment variable, or to add it
-in your TEXINPUTS list of paths.
-
-      b - If you are a LaTeX user (and not only a plain TeX one), you have
-to do the same thing for the "latex" subdirectory, which define LaTeX
-wrappers for all the PSTricks files.
-
-3.2 - PostScript header files
-
-      a - If you use the "dvips" DVI to PostScript converter, you have
-to move all the files from the "dvips" subdirectory to a directory part
-of your DVIPSHEADERS environment variable, or to add it in your DVIPSHEADERS
-list of paths.
-
-      b - If you use the Y&Y's "dvipsone" DVI to PostScript converter,
-you have to rename generic/dvipsone.con to generic/pstricks.con and to move
-all the files of the "dvips" subdirectory to the TeX input folder.
-
-      c - If you use the MicroPress "VTeX" DVI to PostScript converter,
-you have to rename generic/vtex.con to generic/pstricks.con and to move
-all the files of the "dvips" subdirectory to the TeX input folder.
-
-      d - If you use the "textures" (version 1.7 or 1.8) DVI to PostScript
-converter (for Macintosh), you should proceed as follows:
-          * create a new folder PSTricks97 (for instance) as a subfolder in
-Textures' TeX inputs folder,
-          * copy the "generic", "dvips", "latex" and "contrib" subfolders
-from the "pst97" folder to the newly created "PSTricks97" folder,
-          * open the "generic" folder and remove the file pstricks.con,
-then rename the file textures.con to pstricks.con,
-          * open the "dvips" folder and change the following line in the file
-pstricks.pro (courtesy Michael J. Sharpe <msharpe@euclid.ucsd.edu>):
-/STV { SDict begin normalscale end STP  } def
-by
-/STV { Mag 72.27 72 div mul dup neg scale STP  } def
-          It was also reported that the `pst-text' package (to put text
-along paths) doesn't work with the "textures" driver.
-          Textures's users must also look at the page kindly maintained
-by Michael Sharpe: http://math.ucsd.edu/~msharpe/pst-textures.html
-
-      d - If you use another driver than these four ones, you have to adapt
-a pstricks.con file for it, if the one for "dvips" doesn't work for it.
-You can also look at the instructions of the old obsolete/src/pstricks.con
-file. And if nothing work, ask for help on the PSTricks mailing list,
-hopping that somebody on the list has the same configuration than you...
-
-3.3 - Test of the installation
-
-The file doc/test-pst.tex allow you to test all your installation and the
-various components of PSTricks. It is the concatenation of most of the
-examples of the PSTricks chapter of "The LaTeX Graphics Companion".
-You must take care (mainly if you are "normally" a user of plain TeX only,
-that it require LaTeX and some packages of it distribution (namely `calc',
-`ifthen' and `graphicx'). It also require the `random' and `subfigure'
-packages, which can be found on CTAN or the TeXLive cdrom - see the README
-file of the doc subdirectory).
-
-3.4 - Known pitfalls
-
-      a - To use the standard `color' package (which is available both
-for plain TeX and LaTeX) with PSTricks, you must load the `pstcol' extra
-package written by David Carlisle, which interface the two packages,
-loading them in the right order, and overriding some small parts of PSTricks
-to allow it to use the `color' package system for specifying color.
-We strongly recommend that you use the `color' package today.
-
-      b - Don't try to load the `color' package if you use `pst-all'
-(it is already loaded in the correct order).
-
-      c - If needed, preferably load the `graphics' / `graphicx' package
-after PSTricks, and in this case use the `graphics' syntax of \scalebox
-(not the one described in the PSTricks documentation).
-
-      d - If you load `graphics' / `graphicx' before PSTricks, you must use
-the PSTricks syntax of \scalebox in all cases (not the one described
-in the `grfguide' document).
-
-      e - We have rename some package files for consistency. But the reference
-documentation in obsolete/doc subdirectory still refer to the old names.
-So, take care that `pst2eps' is now `pst-eps', `charpath' is now `pst-char',
-`gradient' is now `pst-grad', `textpath' is now `pst-text' and `pstree' is
-now `pst-tree'.
-
-
-4 - Contents
-    --------
-
-4.1 - Subdirectories
-
-The distribution contain the following subdirectories:
-
-contrib : various contributions
-doc     : documentations (up to date ones - the obsolete/doc subdirectory
-          contain the reference documentation for the version 0.93a and
-          the additional old Beta material, which is still necessary to use...)
-dvips   : PostScript header files
-generic : TeX generic sources
-latex   : LaTeX wrappers
-obsolete: documentation and sources for the version 0.93a and the
-          additional old Beta material
-
-4.2 - PSTricks core files
-
-The generic subdirectory contain the core files of PSTricks (and the latex
-subdirectory contain the corresponding wrapper files). By alphabetic order:
-
-multido : loop facility for Generic TeX (in fact independant of PSTricks)
-pst-3d  : 3d projections
-pst-char: stroking and filling character paths
-pst-coil: coils and zigzags
-pst-eps : conversion of PSTricks graphics to EPS files
-pst-fill: fillings and tilings
-pst-grad: gradients
-pst-node: nodes and node connections
-pst-plot: plots
-pst-text: texts along a path
-pst-tree: trees
-
-In addition, there is a LaTeX package `pst-all' in the latex subdirectory,
-which loads all of the PSTricks components, plus `pstcol', in one go
-(`pstcol' require also a color.cfg file defined; make sure you do _not_ load
-the `color' package by itself). The only reason for _not_ using this is that
-it uses extra memory for facilities you might not need.
-
-
-5 - Documentation
-    -------------
-
-There is NOT a complete up to date _reference_ documentation for PSTricks 97.
-You must still refer to the reference documentation of the version 0.93a and
-the additional old Beta material, available in the obsolete/doc subdirectory
-(it was put in the "obsolete" subdirectory to clearly show that it is not up
-to date nor supported by actual mainteners). Take care to notice what has
-changed in additional old Beta documents (betadoc?.ps files) comparing to the
-ones for 0.93a version (pst-usr?.ps files).
-
-Denis Girou maintain a list of known errors in both version 0.93a and
-additional old Beta documentations, in obsolete/doc/pst-doc.err
-
-A large chapter of "The LaTeX Graphics Companion", by Goossens, Rahtz and
-Mittelbach, Addison Wesley 1997, is dedicated to PSTricks, and this
-currently forms the only systematic description of the integration of
-the basic PSTricks and the beta additions of 1993. The source of all examples
-from that book is also on CTAN/info/lgc and most of them in the doc/lgc
-subdirectory of the PST97 distribution.
-
-There is also a supporting set of Web pages, actually maintained
-by Denis Girou, on http://www.tug.org/applications/PSTricks with various
-pointers and examples classified by categories.
-
-And there is also a mailing list devoted to discussions on PSTricks usage.
-The informations to subscribe to this list and to consult the archives can
-be found on the Web page.
-
---
-Denis Girou and Sebastian Rahtz (updated May 5, 1999)
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me
deleted file mode 100644
index ba972a2bf62..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,294 +0,0 @@
--------------------------------------------------------
-IMPORTANT NOTE
-
-With the agreement of Timothy Van Zandt  (now Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu),
-the distributions conditions on seminar are now relaxed to:
-
- This package may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public
- License, as described in lppl.txt in the base LaTeX distribution.
- Either version 1.0 or, at your option, any later version.
-  
-This overrides any conditions listed below. 
-
-June 3rd 1999 (last updated September 2005)
-Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk>
-Denis Girou <denis.girou@idris.fr>
-
-(Tim's helpers on earth)
--------------------------------------------------------
-
-%% BEGIN sem-read.me
-***********************************************************************
-****    "readme" file for seminar.sty package, v1.0, 93/04/01      ****
-***********************************************************************
-
-COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt
-
-DESCRIPTION:
-
-  seminar.sty is a LaTeX document style for typesetting slides or
-  transparencies, and accompanying notes. It has many advantages over
-  SliTeX. Here are some of the style's special features:
-   *  It is a LaTeX style, rather than another format.
-   *  It is compatible with AmS-LaTeX.
-   *  You can use any fonts that work with LaTeX, including PostScript
-      fonts and AmSFonts.
-   *  Slides can be landscape and portrait within the same file.
-   *  Color is supported through PostScript.
-   *  The slides can have a frame and a colored background.
-   *  The magnification can be changed with a single command.
-   *  Overlays can be produced from a single slide environment.
-   *  Accompanying notes, such as the text of a presentation, can be put
-      outside the slide environments. The slides, notes or both together
-      can then be typeset in a variety of formats.
-  Some of these features require a PostScript output device.
-
-FILES:
-
-  Inputs:
-    seminar.sty  : The main style file.
-    sem-page.sty : Page parameters.
-    semlayer.sty : The semlayer style option (overlays and color layers).
-    semhelv.sty  : The semhelv style option .
-    semlcmss.sty : The semlcmss style option.
-    semcolor.sty : The semcolor style option.
-    semrot.sty   : THe semrot style option.
-    slidesec.sty : The slidesec style option.
-    sem-a4.sty   : The sem-a4 style option.
-    xcomment.sty : The macros for omitting notes.
-    2up.tex      : Macros for printing documents two-up.
-    2up.sty      : The same as 2up.tex, but with .sty extension.
-    npsfont.sty  : Macros for defining new PostScript fonts with the NFSS.
-    fancybox.sty : Box tips and tricks for LaTeX.
-
-  Documentation:
-    sem-user.tex : User's guide for seminar.sty.
-    sem-user.ind : Index for sem-user.tex.
-    semsamp1.tex : A sample document for seminar.sty.
-    semsamp2.tex : Another sample document for seminar.sty.
-    2up.doc      : Documentation for 2up.tex.
-    fancybox.doc : Documentation for fancybox.sty.
-    tvz-hax.sty  : For typesetting sem-user.tex and sem-code.tex.
-    tvz-code.sty : For typesetting sem-code.tex.
-    tvz-user.sty : For typesetting sem-user.tex.
-    sem-read.me  : This file.
-    read-me.pst  : The read-me file for the PSTricks package.
-
-  Sources:
-    seminar.doc  : Documented code for seminar.sty.
-    semlayer.doc : Documented code for semlayer.sty.
-    xcomment.doc : Documented code for xcomment.sty.
-    sem-make.tex : For extracting code from seminar.doc and semlayer.doc.
-    sem-code.tex : For typesetting seminar.doc and semlayer.doc.
-    xc-make.tex  : For extracting code from xcomment.doc.
-    xcomment.tex : For typesetting xcomment.doc.
-
-GETTING STARTED:
-
-  1. Put the input files in a directory where your TeX looks for inputs.
-
-  2. Typeset and print sem-user.tex.
-
-  3. Read the preface "Getting Started", and then the appendices.
-
-  4. Typeset semsamp1.tex and semsamp2.tex.
-
-  5  If upgrading from v0.92, see the changes listed at the end of this
-     file. If upgrading from v0.91 or earlier, good luck.
-
-HACKERS:
-
-  The files seminar.doc, semlayer.doc and xcomment.doc contain the
-  documented code, using Frank Mittelbach's doc system.
-  See sem-code.tex and xcomment.tex for instructions on typesetting
-  these files.
-  See sem-make.tex and xc-make.tex for instruction on extracting
-  stripped input (.sty) files from these .doc files.
-
-MORE ABOUT THE SUPPLEMENTAL STYLES AND MACROS:
-
-  The following styles and macros are not specifically for use
-  with seminar.sty, and hence are not described in detail in
-  the seminar.sty User's Guide. You do not need to read the
-  documentation of these files in order to use seminar.sty.
-  If you have versions on your system that are older than the
-  ones distributed with seminar.sty, be sure to replace these.
-
-  FANCYBOX.STY:
-  fancybox.sty is a LaTeX style option with tips and tricks for LR-box
-  commands. The documentation, fancybox.doc, is extensive.
-
-  2UP.TEX:
-  2up.tex/2up.sty contains macros for typesetting documents in a
-  two-up format. seminar.sty's \twoup command provides an interface.
-  2up.doc is the documentation for 2up.tex.
-
-  NPSFONT.STY:
-  npsfont.sty contains macros for defining new PostScript fonts
-  with the New Font Selection Scheme. The documentation is in
-  npsfont.sty itself.
-
-  XCOMMENT.STY:
-  xcomment.sty, a LaTeX style option, permits one to typeset only
-  selected environments, omitting input outside these environments.
-  See xcomment.tex if you want to typeset the documentation.
-
-  SLIDESEC.STY
-  slidesec.sty is an experimental file contains sectioning commands
-  for slide type documents. The documentation is in slidesec.sty
-  itself.
-
-
-SEMINAR.STY AND PSTRICKS.TEX:
-
-  pstricks.tex is a collection of PostScript macros that is compatible
-  with most TeX macro packages, including Plain TeX and LaTeX. Included are
-  macros for color, graphics, rotation, overlays, nodes and much more.
-
-  seminar.sty, combined with the semcolor option, the PSTricks package,
-  and your favorite macros for including EPS files, make a complete
-  TeX presentation software package.
-
-  You can probably obtain the PSTricks package from wherever you got
-  the Seminar package, or try
-    Princeton.EDU:/pub or Princeton.EDU:/pub/tvz
-
-  You must install the PSTricks package before using the semcolor option.
-
-  seminar.sty will work with pstricks.tex v0.92, and maybe later
-  versions.
-
-
-ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS:
-
- The author is thankful to Frank Mittelbach for his documentation system.
-
- Thanks to Sebastian Rahtz for bits of advice, and many users for
- comments and bug reports.
-
-BUGS:
-
-  Too many to list, and who knows what they are anyway. These files are all
-  preliminary and unstable. Not responsible for neck injuries.
-
-
-  Thanks.
-
-CHANGES:
-
-  v1.0: Included sem-a4.sty file, as a way to let the default papersize
-     be A4 (The a4 option still works). Added \epsfslidesize to make
-     it easier to set the slide of eps files with epsf.sty. Fixed bug
-     which caused the width of second pages of a multi-page slide to
-     end up too small if the page only contained a quote or similar
-     environment with reduced margins.
-
-  v0.93a: Fixed bugs so that slides would come out properly with the
-          2-up,article and portrait options (together), and so that
-          slides would be positioned correctly with the portrait style
-          option.
-
-  v0.93:
-
-  INCOMPATIBLE CHANGES:
-
-    !  Use the a4 option instead of sem-a4. There is not longer a
-       separate file for a4.
-
-    !  No more \fewnotes, \nonotes. Use \slideplacement instead.
-
-    !  No more \layerstyle, \overlaystyle.
-
-    !  Slide styles are now "left" and "bottom".
-
-    !  No more \ifslides. Use \ifarticle\else.
-
-    !  You must now use the semlayer option to use overlays (in addition
-      to the semcolor option).
-
-    !  No "down" slide rotation (only "none", "left" and "right".
-
-    !  portrait option is no longer a separate file.
-
-    !  \paperwidth and \paperheight are now ordinary commands, to be set
-      with \renewcommand.
-
-    !  \slidefonts is now always invoked in slide environments, and never in
-      the preamble. (But semhelv.sty and semlcmss.sty have changed to
-      reflect this.)
-
-    !  Method for customizing the slide frames has changed.
-       \slideframecolor, \slideframearc, \slidefillcolor and
-       \slideshadowcolor are obsolete.
-
-    ! \landscape command replaced by \printlandscape to avoid conflict with
-      other style files. (E.g., \def\printlandscape{\special{landscape}}).
-
-  NEW FEATURES:
-
-    +  A slide environment can have multiple `pages'. \extraslideheight{len}
-      controls page cutting. See user's guide for details.
-
-    +  \centerslidestrue (default) causes the contents of partially full
-      slides to be vertically centered in the slide. \centerslidesfalse
-      causes it to be flush top.
-
-    +  New \raggedslides[len] command, for setting
-      whether right margin in slides is ragged or justified. Default is
-      \raggedslides. \raggedslides[0pt] gives justified slides.
-
-    +  \slideplacement
-
-    +  \onlynotestoo
-
-    +  \slideskip and \slideshrink for added control over interline space.
-
-
-    +  New: \slideleftmargini, \slideleftmarginii, \slideleftmarginiii,
-      \slidelabelsep, \slideitemsep, \slidepartopsep,
-      \slideparskip, \slideparindent, \slidefootins, \slidefootnotesep,
-      \slidedisplayskips, \theslidefootnote
-
-    +  \input and \endinput now supported for the slidesonly selection.
-
-    +  New conditional: \ifportrait
-
-    +  \newslideframe
-
-    +  \leftsliderotation, \rightsliderotation.
-
-    +  New \slidetopmargin, \slidebottommargin, \slideleftmargin,
-       \sliderightmargin.
-
-    +  New notesonly* selection.
-
-    +  New \slidesclearpagetrue
-
-    +  New \semcm and \semin.
-
-    +  New note environment and \noxcomment command, as an alternative
-       to treating everything outside slide environments as notes.
-
-
-  BACKWARDS-COMPATIBLE CHANGES:
-
-    *  \maketitle now uses LaTeX's default from article.sty in notes.
-
-    *  Bug in article option with the \twoup command fixed.
-
-    *  \topmargin in sem-a4 changed from -.75in to 1in.
-
-    *  \slidefontsizes is obsolete (but still works). Use \ptsize instead.
-
-    *  Page parameters are now in a separate file sem-page.sty. sem-a4.sty
-      has been changed to reflect this.
-
-  v0.92:
-    Mostly bug fixes, plus some extra options. The PSTricks package
-    is no longer distributed with seminar.sty.
-
-  Pre v0.91:
-    Entirely rewritten. Too many changes to list. Note especially
-    that system of formats and selections has changed.
-
-%% END sem-read.me
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.ind b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.ind
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ce562b55c9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.ind
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
-\begin{theindex}
-
-  \item {\tt 2up} (option), \main{13}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item {\tt a4} (option), \main{37}
-  \item \verb*+\addtoartlength+, \main{18}
-  \item \verb*+\addtoslidelength+, \main{6}
-  \item \verb*+\addtoslidelist+, \main{17}
-  \item \verb*+\addtoslidereset+, \main{12}
-  \item {\tt allversions} (environment), \main{17}
-  \item {\tt allversions*} (environment), \usage{16}, \main{17},
-    \usage{26}
-  \item {\tt article} (option), \usage{7}, \main{13}, \usage{13, 14},
-    \usage{18}, \usage{25}, \usage{28}, \usage{33}
-  \item \verb*+\articlemag+, \main{13}, \usage{14}, \usage{18}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\centerslidesfalse+, \main{2}
-  \item \verb*+\centerslidestrue+, \main{2}
-  \item \verb*+\colorlayers+, \main{21}
-  \item counters:
-    \subitem {\tt overlay}, \main{22}
-    \subitem {\tt slide}, \main{12}
-  \item \verb*+\currlayer+, \main{22}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item environments:
-    \subitem {\tt allversions*}, \usage{16}, \main{17}, \usage{26}
-    \subitem {\tt allversions}, \main{17}
-    \subitem {\tt note}, \main{16}, \usage{16, 17}
-    \subitem {\tt slide*}, \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1}
-    \subitem {\tt slide}, \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1}
-  \item \verb*+\espfslidesize+, \main{25}
-  \item \verb*+\everyslide+, \main{15}
-  \item \verb*+\extraslideheight+, \main{3}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item {\tt fancybox} (option), \usage{10, 11}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\ifarticle+, \usage{19}, \main{27}
-  \item \verb*+\ifnotes+, \main{27}
-  \item \verb*+\ifnotesonly+, \main{27}
-  \item \verb*+\ifportrait+, \main{27}
-  \item \verb*+\ifslidesonly+, \main{27}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\landscapeonly+, \main{1}
-  \item \verb*+\layerframe+, \main{23}
-  \item \verb*+\layerlabel+, \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\layerpagestyle+, \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\layersfalse+, \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\layerstrue+, \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\leftsliderotation+, \main{36}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\newpagestyle+, \main{26}
-  \item \verb*+\newslide+, \main{3}, \usage{12}
-  \item \verb*+\newslideframe+, \main{10}
-  \item {\tt note} (environment), \main{16}, \usage{16, 17}
-  \item {\tt notes} (option), \main{15}, \usage{18, 19}
-  \item {\tt notesonly} (option), \main{15}, \usage{18, 19}
-  \item {\tt notesonly*} (option), \main{19}
-  \item \verb*+\notslides+, \main{12}
-  \item \verb*+\noxcomment+, \main{16}, \usage{17}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\onlynotestoo+, \main{16}, \usage{31}
-  \item \verb*+\onlyslides+, \main{12}, \usage{31}
-  \item options:
-    \subitem {\tt 2up}, \main{13}
-    \subitem {\tt a4}, \main{37}
-    \subitem {\tt article}, \usage{7}, \main{13}, \usage{13, 14},
-    \usage{18}, \usage{25}, \usage{28}, \usage{33}
-    \subitem {\tt fancybox}, \usage{10, 11}
-    \subitem {\tt notesonly*}, \main{19}
-    \subitem {\tt notesonly}, \main{15}, \usage{18, 19}
-    \subitem {\tt notes}, \main{15}, \usage{18, 19}
-    \subitem {\tt portrait}, \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1},
-    \usage{13, 14}, \usage{18, 19}
-    \subitem {\tt semcolor}, \usage{10, 11}, \usage{20}, \usage{27},
-    \usage{31}, \usage{35}, \main{36}, \usage{36, 37}
-    \subitem {\tt semhelv}, \main{33}
-    \subitem {\tt semlayer}, \main{20}, \usage{20}, \usage{31},
-    \usage{35}, \usage{37}
-    \subitem {\tt semlcmss}, \main{33}
-    \subitem {\tt semrot}, \main{36}, \usage{36}
-    \subitem {\tt slidesonly}, \main{15}, \usage{26}
-    \subitem {\tt slides}, \usage{18}
-  \item \verb*+\overlay+, \main{21}, \usage{21}
-  \item {\tt overlay} (counter), \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\overlayframe+, \main{23}
-  \item \verb*+\overlaylabel+, \usage{22}
-  \item \verb*+\overlaypagestyle+, \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\overlaysfalse+, \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\overlaystrue+, \main{22}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\paperheight+, \usage{5}
-  \item \verb*+\paperwidth+, \usage{5}
-  \item {\tt portrait} (option), \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1},
-    \usage{13, 14}, \usage{18, 19}
-  \item \verb*+\portraitonly+, \main{1}
-  \item \verb*+\printlandscape+, \main{35}
-  \item \verb*+\ptsize+, \main{8}, \usage{32}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\raggedslides+, \main{2}, \usage{2}, \usage{24}
-  \item \verb*+\renewpagestyle+, \main{26}
-  \item \verb*+\rightsliderotation+, \main{36}
-  \item \verb*+\rotateheadersfalse+, \main{36}
-  \item \verb*+\rotateheaderstrue+, \main{36}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\semcm+, \usage{5}, \main{6}
-  \item {\tt semcolor} (option), \usage{10, 11}, \usage{20},
-    \usage{27}, \usage{31}, \usage{35}, \main{36},
-    \usage{36, 37}
-  \item {\tt semhelv} (option), \main{33}
-  \item \verb*+\semin+, \usage{5}, \main{6}
-  \item {\tt semlayer} (option), \main{20}, \usage{20}, \usage{31},
-    \usage{35}, \usage{37}
-  \item {\tt semlcmss} (option), \main{33}
-  \item {\tt semrot} (option), \main{36}, \usage{36}
-  \item \verb*+\setartlength+, \main{18}
-  \item {\tt slide} (counter), \main{12}
-  \item {\tt slide} (environment), \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1}
-  \item {\tt slide*} (environment), \usage{iii}, \main{1}, \usage{1}
-  \item \verb*+\slidearraystretch+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slidebottommargin+, \main{5}, \usage{5}
-  \item \verb*+\slideclearpagetrue+, \main{19}
-  \item \verb*+\slidefonts+, \main{15}
-  \item \verb*+\slidefootfont+, \main{20}
-  \item \verb*+\slidefootnotesep+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slideframe+, \main{10}, \usage{10, 11}
-  \item \verb*+\slideframesep+, \usage{5}, \main{10}
-  \item \verb*+\slideframewidth+, \usage{5}, \main{10}
-  \item \verb*+\slidefuzz+, \usage{4}
-  \item \verb*+\slideheadfont+, \main{20}
-  \item \verb*+\slideheight+, \main{2}, \usage{5}, \usage{14}
-  \item \verb*+\slideitemsep+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slidelabel+, \main{14}, \usage{14}
-  \item \verb*+\slidelabelsep+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slideleftmargin+, \main{5}, \usage{5}
-  \item \verb*+\slideleftmargini+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slideleftmarginii+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slideleftmarginiii+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slidepagestyle+, \main{16}
-  \item \verb*+\slideparindent+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slideparskip+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slidepartopsep+, \main{8}
-  \item \verb*+\slideplacement+, \main{18}
-  \item \verb*+\slidereset+, \main{12}
-  \item \verb*+\sliderightmargin+, \main{5}, \usage{5}
-  \item \verb*+\sliderotation+, \main{36}
-  \item {\tt slides} (option), \usage{18}
-  \item \verb*+\slidesep+, \main{19}, \usage{19}
-  \item \verb*+\slideshrink+, \main{9}, \usage{9}
-  \item \verb*+\slideskip+, \main{9}, \usage{9}
-  \item \verb*+\slidesmag+, \main{6}, \usage{14}, \usage{24}
-  \item {\tt slidesonly} (option), \main{15}, \usage{26}
-  \item \verb*+\slidestretch+, \main{8}, \usage{9}, \usage{24}
-  \item \verb*+\slidestyle+, \main{14}
-  \item \verb*+\slidetopmargin+, \main{5}, \usage{5}
-  \item \verb*+\slidewidth+, \main{2}, \usage{5}, \usage{14}
-
-  \indexspace
-
-  \item \verb*+\thelayer+, \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\theoverlay+, \main{22}
-  \item \verb*+\theslide+, \main{12}, \usage{12}
-  \item \verb*+\theslidefootnote+, \main{12}
-  \item \verb*+\truepagenumbers+, \main{25}
-  \item \verb*+\twoup+, \main{13}, \usage{13, 14}, \usage{25},
-    \usage{32}
-
-\end{theindex}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 2227746eae3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf
+++ /dev/null
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b0fb3c480e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1935 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN sem-user.tex
-\def\FileDate{93/04/01}
-\def\FileVersion{1.0}
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% Copying of part or all of any file in the seminar.sty package
-%% is allowed under the following conditions only:
-%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the files. Please
-%%     include the documentation when you do so.
-%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of any file, but only for personal
-%%     use or use within an organization.
-%% (3) You may copy fragments from the files, for personal use or for use
-%%     in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given
-%%     where credit is due.
-%%
-%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of
-%% these files or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for
-%% a nominal charge for copying etc.
-%%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%
-%% This LaTeX file prints the User's Guide for seminar.sty.
-%% You must have my tvz-hax.sty, tvz-user.sty, and fancybox.sty,
-%% which are distributed with seminar.sty.
-%%
-%% This is distributed with the index file sem-user.ind.
-%% To make an new index, run, e.g.:
-%%   makeindex sem-user.idx
-%%
-%% STYLE OPTIONS:
-%%   `a4'       : For A4 paper.
-%%   `twoside'  : For two-sided printing.
-%%   `2up'      : For two-up printing. (Uses non-standard font magnifications.
-%%                                      See 2up.doc for details.)
-%%
-
-\documentstyle[12pt]{tvz-user}
-
-\makeindex
-
-% Used with twoside option:
-\def\theheadertitle{seminar.sty: User's Guide}
-
-% No headers, 1in top margin
-\setlength{\topmargin}{0pt}
-\setlength{\headheight}{0pt}
-\setlength{\headsep}{0pt}
-\setlength{\textheight}{8.75in}
-\setlength{\footskip}{.625in}
-\papersizeadjust
-
-% Change part environment:
-\renewcommand{\part}[1]{%
-  \clearpage
-  \refstepcounter{part}
-  \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{\thepart}#1}%
-  \hrule height 1pt\relax
-  \vskip 1ex
-  \hbox to\columnwidth{\strut\huge\bf\thepart\hfil#1}%
-  \vskip 1ex
-  \hrule height 1pt\relax
-  \vskip 3ex}
-
-\def\MainFont{\tt}            % For macro definitions.
-
-\ShortVerb
-\ShortMeta
-
-\let\filedate\FileDate
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\thispagestyle{empty}
-
-\null
-\vfill
-
-\begin{center}
-  {\huge\bf seminar.sty}\\[9pt]
-  {\LARGE\bf A \bLaTeX\ style for slides and notes}\\[14pt]
-  {\LARGE\bf User's Guide}\par
-  \vskip 1.5em
-  \large
-  \renewcommand{\thefootnote}{\fnsymbol{footnote}}
-  Timothy Van Zandt\\
-  {\normalsize\tt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu}
-  \vskip 1em
-  \thefiledate\\ Version \FileVersion\par
-\end{center}
-\par
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1cm}
-\thicklines
-\centerline{\lower.8in\hbox{%
-\begin{picture}(0,0)
-\put(2,-11){\framebox(4,2){}}
-\put(2,-11){\line(-2,3){1}}
-\put(2,-9){\line(-2,3){1}}
-\put(6,-9){\line(-2,3){1}}
-\put(1,-9.5){\line(0,1){2}}
-\put(1,-7.5){\line(1,0){4}}
-\put(5.8,-8.7){\line(0,1){2}}
-\put(5.0,-6.7){\oval(1.6,1.6)[tr]}
-\put(5.0,-5.9){\line(-1,0){.7}}
-\put(3.1,-6.4){\framebox(1.2,1){}}
-\put(3.1,-6.4){\line(-1,2){.3}}
-\put(3.1,-5.4){\line(-1,3){.3}}
-\put(4.3,-5.4){\line(-1,3){.3}}
-\put(2.8,-5.8){\line(0,1){1.3}}
-\put(2.8,-4.5){\line(1,0){1.2}}
-\put(0,6.2){\oval(14,10)}
-\put(.02,6.18){\oval(14,10)}
-\thinlines
-\put(2.8,-5.8){\line(-4,3){9.6}}
-\put(2.8,-4.5){\line(-3,5){9.35}}
-\put(4,-4.5){\line(1,6){2.6}}
-\put(6.8,1.4){\line(-1,-3){2.5}}
-\end{picture}}}
-\par
-\bigskip
-\rightskip=0pt plus 2em\relax
-\parshape=20
-0cm 2.3cm
-0cm 2.9cm
-0cm 3.5cm
-0cm 4.1cm
-0cm 4.7cm
-0cm 5.3cm
-0cm 5.9cm
-0cm 6.5cm
-0cm 7.1cm
-0cm 7.7cm
-0cm 8.3cm
-0cm 8.3cm
-0cm 8.3cm
-0cm 7.3cm
-0cm 7.3cm
-0cm 7.3cm
-0cm 7.3cm
-0cm 7.3cm
-0cm 7.3cm
-0cm 7.3cm
-seminar.sty is a \LaTeX\ style for typesetting slides or
-transparencies, and accompanying notes. Here are some of its special features:
-It is compatible with \AmS-\LaTeX, and you can use PostScript and \AmS{}
-fonts. Slides can be landscape and portrait. There is support for color and
-frames. The magnification can be changed easily.
-Overlays can be produced from a single slide environment. Accompanying notes,
-such as the text of a presentation, can be put
-    outside the slide environments. The slides, notes or both together
-    can then be typeset in a variety of formats.
-
-\vfill
-
-\twosideclearpage
-\pagenumbering{roman}
-\tableofcontents
-
-\twosideclearpage
-
-\section*{Getting Started}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Getting Started}
-\markboth{Getting Started}{Getting Started}
-
-"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX{} document style for typesetting slides, and more.
-
-You should know how to use \LaTeX, as described in Leslie Lamport's \LaTeX:
-{\em User's Guide and Reference Manual}.
-
-Let's get started:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item If you are installing "seminar.sty", read the the accompanying read-me
-file, and put the input files where your \TeX\ looks for inputs.
-
-\item Typeset the sample file, "semsamp1.tex", to see that everything is
-working. You can use \LaTeX\ or \AmS-\LaTeX.
-
-\item Read Appendix \ref{short-fonts}, on page \pageref{short-fonts}.
-
-\item To start making landscape slides, use
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \documentstyle{seminar}
-  \begin{document}
-  \begin{slide}
-    foo
-  \end{slide}
-  \end{document}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-and print out your document in landscape mode.
-
-\item To start making portrait slides, include the \o{portrait} style option,
-and use the \e{slide*} environment instead of \e{slide}:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \documentstyle[portrait]{seminar}
-  \begin{document}
-  \begin{slide*}
-    foo
-  \end{slide*}
-  \end{document}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-\item If you have used \SliTeX, see Section \ref{slitex}.
-
-\item For A4 paper, use the "a4" style option.
-
-\item When you are ready to explore "seminar.sty"'s special features, skim the
-{\em User's Guide}, including the appendices.
-
-\item Play around with the sample file "semsamp2.tex" to try out some of
-"seminar.sty"'s special features.
-
-\item When you run into problems, look for help in Part \ref{Help}.
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\twosideclearpage
-
-\pagenumbering{arabic}
-
-\part{Just slides}
-
-\section{Landscape and portrait slides}
-
-"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX\ (or \AmS-\LaTeX) document style. Thus, begin your
-document with
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \documentstyle{seminar}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-The slide environments are\MainEnvIndex{slide}\MainEnvIndex{slide*}%
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{slide}    ...    \end{slide}
-  \begin{slide*}   ...    \end{slide*}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-\e{slide} is for landscape slides and \e{slide*} is for portrait slides.
-
-By default, the document is typeset in landscape mode, but if you include the
-\O{portrait} style option, the document is typeset in portrait mode.
-Typesetting the document in landscape mode is different from printing it in
-landscape mode; you may have to take care of the latter when printing with
-your dvi driver (see Appendix \ref{S-landscape}).
-
-If you have both landscape and portrait slides in your file, there are two
-ways to print the slides:
-\begin{itemize}
-  \item If you dvi driver supports rotation, then you can print all the slides
-at once. See Appendix \ref{S-landscape} for details.
-  \item You can first print your landscape slides by putting the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \landscapeonly
-\end{MD}
-in the preamble, and then print the portrait slides by inserting instead the
-command
-\begin{MD}
-  \portraitonly
-\end{MD}
-and including the \o{portrait} style option.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{The height and width of slides\label{slidedim}}
-
-The dimensions of the slides are set by the lengths
-\begin{MD}
-  \slidewidth\\
-  \slideheight
-\end{MD}
-The ``width'' refers to the width of a slide when looking at it in landscape
-orientation, whether it is a landscape or portrait slide (and the same goes
-for ``height''). The default width is 8.5 inches and the default height is 6.3
-inches.
-
-The slide environments have an optional argument that lets you change the
-dimensions of a single slide, as in
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{slide*}[7.5in,6in]
-\end{LVerbatim}
-The first dimension is the slide's ``width'', and the second dimension is the
-slides ``height''. If you remember what we said about what ``width'' and
-``height'' mean, you will see that the above example begins a portrait slide
-that is 7.5 inches high and 6 inches wide.
-
-
-\section{Margins within a slide}
-
-When a slide is not full, the material is vertically centered within the
-slide. The command
-\begin{MD}
-  \centerslidesfalse
-\end{MD}
-cause the material to be flush to the top, instead. The command
-\begin{MD}
-  \centerslidestrue
-\end{MD}
-switches back to vertical centering.
-
-The right margin in slides is ragged by default. You can change this with the
-command
-\begin{MD}
-  \raggedslides[len]
-\end{MD}
-<len> should be the maximum space between the end of the line and the right
-margin. The argument is optional; \n\raggedslides\ is equivalent to
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \raggedslides[1fil]
-\end{LVerbatim}
-which gives a ragged right margin, as in \LaTeX's "flushleft" environment (the
-default). On the other hand,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \raggedslides[0pt]
-\end{LVerbatim}
-gives a justified margin, and
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \raggedslides[2em]
-\end{LVerbatim}
-gives a semi-ragged margin. Note that as a margin becomes less ragged,
-hyphenation becomes more likely and more material fits on a slide.
-
-\section{Page breaking within a slide environment\label{S-pagebreak}}
-
-A slide environment can contain more than one ``page'' of slides; \TeX\ will
-break slides into pages automatically.
-
-If the mere idea disturbs you, put the command
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \extraslideheight{10in}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-in your document. You can then divide slides into pages yourself by starting
-new slide environments or using the
-\begin{MD}
-  \newslide
-\end{MD}
-command within a slide environment. And you need read this section no further.
-
-If instead you use the command
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \extraslideheight{0pt}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-then \TeX\ will break pages the way you would expect. This is a quick and
-dirty way to break a whole paper or a long proof into slides.
-
-However, dividing material into slides is usually too delicate a matter to be
-left up to \TeX, and ultimately you will make all the page breaks yourself. On
-the other hand, automatic page breaking can still be helpful at the early
-stages, letting \TeX\ find preliminary page breaks for you.
-
-Setting the "\extraslideheight" to "0pt" doesn't give you much flexibility
-about where to put the page breaks. Of course, you can always put a page break
-earlier than the one found by \TeX, but occasionally you will prefer to let a
-slide overflow by a small amount rather than rewrite the whole slide.
-
-Therefore, by default, "seminar.sty" uses\MainIndex{\extraslideheight}%
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \extraslideheight{10pt}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-This adds on an extra "10pt" to the target slide height (as determined by
-"\slideheight" for landscape slides and "\slidewidth" for portrait slides)
-{\em for the purpose of page-breaking only}.
-
-If the resulting slide exceeds the slide height, you will get a message like
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  LaTeX Error: Slide 3 overfull by 9pt.
-\end{LVerbatim}
-"seminar.sty" then tries to reduce the slide to its maximum height by
-squeezing out rubber vertical space (e.g., tightening up the interline
-spacing). If the slide is still too full, you will get another warning like:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  Overfull \vbox by 4.4pt while output was active.
-\end{LVerbatim}
-You can go back and look for a way to make the slide shorter, or you can
-insert a "\newslide" command to change the page-break, or you can just ignore
-these warnings.
-
-The recommended value to give in the argument of "\extraslideheight" is the
-largest length by which you might be willing to let  a slide overflow.
-
-After you have decided on the page breaks, you can shut up the warnings about
-overfull slides and "\vbox"'s with
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \renewcommand{\slidefuzz}{1in}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-The value of \n\slidefuzz\ (which should be length, even though \n\slidefuzz\
-is an ordinary command sequence) is the threshold above which "seminar.sty"
-gives a warning about an overfull slide. The default definition is "2pt".
-
-
-\section{Margins on the page\label{S-slidemargins}}
-
-After "seminar.sty" makes a slide (or a slide page) as described above, it
-(optionally) frames the slide. This is described in Section \ref{S-frames}.
-For making and framing the slide, "seminar.sty" does not need to know anything
-about the paper you are printing on, or the margins you want. Hence, none of
-\LaTeX's standard page parameters are relevant within a slide environment.
-(However, for the sake of consistency, "seminar.sty" sets "\textwidth" to the
-width of the slide and "\textheight" to the height of the slide within a slide
-environment.)
-
-Now "seminar.sty" has to do something with the finished slide. As you read
-this User's Guide, you will find that there are various options. However,
-right now we are making slides for printing on transparencies, and so we have
-to position the slide on the transparency and add headers and footers.
-"seminar.sty" does not use \LaTeX's page parameters for this either. Instead,
-it uses the following parameters:
-\begin{center}
-  \begin{tabular}{lc}
-  {\em Parameter:} & \em Default:\\
-    \N\slideleftmargin & .5in\\
-    \N\sliderightmargin & .5in\\
-    \N\slidetopmargin & .5in\\
-    \N\slidebottommargin & .5in
-  \end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-There are commands, to be set with "\renewcommand".\footnote{The only true
-length parameters (meaning that thay should be set with "\setlength") in
-"seminar.sty" are \n\slidewidth, \n\slideheight, \n\slideframewidth,
-\n\slideframesep, \n\semin, and \n\semcm.}
-
-\begin{figure}
-\hrule  height 1pt\relax
-\begin{center}
-\setlength\unitlength{.7cm}
-\begin{picture}(13,11.5)(-1,-1.5)
-\thicklines
-\put(0,0){\framebox(11,8.5){\Huge My slide}}
-\put(5.5,4.25){\fancyoval(8.5,6){}}
-
-\thinlines
-\put(0,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}}
-\put(.75,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}}
-\put(.5,8.8){\vector(1,0){.25}}
-\put(.5,8.8){\vector(-1,0){.5}}
-\put(.375,9.1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\n\slideleftmargin}}
-
-\put(10.25,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}}
-\put(11,8.65){\line(0,1){.3}}
-\put(10.75,8.8){\vector(1,0){.25}}
-\put(10.75,8.8){\vector(-1,0){.5}}
-\put(10.625,9.1){\makebox(0,0)[b]{\n\sliderightmargin}}
-
-\put(0,-.15){\line(0,-1){.3}}
-\put(11,-.15){\line(0,-1){.3}}
-\put(5.5,-.3){\vector(1,0){5.5}}
-\put(5.5,-.3){\vector(-1,0){5.5}}
-\put(5.5,-.6){\makebox(0,0)[t]{\n\paperheight}}
-
-\put(-.15,0){\line(-1,0){.3}}
-\put(-.15,.75){\line(-1,0){.3}}
-\put(-.3,.5){\vector(0,1){.25}}
-\put(-.3,.5){\vector(0,-1){.5}}
-\put(-.6,.375){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\n\slidebottommargin}}
-
-\put(-.15,8.5){\line(-1,0){.3}}
-\put(-.15,7.75){\line(-1,0){.3}}
-\put(-.3,8){\vector(0,1){.5}}
-\put(-.3,8){\vector(0,-1){.25}}
-\put(-.6,8.125){\makebox(0,0)[r]{\n\slidetopmargin}}
-
-\put(11.15,0){\line(1,0){.3}}
-\put(11.15,8.5){\line(1,0){.3}}
-\put(11.3,4.25){\vector(0,1){4.25}}
-\put(11.3,4.25){\vector(0,-1){4.25}}
-\put(11.6,4.25){\makebox(0,0)[l]{\n\paperwidth}}
-
-\put(.75,7.75){\makebox(0,0)[bl]{Here is my header}}
-\put(10.25,7.75){\makebox(0,0)[br]{9/30/99}}
-\put(.75,.75){\makebox(0,0)[tl]{Here is my footer}}
-\put(10.25,.75){\makebox(0,0)[tr]{7-9}}
-\end{picture}
-
-\caption{Slide margins.\label{SlideMargins}}
-\end{center}
-\hrule  height 1pt\relax
-\end{figure}
-
-Look at Figure \ref{SlideMargins}. Note that the headers and footers lie {\em
-inside} the top and bottom margins, respectively. The slide is then centered
-horizontally and vertically between the margins.
-
-
-\section{Magnification and lengths}
-
-"seminar.sty" changes \TeX's magnification so that the output is larger than
-when typesetting an article. This means, for example, that if you paste some
-input from a paper you are writing with \LaTeX\ into a slide, it will look
-pretty much the same in the slide, except that it is magnified. For example,
-"\vspace{.5in}" produces a space that gets bigger along with the fonts and
-everything else. Of course, it won't look identical, since "seminar.sty" uses
-its own spacing parameters and margins.
-
-\TeX's standard magnifications are in magsteps. $n$ magsteps means a
-magnification of $1.2^n$. "seminar.sty"'s default magnification is 4 magsteps,
-but you can change this with the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \slidesmag{n}
-\end{MD}
-<n> should be an integer between $-5$ and 9.
-
-As noted above, lengths grow with the magnification. For spacing, like the
-parameter "\parindent" or using "\\[2pt]" to add a little extra space between
-lines, this is great, because it is easier to think in unmagnified dimensions.
-Setting "\parindent" to ".5cm" will look the same (relative to everything
-else) whatever the magnification.
-
-However, if you want to set the unit in a "picture" environment to 1cm, {\em
-as it appears on the slide}, use
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \setslidelength{\unitlength}{1cm}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-"\setslidelength" is like \LaTeX's "\setlength", but it scales the size down
-so that the resulting size after magnification is, in this example, 1cm (in
-the process, it removes any stretch from rubber lengths).%
-\footnote{If you know what {\tt true} dimensions are, you may be wondering why
-they haven't been mentioned. These are not recommended because you will not be
-able to print the slides two-up or use the {\tt article} format.}
-There is also a
-\begin{MD}
-  \addtoslidelength{cmd}{len}
-\end{MD}
-command.
-
-"seminar.sty" also provides the lengths
-\begin{MD}
-  \semin\\
-  \semcm
-\end{MD}
-which are equal to an inch and a centimeter, scaled down to ``before
-magnification'' size. For example,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \rule{1pt}{4\semcm}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-makes a line 4 centimeters long on the transparency,.\footnote{Suppose you
-want to use another unit, such as millimeters, instead of centimeters. Then
-try this:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newcommand{\semmm}{\semcm}
-  \renewcommand{\semcmlength}{1mm}
-  \setslidelength{\semmm}{1mm}
-\end{LVerbatim}}
-
-"\textwidth", "\textheight", "\columnwidth" and "\linewidth" all have the
-expected values in slides. (But "\slidewidth" and "\slideheight" do not.)
-Thus, this would
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \rule{1pt}{.5\textwidth}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-make a line that is 1/2 the width of the slide.
-
-For help getting an EPS file to be the right size, see page \pageref{EPS}.
-
-Finally, there are some parameters that "seminar.sty" scales for you, and
-hence you can (and should) set them at their magnified values (the actual size
-on transparencies):
-\begin{itemize}
-  \item "\slidewidth" and "\slideheight"
-  \item "\slideframewidth" and "\slideframesep" (see Section \ref{S-frames}).
-  \item The slide margin parameters (see Section \ref{S-slidemargins}).
-  \item The \LaTeX\ page parameters, {\em when they are set in the
-preamble}.\footnote{The \LaTeX\ page parameters are listed on page 163 of
-Lamport's {\em \LaTeX\ User's Guide and Reference Manual}. They are used for
-notes (see Section \ref{S-notes}) and the \o{article} option (see Sections
-\ref{S-twoup} and \ref{S-article}), but not for printing slides onto
-transparencies. Lamport warns that resetting page parameters in the middle of
-the document is tricky; here it is more so, because you do have to worry about
-scaling them. But you can use "\setslidelength" for this.}
-\end{itemize}
-
-Note that the warnings about overfull slides (see Section \ref{S-pagebreak})
-report unmagnified dimensions.
-
-
-\section{Font sizes}
-
-The "\slidesmag" command lets you change the magnification of your document.
-You can effectively fine tune the magnification by using the "11pt" and "12pt"
-style options. For example, instead of increasing the magnification from 4 to
-5, you can switch to the "12pt" style option. There are differences---e.g.,
-magnification affects the space you get from "\hspace{1in}"---but the fonts
-will at least be roughly the same size either way. The "11pt" option gives a
-half-step, somewhat like "\slidesmag{4.5}", if the latter were permitted.
-
-Sometimes you want to use smaller font sizes for a single slide, in order to
-fit in that little bit of extra material, or to use larger font sizes, so that
-the few things you have to say on a slide don't look too lonely. You can't
-changing the magnification in the middle of the document, but you can change
-the size of the fonts with the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \ptsize{n}
-\end{MD}
-This switches to the font sizes that are in effect when you use the "<n>pt"
-option. Actually, <n> can be 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14 or 17, whether you have
-"art<n>.sty" or not.
-
-
-\section{Spacing parameters\label{S-spacing}}
-
-\begin{figure}
-\hrule height 1pt
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{llc}
-{\em Command:} & {\em Initializes:} & {\em Default} \\[2pt]
-\N\slideparskip & "\parskip" & "1ex minus .2ex"\\
-\N\slideparindent & "\parindent" & "0pt"\\
-\N\slidefootnotesep & "\footnotesep" & "1.2ex"\\
-\N\slideleftmargini & "\leftmargini" & "1.8em" \\
-\N\slideleftmarginii & "\leftmarginii" & "1.4em" \\
-\N\slideleftmarginiii & "\leftmarginiii" & "1em" \\
-\N\slidelabelsep & "\labelsep" & ".5em" \\
-\N\slideitemsep & "\itemsep" & ".8ex minus .2ex" \\
-\N\slidepartopsep & "\partopsep" & "1ex minus .2ex" \\
-\N\slidestretch & "\baselinestretch" & "1.2"\\
-\N\slidearraystretch & "\arraystretch" & "1.2"
-\end{tabular}
-
-\caption{Slide spacing parameters.\label{SpacingDefaults}}
-\end{center}
-\hrule height 1pt
-\end{figure}
-
-The commands in Figure \ref{SpacingDefaults} are used to initialize some of
-the spacing parameters at the beginning of each slide environment and when
-"\ptsize" is used in a slide environment. These are spacing parameters that
-should depend on the size of fonts and that in \LaTeX's "article" style would
-be set in "art10.sty", etc. These commands should all be changed with
-"\renewcommand", even though, except for the "stretch" parameters, their
-values should be lengths.
-Note that "ex" and "em" units are used because these are the units that depend
-of font sizes.
-
-Outside a slide environment, redefine the commands on the left if you want to
-change these spacing parameters. Within a slide environment, reset the
-parameters directly, or redefine the commands on the left and then use the
-"\ptsize" command.
-
-In other \LaTeX\ styles, the extra distance between lines that is inserted
-when "\baselinestretch" exceeds 1 is eaten up by tall or deep lines. E.g., if
-the line  contains a table or a large math operator, there is probably no
-extra space at all. The advantage of this system is that the distance between
-baselines does not fluctuate with every tilde. The disadvantage is that lines
-can end up too close.
-
-In "seminar.sty", on the other hand, fraction
-\begin{MD}
-  \slideskip
-\end{MD}
-of the extra space cannot be eaten, but up to fraction
-\begin{MD}
-  \slideshrink
-\end{MD}
-of this extra space that cannot be eaten can be removed if there is too much
-material on the slide. This gives you added flexibility about how much
-material to include on a slide. Both \n\slideskip\ and \n\slideshrink\ can be
-set with "\renewcommand" to a number between 0 and 1. The default value of
-\n\slideskip\ is ".75" and the default value of \n\slideshrink\ is ".25". Set
-\n\slideskip\ to "0" to revert to \LaTeX's usual behavior, as described above.
-
-For example, suppose you are using a 10pt font, \n\slidestretch\ is "1.2",
-\n\slideskip\ is ".75", and \n\slideshrink\ is ".25". The "\baselineskip" for
-a 10pt font is normally 12pt, leaving a little space between the lines. Then
-"\baselineskip" is set to
-\begin{center}
-  "\slidestretch" $\times$ "12pt" $=$ 1.2$\times$12pt $=$ 14.4pt
-\end{center}
-The extra space between lines that is inserted is thus 2.4pt, and
-\begin{center}
-  "\slideskip" $\times$ 2.4pt $=$ .75$\times$2.4pt $=$ 1.8pt
-\end{center}
-of this cannot be eaten by tall or deep lines. However, the space between
-lines can be reduced by up to
-\begin{center}
-  "\slideshrink" $\times$ 1.8pt $=$ .25$\times$1.8pt $=$ .45pt
-\end{center}
-if the slide would otherwise be too long.
-
-
-\section{Slide frames\label{S-frames}}
-
-Slides can be framed. The command
-\begin{MD}
-  \slideframe[commands]{style}
-\end{MD}
-specifies the frame style to use. Valid frame styles are "none" and "plain",
-unless you use macros that define additional styles. For example, the
-\o{fancybox} style option defines the frames "shadow", "double", "oval" and
-"Oval" (corresponding to the "\shadowbox", "\doublebox", "\ovalbox" and
-"\Ovalbox" commands defined in that style option). The \o{semcolor}
- option defines the styles "scplain", "scdouble", and "scshadow".
-
-All the frame styles use the lengths
-\begin{MD}
-  \slideframewidth\\
-  \slideframesep
-\end{MD}
-which are the (magnified) width of the line (default 4pt) and the distance
-between the slide and the frame (default .4in), respectively.
-
-\n\slideframe's optional argument is for commands that you want to use to
-customize the slide frame style. For example:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \slideframe[\setlength{shadowsize}{12pt}]{shadow}\\
-  \slideframe[\psset{fillstyle=gradient}]{scplain}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-If you want to build your own custom slide frame, use the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \newslideframe{style}[commands]{frame command}
-\end{MD}
-<style> is the name of the frame, "[<commands>]", which is optional, will be
-inserted before the frame command and before the <commands> given by
-"\slideframe"'s optional argument. These commands can be used to set some
-default parameter values. Then the final argument should frame "#1".
-
-For example, if "\myframe{foo}" frames "foo", and if "\myframe" uses the
-length "\baldness" as a parameter, then you might write
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newslideframe{wildframe}[\setlength{\baldness}{.2cm}]%
-    {\myframe{#1}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-You can still override the default value of "\baldness", as in
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \slideframe[\setlength{\baldness}{.1cm}]{wildframe}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-There is a starred version of \n\slideframe\ that adds the frame to previously
-specified frames.\footnote{If using color or PostScript images, note that each
-frame gets added to the background.} This can be used for special tricks. For
-example, if you are using the \o{fancybox} and \o{semcolor} options, then
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newslideframe{draft}%
-    {\boxput{\rput{30}{\Huge\gray DRAFT}}{#1}}
-  \slideframe{draft}
-  \slideframe*{scdouble}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-puts the word ``DRAFT'' in the background of each slide, gray and rotated 30
-degrees, and then adds a double frame.\footnote{Use "\boxput*" to put "DRAFT"
-in the foreground. See "fancybox.doc" for details.}
-
-
-\part{Advanced Features}
-
-\section{Counters}
-
-The counter for slides is \C{slide}. The default definition of \N\theslide\ is
-"\arabic{slide}". You can use "\label" and "\ref" to cross-reference slides,
-and the page number in slide environments is set to
-\n\theslide.\footnote{However, these page or slide cross-references are not
-always accurate when you let \TeX\ break pages for you within a slide.} Thus,
-you can write, for example,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  See equation (\ref{foo}) on Slide \pageref{foo}.
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-You may want some counters, such as equation counters, to be reset with each
-new slide environment or \n\newslide\ command. By default, only the "footnote"
-counter is reset this way, but you can specify your own (comma-separated) list
-of counters to be reset with the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \slidereset{list}
-\end{MD}
-If you want to reset additional counters, rather than replace the list
-entirely, use
-\begin{MD}
-  \addtoslidereset{list}
-\end{MD}
-
-There is another way in which the footnote counter gets special treatment. The
-command
-\begin{MD}
-  \theslidefootnote
-\end{MD}
-is used for the counter text instead of "\thefootnote". The default definition
-is
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \alph{footnote}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-\section{Selectively including or excluding slides}
-
-The commands
-\begin{MD}
-  \onlyslides{list}\\
-  \notslides{list}
-\end{MD}
-can be used to include or exclude only those slides in the given list. The
-argument should expand to a comma-separated list of numbers or ranges. The
-numbers do not need to be in order, the list can contain numbers that do not
-correspond to any slide, and there can be duplicate numbers. Negative numbers
-should be enclosed in curly braces. Since the argument is first expanded, you
-can use the "\ref" command in the argument. For example,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \onlyslides{{-2},\ref{dp}-10,\ref{chart},0,17-999}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-is legal. If "\label{dp}" appears in slide 5 and "\label{chart}" appears in
-slide 12, this is equivalent to:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \onlyslides{{-2},5-10,12,0,17-999}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-\section{Printing your slides two-up\label{S-twoup}}
-
-Printing your slides two-up is useful both for previewing slides and for
-making hard copies to distribute or for proofreading.
-
-One way to print your slides two-up is to include the \O{article} style
-option. This is described further below.
-
-Another way is to include the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \twoup[n]
-\end{MD}
-in the preamble. This inputs "2up.tex", which contains generic macros for
-two-up printing, and sets the parameters to values that are likely to work.
-Including the optional argument "[<n>]" increases the two-up magnification by
-$n$ magsteps. $n$ can be a positive or negative integer. If you are not able
-to get the right layout, then include the \O{2up} style option, read the
-documentation of "2up.tex", and set the parameters yourself, rather than using
-the \n\twoup\ command.
-
-The \o{article} style option is also called the article {\em format} (as
-opposed to the slides format). In the article format without the \o{portrait}
-option, the slides are centered horizontally and vertically, two to a page (if
-they fit---landscape slides do fit by default). With the portrait option, the
-slides are printed side-by-side, two to a page. In the \o{article} format, you
-can mix landscape and portrait slides with different orientations, but this
-does not work well with the \o{portrait} option.
-
-You can change the article format's magnification with
-\begin{MD}
-  \articlemag{n}
-\end{MD}
-This command works like the "\slidesmag" command (page \pageref{+slidesmag}).
-The default is
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \articlemag{0}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Increase the article magnification if the slides look too lonely; decrease it
-if they are not coming out two-up.
-
-The size of the slides depends on the {\em difference} between the
-magnifications in the slides and article format. E.g., since the default
-slides magnification is 4 magsteps, the slides are scaled down in the article
-format by 4 magsteps. When you change the slides magnification with
-\n\slidesmag, you also have to change the article magnification with
-\n\articlemag\ by the same amount if you want the size of the slides in the
-article format to remain the same. However, when the article magnification in
-magsteps is negative , you will be using non-standard font magnifications
-(which will produce terrible results if you cannot generate the needed
-fonts---see Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for advice).
-
-Whether or not landscape slides (or rotated portrait slides) come out two-up
-in the article format without the \o{portrait} option depends on (i) the
-difference between the slides and article magnification, (ii) the values of
-\n\slidewidth\ and \n\slideheight\, (iii) the size of the slide frame, and
-(iv) the article format's page parameters. With the default values of
-(ii)--(iv), the slides will still come out two-up if you change the difference
-between the slides and article magnification to 3 (e.g., increase the value of
-\n\articlemag\ by 1). Try this if you want the slides to be larger.
-
-If you use the \o{article} option {\em and} the \n\twoup\ command, then your
-slides should be printed four-up!
-
-You will notice labels on the side or bottom of each slide in the \o{article}
-format. The command
-\begin{MD}
-  \slidestyle{style}
-\end{MD}
-determines where these labels go. There are three predefined slide styles:
-\begin{description}
-\item[\tt empty] No captions or labels are used.
-\item[\tt left]  The labels go on the left of each slide (the default when the
-\o{portrait} option is not used).
-\item[\tt bottom] The labels go on the bottom (the default with the
-\o{portrait} option).
-\end{description}
-The label you get is the value of \N\slidelabel. The default definition of
-\n\slidelabel\ is
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \bf Slide \theslide
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-\section{Notes\label{S-notes}}
-
-In addition to slides, you can include a few comments following each slide to
-remind you of what to say, or even the entire text of your presentation for
-your own benefit or to be distributed to others. These comments or text,
-referred to in this documentation as ``notes'', do not go inside any special
-environment. However, a slide cannot go in the middle of a paragraph of notes.
-
-To include notes this way, you have to use one of the following style options,
-which determine what is printed:
-\begin{quote}
-  \begin{tabular}{ll}
-    \O{slidesonly} & Only the slides are printed.\\
-    \O{notes} & Both notes and slides are printed.\\
-    \O{notesonly} & Only the notes are printed.\\
-  \end{tabular}
-\end{quote}
-These style options are referred to as {\em selections} in this documentation.
-
-The pages of notes following slide 5 are numbered 5.1, 5.2, etc.
-
-You can use the "portrait" option to print out your notes, even if you don't
-use this option when printing the slides.
-
-With the "notesonly" selection, the slides are not printed, but they are
-processed. This means that one can still refer in the notes to slides or to
-equations in slides.
-
-The fact that various spacing parameters are initialized at the beginning of
-each slide (see Section \ref{S-spacing}) means that when you reset these
-parameters outside a slide environment, only the notes are affected. This lets
-you use different values for notes and slides. The command \N\slidefonts\ can
-be used for any special font commands that should apply only to slides. Also,
-the command \N\everyslide\ is executed at the beginning of every slide, and
-you can use this for any other customizations you want to include.
-
-You can also use the "11pt" or "12pt" style option for your notes, without
-changing the size of the fonts in the slides, by using the "\ptsize" command
-to set the font sizes for slides. For example, suppose that the "12pt"
-document style option is used, but the preamble contains  the command
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \ptsize{11}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-and the second slide begins with the command
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \ptsize{9}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Then the notes use the "12pt" font size declarations, all the slides but the
-second one use the "11pt" font size declarations, and the second slide uses
-the "9pt" font size declarations.
-
-Notes are typeset using \LaTeX's standard output routines, and \LaTeX's
-standard page parameters.
-
- Finally, it is even possible to use a different page style for notes and
-slides. The page style for notes is set by the "\pagestyle" and
-"\thispagestyle" commands. The command
-\begin{MD}
-  \slidepagestyle{style}
-\end{MD}
-sets a different page style for the slides. If the argument is empty, then the
-page style for slides reverts to the one for notes.\footnote{There is no
-"\thisslidepagestyle" command.}
-
-With the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \onlynotestoo
-\end{MD}
-the "\onlyslides" and "\notslides" commands apply to the notes as well.
-
-
-\section{How notes are omitted\label{omit}}
-
-In the previous section, it was stated that notes are not enclosed in a
-special environment. "seminar.sty" omits notes using special
-macros\footnote{Defined in {\tt xcomment.sty}} that comment out everything
-{\em outside} the slide environments (and a few other environments mentioned
-below). Global declarations that should be processed even when slides are
-omitted go in \e{allversions*} environments, described below.
-
-"seminar.sty" also let you use a more conventional approach to notes. If you
-put the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \noxcomment
-\end{MD}
-in the preamble, then the notes go inside \E{note} environments, and you can
-put all the global declarations outside any environment. "xcomment.sty" is
-used to make \e{note} a comment environment when note should be omitted, and
-otherwise the \e{note} environment does nothing. This mode of operation is
-more robust than omitting everything outside the slide environments, but
-remembering to insert the
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{note} ... \end{note}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-is more tedious.
-
-Here are a few technicalities that have to do with "xcomment.sty" and that
-apply whether or not you use \n\noxcomment.
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item The text that follows the beginning of a slide environment (when not
-using \n\noxcomment) or the end of a \e{note} environment {\em must have
-balanced curly braces}.
-\item "\input" and "\include" commands are followed, even when found in
-omitted notes, but you must use the \LaTeX\ syntax "\input{<file>}" (as
-opposed to \verb*+\input <file> +), and the inputted file must end with
-"\endinput" (this is a good practice anyway).
-\item In omitted text, "%" is still a comment character (hence it is possible
-to comment out a slide or note environment).
-\item A temporary file, "\jobname.tmp", is created (this is of no
-consequence---just in case you wanted to know where it comes from).
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The rest of this section deals with special considerations when omitting
-everything outside the slide environments.
-
-If you might want to make a global change to one of the slide parameters after
-the document preamble, you cannot include it in a slide environment because
-the change will be local, and you cannot include it in the notes because the
-change won't be processed when the notes are omitted.
-
-To get around this problem, an environment \E{allversions*} is provided. It is
-processed even when notes are omitted, and any parameter changes or command
-definitions made within the environment are global. Don't generate any output
-within this environment.
-
-On a rare occasion you might want to include some text that should be typeset
-even when the other notes are omitted (e.g.,  a list of the slides, or a cover
-page). The \E{allversions} environment is provided for this purpose.
-
-If you do any serious hacking, you might want to add to the list of
-environments that should be included with the "slidesonly" selection. Do this
-with the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \addtoslidelist{list}
-\end{MD}
-where <list> is a comma separated list of environments, without spaces.
-
-\section{The article format\label{S-article}}
-
-The \o{article} style option was described in Section \ref{S-twoup} as a way
-to print your slides two-up. This option is also a good way to print your
-notes.
-
-The \o{article} option gets its name because your document is typeset somewhat
-like it would be with \LaTeX's "article" style. (It uses \LaTeX's standard
-page parameters, but some of the default values are different.) It is also
-called the article {\em format}; the slides format is what you get without the
-\o{article} option.
-
-You probably don't want to use the \o{portrait} style option with the
-\o{article} format except when you are only printing portrait slides. But you
-are welcome to experiment.
-
-With the \o{notesonly} selection, you can make the notes as big as you want
-using the \n\articlemag\ command (e.g., for easy reading while giving a
-presentation). Just as in the \o{slides} format, the page parameters are
-scaled at the beginning of the document so that they can be set with their
-true dimensions in the preamble.
-
-The commands
-\begin{MD}
-  \setartlength{cmd}{len}\\
-  \addtoartlength{cmd}{len}
-\end{MD}
-are analogous to "\setslidelength" and "\addtoslidelength", but they scale the
-lengths so that they end up at the specified size after magnification in the
-"article" format. You never would use such a command in slide environments or
-to set slide parameters, but you might use these in the notes if you were
-planning on typesetting your notes with the "article" format rather than the
-"slides" format.
-
-You can change the placement of slides in the \o{article} format using the
-\begin{MD}
-  \slideplacement{name}
-\end{MD}
-command. Here are the valid placement names:
-\begin{description}
-  \item[float] The slides are floated. This is the default with the \o{notes}
-selection and the \o{portrait} option.
-  \item[float*] Like "float", but if the notes are printed in a two-column
-format the slides extend across both columns (e.g., like "table" versus
-"table*"). This is the default with the \o{notes} selection without the
-\o{portrait} option.
-  \item[onepercol] Each slide is centered horizontally and vertically within a
-single column. This is the default when only slides are printed and the
-\o{portrait} option is used.
-  \item[twopercol] Each slide is centered horizontally, two or one per column,
-depending on how many fit. This is the default when only slides are printed
-and the \o{portrait} option is not used.
-  \item[here] Each slide is centered horizontally, separated from adjoining
-text or other slides by the rubber length \N\slidesep.  The default value of
-\n\slidesep\ is "\intextskip". This is useful with the \o{notes} selection
-when you want the slides to precede accompanying comments and when you do not
-mind large spaces at the bottom of pages.
-  \item[here*] This is like "here*", but with "here*" the length \n\slidesep\
-is not lost when it falls at the beginning of a page or after a slide.
-\end{description}
-
-If you want each slide environment to begin a new page (with any of the
-selections), put the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \slideclearpagetrue
-\end{MD}
-in the preamble.
-
-The \o{notesonly} selection has a starred version, \O{notesonly*}, which
-produces a slide marker for each slide environment, like this one:
-\begin{center}
-\leavevmode
-\vbox{%
-\hrule height 1pt
-\kern 8pt
-\hbox to \linewidth{\hss \LARGE\bf Slide 4 \hss}%
-\kern 8pt
-\hrule height 1pt}
-\end{center}
-
-
-Commands that are irrelevant in the "article" format are simply ignored. The
-idea is that it should be possible to switch back and forth between the two
-formats without making any other changes in the document. However, this is not
-entirely possible. Changing "\parindent" or "\textwidth" in the preamble
-affects both formats. You can get around this using the \n\ifarticle\
-conditional. For example,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \ifarticle
-    blah blah
-  \else
-    blee blee
-  \fi
-\end{LVerbatim}
-The "\else" part is optional.
-
-
-\section{Page styles}
-
-The page styles "empty", "plain", "headings" and "myheadings" work like in
-\LaTeX's article style. There is also a page style "align" which puts "+"
-signs in the corners, like in \SliTeX.\footnote{See question \ref{Pagestyle}
-in Section \ref{tips} for suggestions on defining new page styles.} You can
-change the size of the fonts used in headers and footers in the slides format
-by setting the commands
-\begin{MD}
-  \slideheadfont\\
-  \slidefootfont
-\end{MD}
-to the desired size, using "\renewcommand" (but any explicit font declarations
-in a page style override these commands). The default definition of these
-commands is "\scriptsize".
-
-
-\section{Other style options\label{options}}
-
-The style options described so far, "portrait", "article", "slidesonly",
-"notes", and "notesonly", were designed specifically for "seminar.sty". There
-are other such style options described elsewhere in this documentation: 
-"semrot" (page \pageref{o+semrot}), \o{semlayer} (page \pageref{o+semlayer}).
-\o{semcolor} (page \pageref{o+semcolor}), "semhelv" (page
-\pageref{o+semhelv}), "semlcmss" (page \pageref{o+semlcmss}), and "a4" (page
-\pageref{o+a4}).
-
-Here are two more style options that are part of the "seminar.sty" package,
-but that can be used with other document styles:
-\begin{description}
-\item[fancybox] "fancybox.sty" is specific to slides, but it contains commands
-and documentation that are useful for making slides.
-
-\item[slidesec] This sets up some sectioning/heading commands for slides, and
-lets you print a list of slides or a table of contents. See the file
-"slidesec.sty" for details.
-\end{description}
-
-It is impossible to predict, much less describe, the consequences of using all
-the other available \LaTeX{} style option with each selection and format.
-Since this document style is an extension of \LaTeX's "article" style, style
-options and commands that do not work with \SliTeX{} may well work here. Just
-about any style option that works with \LaTeX's "article" style will work with
-the "article" format. When unsure of the effect of an option, just try it and
-see for yourself what happens.
-
-\section{Overlays\label{S-overlays}}
-
-For overlays, you must use both the \O{semlayer} and \o{semcolor} style
-options (see page \pageref{o+semcolor}).
-
-Overlays have two purposes. First, you can use overlays to gradually add
-layers of information on a slide during a presentation. Second, you can use
-overlays to make color layers; each layer is printed in black-on-white on
-paper, and then you use some kind of color copying service to put each layer
-on a transparency in a different color. This is not nearly as nice as having a
-color printer or using a color printing service, but it's the next best thing.
-
-"seminar.sty" lets you make both types of overlays (and the main slide) from a
-single slide environment. The command\footnote{You can also write
-\begin{Ex}
-  "\begin{overlay}{<n>}" $\ldots$ "\end{overlay}"
-\end{Ex}}
-\begin{MD}
-  \overlay{n}
-\end{MD}
-puts whatever is in its scope (\TeX\ group) on overlay $n$, where
-$n=0,\ldots,9$. Actually, overlay 0 refers to the main slide, but you might
-use "\overlay{0}" because overlay commands can be nested. As implemented by
-the "semcolor" style option, these overlay commands can be used just about
-anywhere, including in math mode, tables, and around an included graphics file
-(if it is a conforming EPS file, at least). Also, it is all right to use
-non-consecutive overlay numbers.
-
-For color layers, you have to start by defining some colors using the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \colorlayers{colors}
-\end{MD}
-<colors> should be a comma separated list of color names, without spaces, as
-in
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \colorlayers{red,green,blue}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Then you can use the command "\red" just like the command \n\overlay"{<n>}";
-everything in its scope goes on a red color layer.
-
-The "\colorlayers" command obeys the usual rules on scope. You can use this
-command any time, including in a slide environment. The command is cumulative,
-meaning that previously defined color layers continue to exist. The command
-was purposely defined so that it does not complain when a color name is
-already defined; this makes it easier to switch from some other color system
-to a layer system. However, you should be careful not to inadvertently
-redefine some command that you need. Fortunately, there are no \TeX{}
-primitives whose names are the names of colors.
-
-When you print out the slides, the main slide is printed, followed by each of
-the color layers (if any) for the main slide. Then each of the overlays is
-printed, together with each of its color layers. Only overlays or color layers
-that are actually used (i.e., that are not empty) are printed.
-
-You can turn overlays and color layers on and off with the commands
-\begin{MD}
-  \overlaystrue\\
-  \overlaysfalse\\
-  \layerstrue\\
-  \layersfalse
-\end{MD}
-These commands can be used at any time, and they obey the usual scoping rules.
-The default is for overlays to be active in the "slides" format and suppressed
-in the "article" format.
-
-The counter \C{overlay} keeps track of the overlays. The default definition of
-\N\theoverlay\ is:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \theslide-\alph{overlay}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Overlays can be cross-referenced.
-
-The command \N\currlayer\ is set to the name of the current color layer.
-\N\thelayer\ makes a label for layers; its default definition is:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \theoverlay-\currlayer
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Color layers cannot be cross-referenced.
-
-For example, if slide 7 has overlays 1 and 2 and colors "red" and "green",
-then the main slide is numbered 7, followed by layers 7-red and 7-green,
-followed by overlay 7-a, followed by layers 7-a-red and 7-a-green, followed by
-overlay 7-b, followed by layers 7-b-red and 7-b-green.
-
-The caption used in the slide styles is \n\overlaylabel\ for overlays and
-\N\layerlabel\ for layers. The defaults are, respectively,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \bf Overlay \theoverlay
-  \bf Layer \thelayer
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-By default the overlays and layers use the same page styles in the "slides"
-format as their ``owner.'' You can specify special page styles with the
-commands:
-\begin{MD}
-  \overlaypagestyle{style}\\
-  \layerpagestyle{style}
-\end{MD}
-
-Finally, by default the overlays and layers use the same frame style as their
-``owner.'' You can specify special frame styles with the commands:
-\begin{MD}
-  \overlayframe[commands]{style}\\
-  \layerframe[commands]{style}
-\end{MD}
-
-
-\part{Help\label{Help}}
-
-Road map:
-\begin{itemize}
-  \item If you just want to figure out how to do something, check Section
-\ref{tips}, ``Tips and tricks.''
-  \item If you are trying to decipher an error message, check Section
-\ref{errors}, ``Errors.''
-  \item If you are trying to solve some system-dependent problem that has
-arisen, check Section \ref{trouble}, ``Troubleshooting.''
-  \item To convert \SliTeX\ files, see Section \ref{slitex}, ``Converting
-\SliTeX\ files''.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Tips and tricks\label{tips}}
-
-\faq{How can I fit more material in the slides?}
-
-Or alternatively, make the little material you have fill up the slide.
-
-Let us count the ways:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item Change the magnification with \n\slidesmag"{<n>}" (affects all the
-slides).
-\item Change the height and/or width of one or all the slides.
-\item Use "\ptsize{<n>}".
-\item Change \n\slidestretch.
-\item Use the \n\raggedslides\ command, which changes the propensity to
-hyphenate.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\faq{How do I include an Encapsulated PostScript figure?\label{EPS}}
-
-The only thing tricky about including EPS files is getting the size right. For
-example, suppose the you want to include a postscript file in a slide using
-the "epsf.sty" macros, and you want it to be 6 inches wide. Then this will do
-the trick:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \setslidelength{\epsfxsize}{6in}
-  \epsffile{mypic.eps}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-If you include the command
-\begin{MD}
-  \espfslidesize
-\end{MD}
-(e.g., in the preamble), then "epsf.sty" will take care of scaling the size
-for you, and so you can just set "\epsfxsize" and "\epsfysize" to their
-magnified sizes (using "\setlength" rather than "\setslidelength"). Or you can
-not set these parameters at all, and then the eps file  appears at its natural
-size on the slide.
-
-Either way, this will have the expected effect:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \setlength{\epsfysize}{.8\textheight}
-  \epsffile{mypic.eps}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-"psfig.tex" does not handle magnification properly. By using magnified
-dimensions, without "\setslidelength", as in
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \psfig{file=mypic.eps,width=6in}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-the picture should appear correctly within a slide, but then it will not scale
-properly if you try to use the \o{article} option or the \n\twoup\ command.
-The solution, if using Rokicki's "dvips", is to use "epsf.sty" (written by the
-man himself).
-
-\faq{How can I print just selected overlays, layers or pages of notes in the
-{\tt slides} format?}
-
-The "\onlyslides" and "\notslides" commands affect only slides. If a slide is
-omitted, so are all its overlays and color layers. To be more selective, you
-have to use your dvi driver to select the pages to be printed.
-
-In the "slides" format, the page numbers recognized by dvi drivers correspond
-to the numbers of the slides. This means that a slide and all the overlays,
-layers and notes that correspond to that slide have the same page number. Some
-drivers allow one to select occurrence $n$ of a page number. E.g., with
-"dvips",
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  dvips -p2.1 -l2.4 myslides
-\end{LVerbatim}
-will print the first through fourth page of overlays or notes that follow
-slide 2.
-
-If your dvi driver does not support such selection, and you would prefer that
-the driver recognize physical page numbers, then put the command
-\N\truepagenumbers\ in the preamble.
-
-
-\faq{How do I define custom page styles?}
-\label{Pagestyle}
-
-There is nothing special about defining new page styles in "seminar.sty".
-However, to make it easier to do this in the preamble, the commands
-\begin{MD}
-  \newpagestyle{style}{header}{footer}\\
-  \renewpagestyle{style}{header}{footer}
-\end{MD}
-are provided.\footnote{%
-  You can also use the macros in "fancyheadings.sty", which is available from
-various archives. However, you have to set the pagestyle {\em after}
-"\begin{document}".
-Otherwise, the dimensions get screwed up. If using the \o{slidesonly}
-selection, then you also need to enclose the "\pagestyle" command in
-an \e{allversions*} environment. E.g.,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \begin{allversions*}
-    \pagestyle{fancy}
-  \end{allversions*}
-\end{LVerbatim}}
-
-<style> is the name of the page style, and <header> is the header, and
-<footer> is the footer. These can only be used for simple page styles that are
-the same for odd and even pages, and that do not do anything special with
-section marks.
-
-Headers and footers are set in an "\hbox" the width of the page
-("\textwidth"). You can use stretchable space such as "\hspace*{\fill}" or
-"\hfil" to center some information or put it flush against the margins. See
-the definitions of page styles in "latex.tex" and "article.sty" for examples.
-
-Here is an example: Professor Starr wants lots of information in the headers
-and footers for the slides, and so she defines the page style
-"mypagestyle":\footnote{{\tt\string\thedate} is set with the {\tt\string\date}
-command.}
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newpagestyle{mypagestyle}%
-    {\sl Big U \hfil \thedate \hfil \thepage}%
-    {\hfil File \jobname.tex; printed \today\hfil}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Prof.\ Starr wants to use the standard "headings" page style for notes and the
-"mypagestyle" page style for slides, and she wants overlays to just have the
-overlay number. Therefore, she defines another page style for the overlays:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newpagestyle{myoverlays}{\hfil \thepage}{}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-and she puts
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \pagestyle{headings}
-  \slidepagestyle{mypagestyle}
-  \overlaypagestyle{myoverlays}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-in the preamble.
-
-\faq{How do I change a parameter only for the {\tt slides} format?}
-\label{conditionals}
-
-The conditionals
-\begin{MD}
-  \ifarticle\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\
-  \ifslidesonly\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\
-  \ifnotes\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\
-  \ifnotesonly\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"\\
-  \ifportrait\ $\ldots$ "\else" $\ldots$ "\fi"
-\end{MD}
-allow one to select for what versions material is to be processed. "\ifnotes"
-is true if and only if the "notes" selection is in effect, and so on. The
-"\else" clause is optional. See {\em The \TeX book}, Chapter 20, for more
-information about using conditionals.
-
-For example, the first line below sets the slide rotation to "right" in the
-"article" format only. The second line changes the page style for the "notes"
-and "notesonly" selections and "article" format:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \ifarticle\sliderotation{right}\fi
-  \ifarticle\ifslidesonly\else\pagestyle{myheadings}\fi\fi
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-\faq{Why does extra space get inserted at the top of a slide when I begin the
-slide with a color or overlay command (when using the \o{semcolor} option)?}
-
-Color and overlay commands with the "semcolor" option use "\special"'s. \TeX{}
-adds the space "\parskip" between the "\special"'s and the first material in
-the slide.
-
-Here is the workaround: If that material is an ordinary paragraph, put the
-command "\leavevmode" just after the color or overlay command. In other cases,
-if you are sure this is the problem, put "\vskip-\parskip" just before the
-color or overlay command.
-
-\section{Errors\label{errors}}
-
-There are several errors that identify themselves as being from "seminar.sty",
-but the error messages are so self-explanatory that that there is no need to
-describe them here. Instead, this section explains a few especially cryptic
-\TeX{} error messages that can arise when using "seminar.sty". These errors
-may also arise for reasons that are not particular to the "seminar.sty"
-macros. See your favorite \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} manuals for more help in
-debugging your documents.
-
-\error"! File ended while scanning use of \next."
-
-You are missing an "\end{document}" on the main file or an "\endinput" on a
-file that is input.
-
-
-\error"! File ended within \read."
-
-You may have an unmatched curly brace following "\begin{slide}" on the same
-line. See Section \ref{omit}.
-
-
-\error"! Paragraph ended before \begin@slide was complete."
-
-You have not specified the optional argument for the "slide" or "slide*"
-environment correctly (see Section \ref{slidedim}), or the first character in
-a slide environment is a "[" (put a pair "{}" of braces before the "[").
-
-\section{Troubleshooting\label{trouble}}
-\setcounter{faq}{0}
-
-\faq{A few slides do not come out two-up with the \o{article} option.}
-
-First, read Section \ref{S-twoup} carefully. If the slides still do not come
-out twoup, it might be that there is extraneous output between the slides. Try
-putting the commands
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \slideplacement{here*}
-  \setlength{\slidesep}{8pt plus 1fill}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-in the preamble ("8pt" should be one-half the minimum distance between
-slides). If this solves the problem, look for the extraneous output, or just
-leave those commands in the preamble.
-
-
-\faq{What kind of incompatibilities are there between {\tt seminar.sty} and
-other macros?}
-
-Of course, whenever you load macros that are not part of the standard \LaTeX{}
-distribution and that were not designed to work with "seminar.sty", problems
-may arise because of name conflicts. What are listed here are changes made to
-\LaTeX{} commands that may conflict with other macros that also redefine these
-command. The problems listed here are very unlikely to occur, however, unless
-you have a habit of seriously hacking the standard \LaTeX{} macro files.
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item This style modifies the definitions of the \LaTeX{} primitive
-"\document". It generally will not be upset by, nor will it void,
-modifications to "\document" made before "seminar.sty" is input. However,
-subsequent modifications of "\document" may cause problems.
-
-\item "xcomment.sty", which is input by "seminar.sty" with the "slidesonly"
-selection, modifies the definition of "\end" within included environments.
-This is generally compatible with modifications to "\end" made outside
-environments, but may conflict with modifications to "\end" made inside
-environments.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\faq{Why are the landscape slides displayed sideways and the portrait slides
-displayed upside down on my previewer?}
-
-This document style makes frequent use of landscape mode. Some DVI-to-PS
-converters, such as older versions of Rokicki's "dvips", use their own
-PostScript macros to print a landscape document, rather than simply
-instructing PostScript to use landscape mode.
-If the PostScript output of such a converter is viewed using a PostScript
-previewer that does not allow you to choose the orientation of the display,
-the output will be positioned correctly on the page, but the page will always
-be displayed in portrait mode. When viewing slides without the "portrait"
-option, the landscape slides will be sideways, and the portrait slides will be
-upside-down!
-
-There is nothing this style can do to coerce the page to be displayed in
-landscape mode. There are various ways to minimize neck strain, however:
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item The direction in which the portrait slides are rotated can be reversed,
-so that they end up right-side-up. Just put
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \sliderotation{right}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-before the beginning of the document (assuming that you are using rotation
-macros).
-\item You can also get the portrait slides to be displayed right-side-up by
-using the "portrait" style option (Section \ref{options}).
-\item In the "article" format, the document is typeset in portrait mode
-(unless the "portrait" option is used), and so the landscape slides are
-right-side-up. You can use this format when composing and proof-reading the
-slides.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-\faq{Why is my dvi driver soooo slow?}
-
-Probably it cannot find the right font bitmaps, and so it is either
-automatically generating new ones, or it is scaling the ones it can find.
-Either way, as long as you can somehow generate the missing font bitmaps, this
-problem is transitory. See Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for details.
-
-\faq{Why does \TeX{} complain about missing circle fonts?}
-
-Older versions of the NFSS use the names "circle10" and "circlew10" for the
-\LaTeX circle fonts, instead of the otherwise standard names "lcircle10" and
-"lcirclew10". You can copy your ".pk" and ".tfm" files to the new names, or
-get a new version of the NFSS.
-
-\section{Converting \SliTeX\ files}\label{slitex}
-
-"seminar.sty" can do everything \SliTeX\ can do, and much
-more\footnote{However, color layers and overlays require PSTricks and a
-PostScript printer.} Here is a brief and incomplete description of how to do
-with "seminar.sty" what you can do with \SliTeX, and how to convert \SliTeX\
-files.
-
-\begin{itemize}
-  \item Use "seminar" as your document style, instead of "slides".
-
-  \item Run \LaTeX\ or \AmS-\LaTeX, instead of \SliTeX.
-
-  \item With "seminar.sty", the preamble and slides can all go in the same
-file.
-
-  \item The default in "seminar.sty" is to get landscape slides. If you want
-to convert a \SliTeX\ file containing portrait slides, add the "portrait" 
-style option, and replace your "slide" environments by "slide*" environments.
-
-  \item With "seminar.sty", notes do not need to go in a separate environment.
-To convert a \SliTeX\ file containing "note" environments, define a note
-environment that does nothing:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \newenvironment{note}{}{}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-  \item For color layers:
-  \begin{itemize}
-    \item Use the "\colorlayers" command instead of the "\colors" command.
-    \item Delete the argument to the "slide" and "slide*" environments that
-lists the color layers.
-    \item Include the \o{semlayer} style option.
-  \end{itemize}
-
-  \item "seminar.sty" does not use separate environments for overlays:
-  \begin{itemize}
-    \item Remove the "overlay" environments.
-    \item Replace "\invisible" commands by "\overlay{1}", "\overlay{2}", etc.
-    \item Include the \o{semlayer} style option.
-  \end{itemize}
-
-  \item To actually produce the overlays and color layers, you have to have
-PSTricks and a PostScript printer, and you must include the \o{semcolor} style
-option.
-
-  \item Use \n\onlyslides"{<list>}" and \n\onlynotestoo\ instead of
-"\onlynotes".
-\end{itemize}
-
-
-\begingroup
-\def\addcontentsline#1#2#3{}%
-\def\thepart{Appendices:}
-\part{Configuration}
-\endgroup
-\begingroup
-\def\thepart{}
-\addcontentsline{toc}{part}{Appendices:\hspace{1em}Configuration}
-\endgroup
-\appendix
-
-Before reading this appendix, you should follow the installation instructions
-in the file "sem-read.me" that is distributed with "seminar.sty".
-
-\section{The short story about fonts}\label{short-fonts}
-
-"seminar.sty" is a \LaTeX{} style, and you can use whatever fonts that are
-compatible with \LaTeX\ (or \AmS-\LaTeX). However, you are likely to want to
-use special fonts with "seminar.sty"; see Appendix \ref{fonts} for help.
-Furthermore, you are likely to want to use fonts in sizes that are larger than
-the standard sizes; see Appendix \ref{bitmaps} for help.
-
-But if you don't want to read these appendices, you can just use whatever
-\LaTeX\ fonts you know how to use (e.g., the standard Computer Modern fonts).
-To be sure you need only standard font magnifications:\footnote{This is not a
-consideration if you are using only PostScript or other scalable fonts.}
-\begin{itemize}\label{font-res}
-  \item Don't use the "11pt" or "12pt" style options  (or the \n\ptsize{}
-command).
-  \item Don't change the document magnification (or only use 0--4 magsteps).
-  \item Don't use any font size larger than "\large".
-  \item Don't use the \n\twoup\ command.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\section{Choosing fonts\label{fonts}}
-
-So that you can use different fonts for the notes and the slides (if you
-want), the command "\slidefonts" is invoked at the beginning of every slide
-environment. Define it to set up any special fonts for the slides.
-
-Here are the font configurations that come ready-to-use with "seminar.sty".
-You might also use these as a starting point for your own configurations.
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item You can just use the regular old Computer Modern fonts that you probably
-grew up on. For this, you don't have to do anything at all. Ain't that easy?
-But see the next section about font bitmaps.
-
-\item The \O{semhelv} style option sets up the PostScript Helvetica text fonts
-for the slides. The Computer Modern fonts are still used for math and for the
-notes with the \o{article} format. You need a PostScript printer, a dvi-to-ps
-driver that supports PostScript fonts (e.g., Rokicki's "dvips"), and the New
-Font Selection Scheme. You should also check the font file names used in
-"semhelv.sty", and change them if necessary to match the names on your system.
-
-This combination of fonts is highly recommended because sans serif fonts look
-good for slides, Helvetica is a resident font in just about all PostScript
-printers, and the fonts are scalable and thus there is no problem of needing
-new bitmaps.
-
-\item The \O{semlcmss} style option sets up the \SliTeX\ sans serif fonts for
-the slides, and uses the Computer Modern fonts for notes with the \o{article}
-format. The \SliTeX\ fonts are ugly, but they might be the only usable sans
-serif font you have on your system and you are really dying for that kind of
-font. Also, they usually come ready for printing magnified documents, and so
-you won't need too many new font bitmaps. You must have the New Font Selection
-Scheme. "semlcmss" uses
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \slidesmag{4}
-  \ptsize{10}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-Deviating from this will increase the need for new font bitmaps.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-The New Font Selection Scheme (NFSS) mentioned above is a macro package for
-\LaTeX{} that greatly simplifies using non-standard fonts. The NFSS was
-written by Frank Mittelbach and Rainer Sch\"opf, and is available from various
-archives, including:
-\begin{center}
-"ftp.uni-stuttgart.de"
-\end{center}
-It is far easier to take the 10 minutes or so that are required (in theory, at
-least) to install the NFSS, than it is to try to muck around with \LaTeX's
-font primitives.
-
-
-\section{Font bitmaps\label{bitmaps}}
-
-If you are only using PostScript or other scalable fonts, or if you obey the
-restrictions listed on page \pageref{font-res}, then you can ignores this
-appendix.
-
-To use "seminar.sty", you may need font bitmap sizes that are not currently
-found on your system. This section describes how to avoid this and what to do
-about it. First, a few paragraphs about magnification and font bitmaps.
-
-\TeX's Metafont fonts are designed for a type size, such as 5pt. Most font
-families are available at least in the sizes 5pt, 6pt, 7pt, 8pt, 9pt and 10pt.
-Some are also available in the sizes 12pt and 17pt (and others), but often any
-size above 10pt is obtained by scaling the 10pt fonts. Table \ref{font-mag}
-lists the possible magnifications for fonts, depending on which option you are
-using ("10pt", "11pt" or "12pt"), and depending on the \LaTeX{} type size
-declaration that is in effect (e.g., "\small"). The magnifications are given
-in magsteps, which is \TeX's standard unit for font magnifications. $n$
-magsteps means a magnification of $1.2^n$.
-
-\begin{table}
-\hrule  height 1pt\relax
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{l|c|c|c|}
-\multicolumn{1}{l}{size} &
-\multicolumn{1}{c}{default (10pt)} &
-  \multicolumn{1}{c}{11pt option}  &
-  \multicolumn{1}{c}{12pt option}\\
-\cline{2-4} "\tiny"       & 0  & 0 & 0\\
-\cline{2-4} "\scriptsize" & 0  & 0 & 0\\
-\cline{2-4} "\footnotesize" & 0 & 0 & 0 \\
-\cline{2-4} "\small"        & 0 & 0 & 1/2 \\
-\cline{2-4} "\normalsize" & 0 & 1/2 & 1 \\
-\cline{2-4} "\large"      & 1 & 1 & 2 \\
-\cline{2-4} "\Large"      & 2 & 2 & 3 \\
-\cline{2-4} "\LARGE"      & 3 & 3 & 4\\
-\cline{2-4} "\huge"       & 4 & 4 & 5\\
-\cline{2-4} "\Huge"       & 5 & 5 & 5\\
-\cline{2-4}
-\end{tabular}
-
-\caption{Font magnification in magsteps ($n$ means a magnification of $1.2^n$)
-for a font that is available in 5pt, 6pt, 7pt, 8pt, 9pt and 10pt
-sizes.\label{font-mag}}
-\end{center}
-\hrule  height 1pt\relax
-\end{table}
-
-Both the "article" and the "slides" formats may also magnify the document. By
-default, the magnification of the "slides" format is 4 magsteps, and the
-magnification of the "article" format is 0. To find the total font
-magnification, add the magnification listed in the table to the magnification
-of the document. E.g., in the "slides" format with the "12pt" option (or the
-command "\ptsize{12}" at the beginning of a slide), the "\large" command may
-invoke fonts that  have a magnification of up to 7 magsteps.
-
-Most systems have font bitmaps for 0, 1/2, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 magsteps. If you
-obey the restrictions listed on page \pageref{font-res}, then you will only
-need fonts in these standard magnifications. However, if you want to use other
-font magnifications, then check with your system administrator to determine
-which of the following applies to you (or just plunge ahead and see what
-happens):
-\begin{enumerate}
-\item If you have Metafont and "dvips" or some other driver that automatically
-generates font bitmaps as needed, and if this feature is enabled, then you
-will simply notice that it takes a long time to print documents at first,
-because the driver has to wait for the new font bitmaps to be made.
-Eventually, you will have generated all the extra bitmaps you need, and this
-delay will go away.
-\item If you have Metafont, but your dvi driver does not automatically
-generate needed bitmaps, then you just need to keep track of what font bitmaps
-you are missing as you use "seminar.sty" and occasionally run Metafont to make
-them. You will also notice a delay when a font bitmap is missing, because your
-driver will probably scale the closest bitmap it finds, and this can take time
-on some systems.
-\item If you do not even have Metafont, then you have to try to get by without
-the extra bitmaps. Scaled fonts look lousy, but an occasional scaled font in a
-heading is not so bad.
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Of course, PostScript and other scalable fonts do not present any problem, and
-so it is a good idea to use these as much as possible. The Computer Modern
-fonts are available from Blue Sky Research in PostScript Type I format. If you
-do not have PostScript versions of the CM fonts, and you instead use other
-PostScript fonts for text, then you are likely to still need bitmapped fonts
-for mathematics. However, since mathematics is usually set at "\normalsize" or
-smaller, this is not a big problem.
-
-If you are installing "seminar.sty" on a multi-user system, then hopefully you
-will make the needed fonts available.
-
-\section{Color}
-
-You can use whatever color commands you ordinarily use with \LaTeX. You might
-try the \o{semcolor} style option, which lets you use the PSTricks color
-commands for printing on a color PostScript printer. The \o{semcolor} option
-combined with the \o{semlayer} option (see Section \ref{S-overlays}) lets you
-print color layers.
-
-\section{Landscape printing and slide rotation\label{S-landscape}}
-
-If your dvi driver supports a "\special" for landscape printing, then you can
-define \N\printlandscape\ in the preamble of your document to invoke this
-command. E.g., for "dvips" put the line
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \renewcommand{\printlandscape}{\special{landscape}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-in the preamble. Otherwise, "seminar.sty" will display a message reminding you
-to print your document in landscape mode, when appropriate.
-
-You can print both landscape and portrait slides in one shot if you can rotate
-the portrait slides when printing in landscape mode or the landscape slides
-when printing in portrait mode. If you are using a PostScript printer, you
-probably are using a dvi driver that supports rotation; otherwise, you
-probably are not. Here are suggestions for setting up rotation:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item The \o{semcolor} option provides an interface to the rotation macros in
-PSTricks (see Appendix \ref{S-semcolor}); it works with many popular dvi-to-ps
-drivers.
-
-\item If you are using Rokicki's "dvips" and want rotation but do not want to
-load the entire PSTricks package, then use the \O{semrot} option instead of
-the \o{semcolor} option.
-
-\item If the \o{semcolor} and \o{semrot} options do not work for you, but you
-have your own rotation macros, then you have to define the commands
-\begin{MD}
-  \leftsliderotation\\
-  \rightsliderotation
-\end{MD}
-so that they rotate something left and right, respectively. For example,
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \renewcommand{\leftsliderotation}[1]{\rotateleft{#1}}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-\end{itemize}
-
-In any case, you can determine the direction of rotation using
-\begin{MD}
-  \sliderotation{direction}
-\end{MD}
-where valid directions are "none", "left" and "right". The default is "left".
-
-By default, the headers and footers aren't rotated, but you can switch between
-rotating and not rotating the headers with the commands:
-\begin{MD}
-  \rotateheaderstrue\\
-  \rotateheadersfalse
-\end{MD}
-
-\section{The semcolor style option\label{S-semcolor}}
-
-The \O{semcolor} option sets up an interface between "seminar.sty" and the
-PSTricks package. PSTricks is a collection of PostScript macros for \TeX. It
-works with Rokicki's "dvips", and several other dvi-to-ps drivers. You can
-probably get the PSTricks package from wherever you obtained "seminar.sty", or
-check the archives listed in the PSTricks read-me file, "read-me.pst", which
-is distributed with "seminar.sty".
-
-What the \o{semcolor} style option gives you, compared to just using the
-PSTricks package, is:
-\begin{description}
-\item[Color] A small patch to make the PSTricks color commands more robust in
-slides.
-\item[Rotation] The rotations "left" and "right" are defined. "left" is the
-default.
-\item[Framing] The frame styles "scplain" (using "\psframebox"), "scdouble"
-(using "\psdblframebox") and "scshadow" (using "\psshadowbox").
-\item[Overlays] Overlays and layers, when used in conjunction with the
-\o{semlayer} option.
-\end{description}
-
-\section{A4 and other paper sizes\label{S-papersizes}}
-
-Use the \O{a4} option when using A4 paper. Note that this option does not
-correspond to an independent file.
-
-If you want to configure seminar.sty for A4 paper by default (without having
-to include style options), then you can do one of the following:
-\begin{enumerate}
-
-  \item Add the following line to "seminar.con" (see Appendix
-\ref{S-configfile}):
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \input{sem-a4.sty}
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-  \item Add the following lines to "seminar.con" (these lines are just the
-contents of "sem-a4.sty"):
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \def\paperwidth{210mm}
-  \def\paperheight{297mm}
-  \input sem-page.sty
-  \slidewidth 222mm
-  \slideheight 152mm
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-  \item Create a file such as "mysem.sty", to be used as a document {\em
-style} (rather than style {\em option}), with the following lines:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \def\paperwidth{210mm}
-  \def\paperheight{297mm}
-  \input seminar.sty
-  \slidewidth 222mm
-  \slideheight 152mm
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-For other paper sizes, you can create a style option by modifying
-"sem-a4.sty". Then any of the options described above is available to you,
-(with the appropriate parameter values). However, this will give satisfactory
-results only for paper sizes that are close to A4 or 8.5in by 11in.
-
-Note that for any paper size, even 8.5in by 11in, the page parameters that are
-set this way are just suggested defaults, and most people will want to
-customize them. Because of the variety of ways in which "seminar.sty"
-documents can be printed, this is a little more complex than with most
-document styles. Examine "sem-page.sty" to see what page parameters need to be
-set, and when.
-
-\section{Configuration file\label{S-configfile}}
-
-You can put customizations to "seminar.sty" in a file named "seminar.con".
-This file is optional. It is loaded by "seminar.sty" if it exists, {\em
-before} loading the style option files.  E.g., "seminar.con" might contain the
-following lines:
-\begin{LVerbatim}
-  \input semhelv.sty
-  \input semcolor.sty
-  \renewcommand{\printlandscape}{\special{landscape}}
-  \endinput
-\end{LVerbatim}
-
-\clearpage
-\PrintUserIndex
-
-\end{document}
-%% END sem-user.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 365e26d5b85..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,98 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN semsamp1.tex
-%
-% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later).
-%
-% Try this with and without the article option:
-
-\documentstyle[fancybox,article]{seminar}
-
-\def\printlandscape{\special{landscape}}    % Works with dvips.
-
-\articlemag{1}
-
-%\twoup   % Try me.
-
-\newpagestyle{327}%
-  {Economics 327 \hspace{\fill}\rightmark \hspace{\fill}\thepage}{}%
-\pagestyle{327}
-
-\markright{Choice under uncertainty}
-
-\slideframe{Oval}
-
-\newcommand{\heading}[1]{%
-  \begin{center}
-    \large\bf
-    \shadowbox{#1}%
-  \end{center}
-  \vspace{1ex minus 1ex}}
-
-\newcommand{\BF}[1]{{\bf #1:}\hspace{1em}\ignorespaces}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-
-\begin{slide}
-\heading{A heading}
-
-One thing this example illustrates is how the {\tt article} style option is
-good for printing slides two-up, for distribution to a seminar audience or
-class, or just for proofreading.
-
-\BF{Definition}
-$p$ (weakly) first-order stochastically dominates $q$ if for every $\bar z\in
-Z$,
-\[
-  p(z\leq \bar z) \leq q(z\leq \bar z)
-\]
-\end{slide}
-
-
-\begin{slide}
-\heading{Problems with stochastic dominance as a DT}
-
-\begin{center}
-  \begin{tabular}{|r|l|}\hline
-    $z$ & $p(z)$\\ \hline
-    \$999 & .01\\ \hline
-    \$1,000,000 & .99 \\ \hline
-  \end{tabular}%
-  \hspace{1cm}%
-  \begin{tabular}{|r|l|}\hline
-    $z$ & $q(z)$\\ \hline
-    \$1,000 & 1\\ \hline
-  \end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{slide}
-
-\begin{slide}
-\heading{Candidate Theory \#3: Expected utility}
-
-Let $Z$ be an arbitrary set of outcomes. Let $u:Z\rightarrow R$ be a utility
-representation of the DM's preferences over the elements of $Z$ as certain
-outcomes. (I.e., $u(y)\geq u(z)$ iff $y \geq z$.)
-
-\end{slide}
-
-
-\begin{slide}
-\heading{Expected utility \& the St.\ Petersburg Paradox}
-
-This can get around even St.\ Petersburg Paradox, because we don't require
-that utility be linear in money:
-
-\begin{center}
-  \begin{tabular}{r|c|c|c|c|c}\cline{2-6}
-    Prize & \$2 & \$4 & \$8 & \$16 & $\ldots$\\ \cline{2-6}
-    $u(z)=\log_2(z)$ & 1 & 2 & 3 & 4 & $\ldots$ \\ \cline{2-6}
-    Prob. & 1/2 &  1/4 & 1/8 & 1/16 & $\ldots$\\ \cline{2-6}
-  \end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-
-Expected utility is $\sum_{k=1}^\infty k/2^k = 2$, and so lottery gives same
-expected utility as getting \$4 for sure.
-\end{slide}
-
-
-\end{document}
-%% END semsamp1.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 2d54fa570db..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,285 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN semsamp2.tex
-% This is a sample document for seminar.sty, v0.93 (and maybe later).
-%
-% This file contains both landscape and portrait mode slides.
-% Choose one of the following to print them out:
-%  - If using PSTricks, try the semcolor style option.
-%  - If using Rokicki's dvips, try the semrot style option.
-%  - To print the landscape slides, put \landscapeonly in the preamble.
-%    To print the portrait slides, include the portrait style option and
-%    put \portraitonly in the preamble.
-%
-%
-\documentstyle[%
-  slidesonly,%  Try notes or notesonly instead.
-  %notes,%      Use instead of slidesonly to typeset the notes.
-  %notesonly,%  Use instead of slidesonly to typeset notes and slides.
-  %semcolor,%   Try me if using PSTricks.
-  %semrot,%     Try me if using Rokicki's dvips.
-  %semhelv,%    Try me if using a PostScript printer.
-  %article,%    Try me.
-  %portrait,%   Try me.
-  %sem-a4,%     Try me if using A4 paper.
-  semlayer%     This must be included, but you need the semcolor option to
-  ]{seminar}                                  % actually see the overlays.
-
-\slidesmag{5}
-\articlemag{1}
-
-%\twoup                     % Try me for twoup printing.
-
-%\portraitonly              % To print only portrait slides
-%\landscapeonly             % To print only landscape slides
-
-%\notslides{\ref{questions}-7,1}   %Try me: The slides are omitted.
-%\onlyslides{\ref{questions}-7,1}  %Try me: Only these slides are included.
-%\onlynotestoo                     %Try me: For selecting notes as well.
-
-\colorlayers{red,blue}      % Try deleting this if using the semcolor option,
-                            % to get \blue and \red to use PostScript color.
-
-%\overlaysfalse             % Suppress overlays with semcolor option.
-%\layersfalse               % Suppress color layers with semcolor option.
-
-\rotateheaderstrue          % Try this out if using rotation macros.
-
-
-\title{Example for seminar.sty}
-\author{Policarpa Salabarrieta}
-\date{July 21, 1991}
-
-\newcommand{\sref}[1]{SLIDE \ref{#1}}
-\newcommand{\heading}[1]{\begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}}
-
-\newpagestyle{MH}%
-  {University of Guaduas, March 13, 1998\hfil\thepage}{}
-\pagestyle{MH}
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\maketitle          % This won't show up when \onlynotestoo is in effect.
-
-\begin{slide}
-  \ifslidesonly              % Title slide only for slidesonly selection.
-    \maketitle
-    \addtocounter{slide}{-1}
-    \slidepagestyle{empty}
-  \fi
-\end{slide}
-
-This is a lot of gobbledy-gook intended only to illustrate some of the
-features of seminar.sty.
-
- The phrase information overload rings a bell with just about anyone.
-Certainly you all receive more working papers or more applications for
-graduate school than you can readily read. Nevertheless, the term information
-overload is ill-defined. (\sref{too_much}, top)
-
- A message like this when you check your email conjures up the notion of
-information overload. More generally, information overload always means too
-much information, in some sense or another. But what does ``too much'' mean?
-(\sref{too_much}, bottom) It might just mean that people cannot process all
-the information they receive. That is certainly true for everyone. A claim
-that is much stronger, and that is implicit when people complain about
-informaton overload, is that people {\em should} receive less information, by
-some criterion.
-
-\begin{slide}\label{too_much}%
-\begin{center}
-  \large\bf
- Information overload = ``Too much'' information
-\end{center}
-\smallskip
-
-\begin{verse} \bf\tt
-  You have 134 unread messages:\\
-  Do you want to read them now?
-\end{verse}
-
-\begin{enumerate}
-  {\overlay2
-  \item People {\overlay1 cannot process all} the information they receive.}
-  \item People {\em should} receive less information.
- \end{enumerate}
-\end{slide}
-
-  In this paper, I use the term ``information overload'' in both senses.
-(\sref{overload}, bottom). Specifically, I say that an {\em individual} is
-overloaded with information if she receives more information than she can
-process. But I say that there is information overload in a {\em network} if
-there is some mechanism that  makes the senders and/or receivers better off by
-restricting the flow of  information. This latter notion of information
-overload is an equilibrium property, and it depends on what we mean by
-``better off.''
-
-\begin{slide*}\label{overload}
-\ptsize{12}
-
-\begin{itemize}{\overlay1
-  \item There is information {\overlay0 overload in a network if} there is
-some mechanism that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders
-and/or receivers better off by restricting the flow} of information.'
-
-  \item There is information overload in a network if there is some mechanism
-that, compared to the {\em status quo}, makes the senders and/or receivers
-better off by restricting the flow of information.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\end{slide*}
-
-(\sref{questions})
-  The purpose of my paper is to show why there can be information overload in
-a network and what kind of mechanisms can make the receivers and/or senders
-better off. Since the cost of communication is one factor that restricts
-communication, I am thus also going to look at how the welfare of the senders
-and receivers depends on the cost of communication.
-
-  Most messages don't become jumbled and we can choose which ones to process. 
-But some of us may have a bias towards choosing to process more information
-than we should, like the graduate student who feels compelled to read every
-article on the usual lengthy reading list, and just ends up getting confused
-and ruffling through the papers.
-
-
-\begin{slide}[7.3in,5.5in] \label{questions}
-\heading{Questions}
-
-\begin{itemize}
-  {\overlay1\item When could {\blue there be overload} in networks?}
-  \item What mechanims make the receivers and senders better off?
-  \item How does the welfare {\red of the senders} and receivers depend on the
-cost of communication?
-\end{itemize}
-\end{slide}
-
-
-However, experiments in consumer research and psychology have failed to find
-that such a bias is prevalent. This is in spite of the fact that it is common
-for stress and cognitive strain to increase with information load. We may
-incur such stress and strain because the information we choose to process is
-valuable to us.
-
-More commonly, then, we can and do choose to process roughly as much
-information as we can handle efficiently. This is called screening. But when
-we choose which messages to begin to process, we're ignorant of their
-contents, since otherwise there would be no reason to process them in the
-first place. Therefore, if we receive more junk mail, then some of the
-important mail gets crowded out, and we are effectively less informed.
-
-\begin{slide} \label{informed}
-\begin{center}
-  {\bf Being more informed} \par
-    \smallskip
-  is always better,\par
-    \medskip
-  \overlay1{but it's not the same as \par
-    \smallskip
-  {\bf receiving more information}}
-\end{center}
-\end{slide}
-
-  Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I
-present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to
-ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most
-want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with
-information. Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that
-sender will prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the
-sender has an interest in which messages the receiver processes.
-But when there are more senders, one sender's  messages tend to crowd out the
-messages of the other senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't
-take this external cost into account when sending messages, they may
-collectively overload the receiver. (\sref{akbar})
-
-There are several reasons that our scarcity of attention, that is, our limited
-capacity to process information, can mean that we become less informed when we
-receive  more information. I have a cartoon here to illustrate these reasons.
-(\sref{akbar})
-
-\begin{slide}\label{akbar}\def\slidefuzz{15pt}
-  {\large A tax $\tau$ on communication is said to support
-$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is an equilibrium for
-$\Gamma(c+\tau)$.}
-\medskip
-
- {\bf Proposition 6.} {\em Assume $\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ is not an equilibrium
-for $\Gamma(c)$.\vspace{-3pt}
-\begin{enumerate}
- \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=[0,1]^n$, there is no tax that supports
-$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$.
- \item If $\mbox{supp}(\gamma)=S^{n-1}$, there is a tax that supports
-$\tilde{\cal{X}}(c)$ if and only if $m=1$, $p_j>c\, \forall j$, and
-   \begin{enumerate}
-     \item $n=2$; or
-     \item $n=3$ and $p_i^{-1}+p_j^{-1}\geq p_k^{-1}$ for all distinct
-$i,j,k$; or
-     \item $n=4$ and $p_1=p_2=p_3=p_4$.
-\end{enumerate}
-\end{enumerate}}
-\end{slide}
-
-  If, by restricting communication, we eliminate the less relevant messages,
-then we can become more informed. But how can we achieve this? Restricting the
-flow of information shifts the task of screening messages from the receivers
-to the senders. Unlike the receivers, the senders do know the contents of the
-messages they originate. If the senders' interests coincide with those of the
-receiver and if the senders have sufficient knowledge about the receivers,
-then the senders will choose the messages which are most relevant to the
-receivers. This may make the receivers, and even the senders, better off.
-
-  The network in Slide \ref{architectures} attains the minimal delay $c(8,24)
-= 6$ using 8 processors. It is an example of the efficient one-shot networks
-described by Foo. We will focus on a class of networks that are similar to the
-Foo networks but that may differ slightly. For $q$, $c$ and $n$ such that $1
-\leq q \leq \lfloor n/2 \rfloor$ and $c(q,n) \leq c \leq n$, let $R_{nqc}$ be
-the class of essential networks for adding $n$ items using  $q$ processors in
-$c$ cycles that have the following  properties:
-
-\begin{slide*}\label{architectures}
-\heading{Architecture}
-
-\begin{center}
-\setlength{\unitlength}{1.65in}
-\begin{picture}(1.1,1.6)(3.5,5.0)
-\put(4.0,6.5){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.1,6.5){1}
-\put(4.0,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.1,6.0){2}
-\put(4.0,6.1){\vector(0,1){.3}}
-\put(3.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(3.6,6.0){3}
-\put(3.6,6.1){\vector(1,1){.3}}
-\put(4.0,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.1,5.5){4}
-\put(4.0,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}}
-\put(4.5,6.0){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.6,6.0){5}
-\put(4.4,6.1){\vector(-1,1){.3}}
-\put(4.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.6,5.5){6}
-\put(4.4,5.6){\vector(-1,1){.3}}
-\put(3.5,5.5){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(3.6,5.5){7}
-\put(3.5,5.6){\vector(0,1){.3}}
-\put(4.0,5.0){\circle*{.04}}
-\put(4.1,5.0){8}
-\put(4.0,5.1){\vector(0,1){.3}}
-\end{picture}
-\end{center}
-\end{slide*}
-
-Why would the senders communicate too many messages in the first place? If I
-present too much material in this seminar, you have to choose which parts to
-ignore and I would rather make that decision myself, since I know what I most
-want to get across. Thus, it is in my interest not to overload you with
-information.
-
-Generally, whenever there is a single sender of messages, that sender will
-prefer to screen rather than have the receiver screen, because the sender has
-an interest in which messages the receiver processes. But when there are more
-senders, one sender's  messages tend to crowd out the messages of the other
-senders, as in this example here. If the senders don't take this external cost
-into account when sending messages, they may collectively overload the
-receiver. (\sref{architectures})
-
-\end{document}
-%% END semsamp2.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index eff544ef555..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,280 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN tvz-code.sty
-%% 93/04/01
-%% Tim Van Zandt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% Lousy hacks for typesetting the documented code for the
-%% seminar.sty and PSTricks packages.
-
-\input tvz-hax.sty
-\input doc.sty         % Tested with v1.7k
-\input art11.sty
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAGE PARAMETERS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% Paragraphs are marked by space rather than indentation:
-\parindent 0pt
-\parskip 4pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
-
-% Textwidth just wide enough for 78 characters of code.
-\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{\small\tt f}
-\textwidth 78\wd\@tempboxa
-\oddsidemargin\paperwidth\relax
-\advance\oddsidemargin -\textwidth
-\divide\oddsidemargin 2
-\advance\oddsidemargin -1in
-\setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox{\tiny 999\ }
-\advance\oddsidemargin\wd\@tempboxa
-\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
-
-\if@twoside
-  \advance\oddsidemargin .3in
-  \advance\evensidemargin -.3in
-\fi
-
-% No headers, 1in top margin
-\topmargin 0pt
-\headheight 0pt
-\headsep 0pt
-
-% Total bottom margin 1in, text height 9in
-\textheight 9in
-\footskip .625in
-
-% Now adjust for different paper size:
-\@tempdima=\paperheight
-\advance\@tempdima-11in
-\divide\@tempdima 2
-\advance\topmargin \@tempdima
-
-% Marginal notes always on left.
-\marginparwidth 3.5cm
-\marginparsep .5cm
-\reversemarginpar
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% MACROCODE PATCH FOR SHORT META %%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\expandafter\def\expandafter\macrocode\expandafter{%
-  \expandafter\DeleteShortMeta
-  \macrocode}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DOC PREAMBLE %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\newbox\junkbox
-\def\DocInput#1{%
-  \MakePercentIgnore
-  \setbox\junkbox=\hbox\bgroup
-    \input{#1}%
-  \MakePercentComment}
-\let\EndDocPreamble\egroup
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% VERBATIM %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% Use fancybox.sty's LVerbatim environment. Each line should contain
-% percent plus three spaces (or other char), including blank lines. E.g.,
-% \begin{LVerbatim}
-%   foo
-%   bar
-% \end{LVerbatim}
-
-\def\EveryVerbatimLine#1#2#3#4{}
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\%=12
-  \catcode`\ =\active
-  \global\EndVerbatimTokens{% }
-\endgroup
-\AltGetVerbatim
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INDEXING %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% Things are faster without \MakeIndex
-
-\def\MakeIndex{\makeindex\EnableCrossrefs}
-\DisableCrossrefs
-
-% Use \codelabel[int]{foo} to label last line of code plus int.
-% E.g., to label first and then last line of some code:
-%  \codelabel[1]{foo}
-%    \begin{macrocode}
-%  foo
-%  bar
-%    \end{macrocode}
-%  \codelabel{foo}
-
-\def\codelabel{\@ifnextchar[{\@codelabel}{\@codelabel[0]}}
-\def\@codelabel[#1]#2{%
-  \@bsphack
-  \begingroup
-    \advance\c@CodelineNo #1
-    \def\@currentlabel{\the\c@CodelineNo}%
-    \label{#2}%
-  \endgroup
-  \@esphack}
-
-% Definitions in code are indexed by page number, but other occurences
-% are indexed by the line of code.
-
-\CodelineIndex
-\def\SpecialMainPageIndex#1{%
-  {\let\special@index\index\SpecialMainIndex{#1}}}
-\renewcommand{\theCodelineNo}{{\rm\tiny\arabic{CodelineNo}}}
-
-% Index numbers for main definitions are set in bold rather than underlined.
-
-\def\main#1{{\bf #1}}
-
-% two column index
-
-\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
-
-% Customize index prologue:
-
-\def\index@prologue{%
-  \section*{Index}\markboth{Index}{Index}%
-  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}%
-  The {\bf bold} numbers denote the pages where the entries are defined,
-  and all other numbers indicate the {\em lines of code} where
-  the entries are used.}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%  MACRO %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% A change to the macro environment; prints macro names within the margins
-% of the text, instead of as marginal notes. Use one \macro command,
-% with comma separated macro names.
-
-\newif\iffirst@macroname
-\newif\ifnestedmacro
-
-\def\macro{%
-  \ifnum\macro@level=\z@
-    \def\next{\MakePrivateLetters \m@cro@}%
-  \else
-    \def\next{\@latexerr{Nested \string\begin{macro}}\@eha
-    \endgroup\end{macro}\macro@level=\z@\begin{macro}}
-  \fi
-  \next}
-\def\m@cro@#1{%
-  \first@macronametrue
-  \m@@cro@@#1,\@nil,}
-\def\m@@cro@@#1,{%
-  \def\@tempa{#1}\def\@tempb{\@nil}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-    \let\next\finishm@@cro@@
-  \else
-    {\advance\c@CodelineNo\@ne\SpecialMainPageIndex{#1}\nobreak}%
-    \DoNotIndex{#1}%
-    \iffirst@macroname
-      \edef\saved@macronames{\string#1}%
-      \first@macronamefalse
-    \else
-      \def\comma{\noexpand\comma}%
-      \edef\saved@macronames{\saved@macronames\comma\string#1}%
-    \fi
-    \let\next\m@@cro@@
-  \fi
-  \next}
-\def\finishm@@cro@@{%
-  \advance\macro@level\@ne
-  \def\comma{{\rm, }}%
-  \ListMacroNames{\saved@macronames}}
-
-\let\endmacro\relax
-
-\def\ListMacroNames{%
-  \@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.25ex plus -.5ex minus-.2ex}%
-    {1.3ex plus.2ex}{\csname reset@font\endcsname\large\tt}*}
-
-\MacroIndent 0pt
-
-\def\MacroFont{\small\tt}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% DoNot Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\DoNotIndex{\ ,\!,\[,\\,\],\^,\`,\{,\},\~}
-\DoNotIndex{\@warning,\active}
-\DoNotIndex{\begingroup,\catcode,\char,\csname,\def,\do}
-\DoNotIndex{\docdate,\dospecials,\edef,\else,\endcsname,\endgroup}
-\DoNotIndex{\expandafter,\fi,\filedate,\fileversion}
-\DoNotIndex{\gdef,\if,\ifcat}
-\DoNotIndex{\ifx,\immediate,\lccode,\let}
-\DoNotIndex{\lowercase,\next,\noexpand}
-\DoNotIndex{\relax,\space,\the}
-\DoNotIndex{\toks@,\typeout,\write}
-\DoNotIndex{\@M,\@arabic,\@author,\@auxout,\@bsphack,\@car,\@date}
-\DoNotIndex{\@dblarg,\@dblfloat,\@eha,\@empty,\@esphack,\@evenfoot}
-\DoNotIndex{\@evenhead,\@float,\@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@gtempa,\@ifnextchar}
-\DoNotIndex{\@ifundefined,\@ixpt,\@latexerr,\@listI,\@listi,\@listii}
-\DoNotIndex{\@listiii,\@listiv,\@listv,\@listvi,\@makefnmark,\@mkboth}
-\DoNotIndex{\@namedef,\@nameuse,\@mne,\@nil,\@normalsize,\@oddfoot}
-\DoNotIndex{\@oddhead,\@tempa,\@tempb,\@tempc,\@tempd}
-\DoNotIndex{\@tempdima,\@testfalse,\@testtrue,\test@member}
-\DoNotIndex{\@thanks,\@thefnmark,\@title}
-\DoNotIndex{\@topnum,\@viiipt,\@viipt,\@vipt,\@vpt,\@xiipt}
-\DoNotIndex{\@xipt,\@xpt,\@xivpt,\@xviipt,\@xxpt,\@xxvpt}
-\DoNotIndex{\addcontentsline}
-\DoNotIndex{\advance,\aftergroup,\baselinestretch,\begin}
-\DoNotIndex{\belowdisplayshortskip,\belowdisplayskip,\bf,\bgroup}
-\DoNotIndex{\box,\c@@page,\c@page,\c@secnumdepth,\clearpage,\columnsep}
-\DoNotIndex{\columnwidth,\copy,\dimen@,\dimen@i,\dimen@ii,\divide}
-\DoNotIndex{\dp,\ds@article,\ds@notes,\ds@notesonly}
-\DoNotIndex{\ds@slidesonly,\egrou,\end,\end@dblfoloat,\end@float}
-\DoNotIndex{\endinput,\fnsymbol,\footheight,\footnotesep,\footskip}
-\DoNotIndex{\global,\globaldefs,\hbox,\headheight,\headsep,\hfil}
-\DoNotIndex{\hrule,\hskip,\hss,\ht,\Huge,\huge}
-\DoNotIndex{\if@filesw,\if@test,\if@twocolumn,\if@twoside}
-\DoNotIndex{\ifcase,\ifdim,\ifvmode,\ignorespaces}
-\DoNotIndex{\input,\interlinepenalty,\itemsep,\ixpt,\label}
-\DoNotIndex{\labelsep,\labelwidth,\LARGE,\large,\Large}
-\DoNotIndex{\leavevmode,\leftmargin,\leftmargini,\leftmarginii}
-\DoNotIndex{\leftmarginiii,\leftmarginiv,\leftmarginv}
-\DoNotIndex{\leftmarginvi,\leftmark,\leftskip,\lineskip}
-\DoNotIndex{\magstep,\marginparsep,\marginparwidth,\markboth}
-\DoNotIndex{\markright,\medbreak,\multiply,\newbox,\newcount}
-\DoNotIndex{\newcounter,\newdimen,\newif,\newlabel,\newpage}
-\DoNotIndex{\newtoks,\nobreak,\nointerlineskip,\normallineskip}
-\DoNotIndex{\normalsize,\null,\number,\numberline,\oddsidemargin}
-\DoNotIndex{\offinterlineskip,\or,\par,\parbox,\parskip,\partopsep}
-\DoNotIndex{\prevdepth,\protect,\ref,\refstepcounter,\rightmrk}
-\DoNotIndex{\rm,\scriptsize,\section,\sectionmark,\setbox,\setcounter}
-\DoNotIndex{\sl,\small,\stepcounter,\string,\textheight,\textwidth}
-\DoNotIndex{\thefootnote,\thepage,\thesection,\thesubsection}
-\DoNotIndex{\thispagestyle,\tiny,\topmargin,\topsep,\uppercase}
-\DoNotIndex{\vbox,\vfill,\viiipt,\viipt,\vipt,\vpt,\vskip,\vss}
-\DoNotIndex{\wd,\xcommentloaded@,\xdef,\xiipt,\xipt,\xivpt,\xpt}
-\DoNotIndex{\xviipt,\xxpt,\xxvpt,\z@}
-\DoNotIndex{\abovedisplayskip,\abovedisplayshortskip,\@currentlabel}
-\DoNotIndex{\@dottedtocline,\@ne\@setsize,\@starttoc,\@tempboxa,\@}
-\DoNotIndex{\arraystretch,\centerline,\egroup,\end@dblfloat}
-\DoNotIndex{\evensidemargin,\footnotesize,\ifnum,\parindent,\parsep}
-\DoNotIndex{\rightmark,\@afterindenttrue,\@ne,\if@specialpage.\long}
-\DoNotIndex{\fboxrule,\fboxsep,\@for,\vfil}
-\DoNotIndex{\@@fortmp,\@@tempa,\@@tempb,\@ehd,\@for,\@fortmp,\@m}
-\DoNotIndex{\@mparswitchfalse,\@mparswitchtrue,\@nnil,\@spaces}
-\DoNotIndex{\@specialstyle,\@temptokena,\@twosidefalse,\@twosidetrue}
-\DoNotIndex{\@whilenum,\alph,\arabic,\count@,\errhelp,\errmessage}
-\DoNotIndex{\fbox,\index,\minipage,\newcommand,\overfullrule}
-\DoNotIndex{\pagestyle,\raggedright,\ref@stepcounter,renewcommand}
-\DoNotIndex{\semcolor@loaded,today,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\trivlist,\t,\p}
-\DoNotIndex{\today,\item,\@colht,\@currenvir,\@thefoot,\@thehead}
-\DoNotIndex{\@totalleftmargin,\allowbreak,\@captype,\@footnotetext}
-\DoNotIndex{\@listdepth,\@minipagefalse,\@minipagetrue,\@mpfn,\@mpfootins}
-\DoNotIndex{\endtrivlist,\everypar,\hsize,\ifvoid,\lastskip}
-\DoNotIndex{\linewidth,\skip,\thempfn,\thempfootnote,\topskip,\unvbox}
-\DoNotIndex{\@@input,\@@par,\@acci,\@accii,\@acciii,\@cclv,\@height}
-\DoNotIndex{\@maxdepth,\@tempdimb,\@tempg,\@temph,\@texttop,\@twocolumnfalse}
-\DoNotIndex{\@xfloat,\addvspace,\alloc@,\bigskipamount,\botmark,\chardef}
-\DoNotIndex{\closein,\closeout,\count,\countdef,\dimen,\glossary,\goodbreak}
-\DoNotIndex{\insc@unt,\intextsep,\kern,\mag,\marginpar,\maxdepth,\medskip}
-\DoNotIndex{\moveleft,\newinsert,\newskip,\onecolumn,\openin,\openout}
-\DoNotIndex{\read,\renewcommand,\repeat,\rightskip,\strut,\vfuzz,\voffset}
-\DoNotIndex{\vsize}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\endinput
-
-%% END tvz-code.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 9be6a984267..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,255 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN tvz-hax.sty
-%% 93/04/01
-%% Tim Van Zandt Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% These are some lousy hacks for typesetting the code
-%% and User's Guide  in the Seminar and PSTricks packages.
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAPER SIZES %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% Default paper size is 8.5in by 11in.
-% Just include the `a4' style option for A4 paper size.
-% For other paper sizes, define \paperwidth and \paperheight
-% before the \documentstyle command.
-
-\@ifundefined{paperwidth}{\def\paperwidth{8.5in}}{}
-\@ifundefined{paperheight}{\def\paperheight{11in}}{}
-\@namedef{ds@a4}{\def\paperwidth{210mm}\def\paperheight{297mm}}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% INPUTS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\newif\iftwoup
-\@namedef{ds@2up}{\input 2up.tex \twouptrue}
-
-\input article.sty
-\input fancybox.sty    % Version 0.93 or later.
-
-\iftwoup
-  \if@twoside
-    \targetlayout{twosided}
-  \fi
-\fi
-
-\if@twoside
-  \def\twosideclearpage{%
-    \clearpage
-    \ifodd\c@page\else
-      \thispagestyle{empty}%
-      \null\leavevmode
-      \clearpage
-    \fi}
-\else
-  \let\twosideclearpage\clearpage
-\fi
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% MISC %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\def\arraystretch{1.2}
-
-\hfuzz 1pt
-
-% Just in case I'm using AmS-LaTeX.
-\def\makeatother{\catcode`\@=12\relax}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% SHORT META %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% Works in verbatim environments, unless specially designed.
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\<=\active
-  \gdef\ShortMeta{%
-    \catcode`\<=\active
-    \def<##1>{{\MetaFont ##1\/}}}
-\endgroup
-\def\DeleteShortMeta{\catcode`\<=12\relax}
-\def\MetaFont{\sl}            % For meta arguments.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% FILE VERSIONS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% \GetVersion{file} scans first ten lines of <file> for
-% \filedate and \fileversion definitions.
-%
-% \CheckVersion{file} scans <scans> file for \filedate and \fileversion
-% and then compares these witha \FileDate and \FileVersion.
-%
-\def\GetVersion#1{%
-  \immediate\openin1=#1
-  \count@=0
-  \let\fileversion\relax
-  \let\filedate\relax
-  \@testtrue
-  \loop
-  \if@test
-    \advance\count@1
-    \immediate\read1 to \@tempa
-    \@tempa
-    \ifnum\count@=10
-      \@latexerr{Couldn't find fileversion}\@eha
-      \@testfalse
-    \else
-      \ifx\fileversion\relax
-        \@testtrue
-      \else
-        \ifx\filedate\relax
-          \@testtrue
-        \else
-          \@testfalse
-        \fi
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \repeat}
-
-\def\CheckVersion#1{%
-  \GetVersion{#1}
-  \ifx\FileVersion\fileversion
-    \ifx\FileDate\filedate\else
-      \@latexerr{Doc date (\FileDate) and file date (\filedate)
-         do not match}\@eha
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \@latexerr{Doc version (\FileVersion) and file version (\fileversion)
-      do not match}\@eha
-  \fi}
-
-% This expands the date, as defined in \filedate.
-
-\def\expanddate#1/#2/#3/{%
-  \number#3{}
-  \month=#2
-  \ifcase\month\or
-    January \or February \or March \or April \or May \or June \or
-    July \or August \or September \or October \or November \or December
-  \fi
-  19#1}
-\def\thefiledate{\expandafter\expanddate\filedate/}
-\date{\thefiledate}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% LOGOS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\def\AmS{{\protect\the\textfont\tw@
-  A\kern-.1667em\lower.5ex\hbox{M}\kern-.125em S}}
-
-\def\b@LaTeX{%
-  \begingroup
-    \csname reset@font\endcsname
-    \rm\bf
-    L\kern-.32em
-    \raise.36ex\hbox{%
-      \ifx\@currsize\Huge\LARGE\else
-      \ifx\@currsize\huge\Large\else
-      \ifx\@currsize\LARGE\large\else
-      \ifx\@currsize\Large\normalsize\else
-      \ifx\@currsize\large\small\else
-      \ifx\@currsize\normalsize\footnotesize\else
-      \ifx\@currsize\small\scriptsize\else
-      \ifx\@currsize\footnotesize\scriptscriptsize
-      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
-      \bf A}%
-    \kern-.15em
-    T\kern-.1667em
-    \lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125em
-    X%
-  \endgroup}
-\def\bLaTeX{\b@LaTeX}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% PAGE STYLE  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% The `docheadings' page style uses footers rather than headers.
-
-\def\ps@docheadings{%
-  \let\@mkboth\markboth
-  \def\@oddhead{}%
-  \let\@evenhead\@oddhead%
-  \def\@oddfoot{%
-    \small\sf
-    \rightmark
-    \hfil
-    \thepage}%
-  \def\@evenfoot{%
-    \small\sf
-    \thepage
-    \hfil
-    \theheadertitle}%
-  \def\sectionmark##1{\markright {##1}}}%
-\pagestyle{docheadings}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Table of Contents %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% Tighten up spacing in TOC:
-
-\newskip\tempskip
-\def\TOCshrink{.5}
-\def\TableOfContents{%
-  \begin{quote}
-    \begin{center} \Large\bf Contents \end{center}
-    \def\numberline##1{\hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 1em}}%
-    \let\oldaddvspace\addvspace
-    \def\addvspace##1{%
-      \tempskip##1\relax
-      \oldaddvspace{\TOCshrink\tempskip}}
-    \@starttoc{toc}%
-  \end{quote}}
-\def\tableofcontents{%
-  \clearpage
-  \markright{Table of contents}%
-  \TableOfContents
-  \clearpage}
-
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% code and examples %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-% `Ex' is an environment for putting samples of code.
-% It is a variant of
-%   \begin{quote}\tt ... \end{quote}.
-% It is NOT verbatim.
-
-\def\NotNested{%
-  \def\begin##1{%
-    \@latexerr{Bad nesting of environments.
-      Perhaps missing \end{\@currenvir}}\@eha
-    \end{\@currenvir}%
-    \begin{##1}}}
-
-\def\Ex{%
-  \NotNested
-  \list{}{}\item[]%
-  \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
-  \leftskip\@totalleftmargin
-  \rightskip\z@
-  \parindent\z@
-  \parskip\z@
-  \parfillskip\@flushglue
-  \hfuzz 1pt
-  \@@par
-  \global\@inlabelfalse}
-\def\endEx{\endlist}
-
-% Various things to make it easier to write code and examples:
-
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\{=12 \catcode`\}=12
-  \catcode`\(=1 \catcode`\)=2
-  \catcode`\+=0 \catcode`\\=12
-  +gdef+|(\)          % \| = character \
-  +gdef+{({)          % \{ = character {
-  +gdef+}(})          % \} = character }
-+endgroup
-\def\Backslash{\protect\|}
-
-% Define some functional font commands:
-
-\def\MainFont{\tt}            % For macro definitions.
-\def\UsageFont{\tt}           % For in-line macro names.
-\def\InlineFont{\tt}          % For other in-line snipets of code.
-\def\DisplayFont{\tt}         % For displayed code.
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\endinput
-%% END tvz-hax.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 2a3a8ca04aa..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,204 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN tvz-user.sty
-%% 93/04/01
-
-\input tvz-hax.sty
-
-\def\papersizeadjust{%
-  \@tempdima=\paperwidth\relax
-  \advance\@tempdima-8.5in
-  \divide\@tempdima 2
-  \advance\oddsidemargin\@tempdima
-  \advance\evensidemargin\@tempdima
-  \@tempdima=\paperheight
-  \advance\@tempdima-11in
-  \divide\@tempdima 2
-  \advance\topmargin\@tempdima}
-
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\"=\active
-  \gdef\ShortVerb{%
-    \catcode`\"=\active
-    \def"{\Verb"}}%
-  \gdef\DeleteShortVerb{\catcode`\"=12\relax}
-\endgroup
-
-% Paragraphs are marked by large space rather than indentation:
-\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
-\setlength{\parskip}{7pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
-
-% Reduce \topsep:
-\def\@listI{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmargini
-  \parsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
-  %\topsep 10\p@ plus4\p@ minus6\p@
-  \topsep 5\p@ plus2\p@ minus2\p@
-  \itemsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@}
-\let\@listi\@listI
-\@listi
-\def\@listii{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginii
-  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  %\topsep 5\p@ plus2.5\p@ minus\p@
-  \topsep 2\p@ plus.5\p@ minus\p@
-  \parsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
-  \itemsep \parsep}
-\def\@listiii{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
-  \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  %\topsep 2.5\p@ plus\p@ minus\p@
-  \topsep 1\p@ plus.2\p@ minus.2\p@
-  \parsep \z@
-  \partopsep \p@ plus\z@ minus\p@
-  \itemsep \topsep}
-
-\skip\footins 20pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Special hacks for User's Guides %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%
-%% Listing questions
-\newcounter{faq}[section]
-\def\thefaq{\arabic{faq}}
-\let\l@faq\@gobbletwo
-\def\faq{\@startsection{faq}{2}{\z@}%
-  {3.25ex plus 1ex minus .2ex}{1.5ex plus .2ex}{\faqfont}}
-\def\faqfont{\normalsize\sf}
-\def\faqmark#1{}
-%%
-%% Listing errors
-\def\error{\vskip 2ex\noindent}
-%%
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\@ifundefined{AmSTeX}
-   {\def\AmSTeX{\leavevmode\hbox{$\cal A\kern-.2em\lower.376ex%
-        \hbox{$\cal M$}\kern-.2em\cal S$-\TeX}}}{}
-\@ifundefined{BibTeX}
-   {\def\BibTeX{{\rm B\kern-.05em{\sc i\kern-.025em b}\kern-.08em%
-    T\kern-.1667em\lower.7ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX}}}{}
-\@ifundefined{SliTeX}
-   {\def\SliTeX{{\rm S\kern-.06emL\kern-.18em\raise.32ex\hbox
-                {\sc i}\kern -.03em\TeX}}}{}
-\@ifundefined{PlainTeX}{\def\PlainTeX{{\sc Plain}\kern2pt\TeX}}{}
-
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Special indexing for User's Guides %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%
-%%
-\@ifundefined{actualchar}{\def\actualchar{@}}{}
-\@ifundefined{quotechar}{\def\quotechar{"}}{}
-\@ifundefined{levelchar}{\def\levelchar{!}}{}
-\@ifundefined{encapchar}{\def\encapchar{|}}{}
-\@ifundefined{verbatimchar}{\def\verbatimchar{+}}{}
-%%
-%% These are the indexing commands:
-%%
-%% Commands:       \MainIndex        \UsageIndex
-%% Environments:   \MainEnvIndex     \UsageEnvIndex
-%% Style options:  \MainOptionIndex  \UsageOptionIndex
-%% Counters:       \MainCntIndex     \UsageCntIndex
-\def\@Index#1{\@bsphack\index{#1}\@esphack}
-\def\Index#1#2{%
-  \@bsphack
-  \index{\expandafter\@gobble\string#2\actualchar\string
-  \verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#2\verbatimchar
-  \encapchar #1}}
-{\catcode`\!=0 !catcode`!\=12!gdef!special@gobble#1{!if\#1!else#1!fi}}
-\def\MainIndex{\Index{main}}
-\def\UsageIndex{\Index{usage}}
-\def\SpecialIndex#1#2#3{%
-  \@Index{#3\actualchar{\tt #3} (#1)\encapchar #2}%
-  \@Index{#1s:\levelchar{\tt #3}\encapchar #2}}
-\def\MainEnvIndex{\SpecialIndex{environment}{main}}
-\def\UsageEnvIndex{\SpecialIndex{environment}{usage}}
-\def\MainOptionIndex{\SpecialIndex{option}{main}}
-\def\UsageOptionIndex{\SpecialIndex{option}{usage}}
-\def\MainCntIndex{\SpecialIndex{counter}{main}}
-\def\UsageCntIndex{\SpecialIndex{counter}{usage}}
-%%
-%% Font for index page numbers:
-\def\main#1{{\bf #1}}
-\def\usage#1{{#1}}
-%%
-%% These combine various functions:
-%%
-%% Commands:       \Main        \Usage
-%% Environments:   \MainEnv     \UsageEnv
-%% Style options:  \MainOption  \UsageOption
-%% Counters:       \MainCnt     \UsageCnt
-%%
-%% The "Main" ones
-%%   * Index argument.
-%%   * Print argument with \MainFont
-%%   * Create label +foo, e+foo or o+foo.
-%%
-%% The "Usage" ones
-%%   * Index argument.
-%%   * Print argument with \UsageFont.
-%%
-\def\SpecialLabel#1#2+{\label{+#2}}
-\def\LabelIndex#1{\MainIndex{#1}\expandafter\SpecialLabel\string#1+}
-\def\Main#1{%
-  \MainIndex{#1}%
-  \expandafter\SpecialLabel\string#1+%
-  {\MainFont\string#1}}
-\def\Usage#1{\UsageIndex{#1}{\UsageFont\string#1}}
-\def\MainEnv#1{%
-  \MainEnvIndex{#1}%
-  \label{e+#1}%
-  {\MainFont #1}}
-\def\UsageEnv#1{\UsageEnvIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}}
-\def\MainOption#1{%
-  \MainOptionIndex{#1}%
-  \label{o+#1}%
-  {\MainFont #1}}
-\def\UsageOption#1{\UsageOptionIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}}
-\def\MainCnt#1{%
-  \MainCntIndex{#1}%
-  \label{c+#1}%
-  {\MainFont #1}}
-\def\UsageCnt#1{\UsageCntIndex{#1}{\UsageFont #1}}
-%%
-%% These are abbreviations.
-%%
-\def\N{\Main}
-\def\n{\Usage}
-\def\E{\MainEnv}
-\def\e{\UsageEnv}
-\def\O{\MainOption}
-\def\o{\UsageOption}
-\def\C{\MainCnt}
-\def\c{\UsageCnt}
-%%
-%% This is for listing commands in a description environment.
-\def\xitem#1{\item[\Main{#1}]}
-%%
-%%
-\renewcommand{\EveryVerbatimLine}[2]{}
-\VerbatimFootnotes
-
-%% User's guide and documented code have different index prologue.
-\def\PrintUserIndex{{\let\ps@plain\@empty\@input{\jobname.ind}}}
-
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\<=1 \catcode`\>=2
-  \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12
-  \catcode`\[=13
-  \gdef\@MD<%
-    \catcode`\{=13 \catcode`\}=12 \catcode`\[=13
-    \def{##1}<\{<\MetaFont ##1\/>\}>%
-    \def[##1]<\string[<\MetaFont ##1\/>]>>
-\endgroup
-\def\MD{%
-  \NotNested
-  \Ex
-    \begingroup
-      \@MD
-      \def\end{\par\endgroup\end}%
-      \def\\{\@centercr\Main}%
-      \MainFont
-      \Main}
-\def\endMD{\endEx}
-
-\endinput
-%% END tvz-user.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index ec109716932..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-\ProvidesPackage{2up}[1998/03/13 package wrapper for 2up.tex]
-\input 2up.tex
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 51b72e80116..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,371 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN 2up.tex/2up.sty
-%%
-\def\fileversion{1.2}
-\def\filedate{93/01/28}
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1992, 1993 by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% DESCRIPTION:
-%%   2up.tex/2up.sty provides two-up printing for Generic TeX (e.g.,
-%%   Plain, LaTeX, AmSTeX and AmS-LaTeX). It produces a standard dvi file,
-%%   and does not involve an additional dvi or PostScript filter. It has a
-%%   flexible interface for specifying paper size and layout.
-%%
-%% INSTALLATION:
-%%   Put this file where your TeX looks for inputs, under the name 2up.tex.
-%%   Name a copy 2up.sty to use as a LaTeX style option, or create a file
-%%   2up.sty with the lines:
-%%     \input 2up.tex
-%%     \endinput
-%%
-%% DOCUMENTATION:
-%%   Input 2up.tex, or include 2up as a LaTeX style option. There is a
-%%   good chance you will get the desired layout. (But you will probably
-%%   need to generate new font bitmaps to get high quality output.) See
-%%   2up.doc, which might be appended to this file, for detailed
-%%   documentation.
-%%
-%% CODE:
-%
-\csname TwoUpLoaded\endcsname
-\let\TwoUpLoaded\endinput
-%
-\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@}
-\catcode`\@=11\relax
-\message{\space\space v\fileversion\space\space \filedate\space\space <tvz>}
-%
-% Parameter registers:
-\newdimen\@targetwidth
-\newdimen\@targetheight
-\newdimen\@sourcewidth
-\newdimen\@sourceheight
-\newdimen\pageseplength
-\newdimen\pagesepwidth
-\newdimen\pagesepoffset
-\newif\if@sidebyside
-\@sidebysidetrue
-\newif\if@twosided
-%
-% Registers used by output routine.
-\newif\if@leftpage
-\@leftpagetrue
-\newbox\@leftpage
-\newbox\@rightpage
-\newcount\@physicalpage
-%
-% Since pages are shipped out half as often:
-\multiply\maxdeadcycles by 2
-%
-% Registers used only for booklet layout:
-\begingroup
-  \let\newcount\relax
-  \gdef\booklet@registers{%
-    \newcount\bookletpage
-    \bookletpage=0
-    \newcount\leftpagenumber
-    \newcount\rightpagenumber
-    \multiply\maxdeadcycles by 20}
-\endgroup
-%
-% A useful extension of the \magstep macro.
-\def\magstepminus#1{%
-  \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax}
-%
-% \@targetwidth and \@targetheight are set to the *unmagnified* dimensions
-% of the target page. \inv@targetmag is the inverse of the target
-% magnification.
-{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12\gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}}
-\def\target#1#2#3{%
-  \mag #1\relax
-  \@targetwidth=1000pt
-  \divide\@targetwidth by #1\relax
-  \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@targetwidth\inv@targetmag
-  \@targetwidth=#2\relax
-  \@targetwidth=\inv@targetmag\@targetwidth
-  \@targetheight=#3\relax
-  \@targetheight=\inv@targetmag\@targetheight}
-%
-% Like \target, but for the source:
-\def\source#1#2#3{%
-  \@sourcewidth=1000pt
-  \divide\@sourcewidth by #1\relax
-  \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@sourcewidth\inv@sourcemag
-  \@sourcewidth=#2\relax
-  \@sourcewidth=\inv@sourcemag\@sourcewidth
-  \@sourceheight=#3\relax
-  \@sourceheight=\inv@sourcemag\@sourceheight}
-%
-% \targetlayout does a loop that reads the comma separated arguments.
-% There can be no extraneous spaces.
-\def\targetlayout#1{\process@targetlayout#1,stop,}
-\def\process@targetlayout#1,{%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\next\csname target@#1\endcsname
-  \ifx\next\relax
-    \begingroup
-      \errhelp{Valid target layouts are "topbottom", "twosided",
-        "booklet", "Booklet" and "dvidvi".}%
-      \errmessage{`#1' is invalid 2up target layout - ignored.}%
-    \endgroup
-    \expandafter\process@targetlayout
-  \else
-    \next
-  \fi}
-\def\target@stop{}
-\def\target@booklet{%
-  \booklet@registers
-  \def\ship@@@leftpage{\save@booklet\@leftpage}%
-  \def\ship@@@rightpage{\save@booklet\@rightpage}%
-  \@leftpagefalse
-  \def\twoup@eject{\twoup@eject@booklet}%
-  \expandafter\process@targetlayout}
-\def\target@Booklet{%
-  \def\booklet@@loop{\Booklet@@loop}%
-  \target@booklet}
-\def\target@twosided{%
-  \@twosidedtrue
-  \expandafter\process@targetlayout}
-\def\target@topbottom{%
-  \def\make@@halfpage{\make@@halftopbottom}%
-  \def\make@fullpage{\make@fulltopbottom}%
-  \@sidebysidefalse
-  \expandafter\process@targetlayout}
-\def\target@dvidvi{%
-  \def\ship@@@leftpage{\ship@dvidvi\@leftpage}%
-  \def\ship@@@rightpage{\ship@dvidvi\@rightpage}%
-  \expandafter\process@targetlayout}
-%
-% TeX's \shipout primitive is saved as \&normal@shipout, and then \shipout
-% is defined to save each page to \@leftpage or \@rightpage and to print out
-% every two. With the twosided layout, filler pages are added when needed.
-\expandafter\let\csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\shipout
-\def\shipout{%
-  \if@leftpage
-    \global\@leftpagefalse
-    \def\next{\afterassignment\ship@leftpage\global\setbox\@leftpage=}%
-    \if@twosided
-      \ifodd\count\z@
-        \global\setbox\@leftpage=\hbox{}%
-        \make@@halfpage\@leftpage\ship@@@leftpage
-        \def\next{\shipout}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \global\@leftpagetrue
-    \def\next{\afterassignment\ship@rightpage\global\setbox\@rightpage=}%
-    \if@twosided
-      \ifodd\count\z@
-      \else
-        \global\setbox\@rightpage=\hbox{}%
-        \make@@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage
-        \def\next{\shipout}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \next}
-%
-% The job of \ship@leftpage and \ship@rightpage is to invoke \ship@@leftpage
-% or \ship@@rightpage at the right time. \shipout is followed either
-% (i) by an \hbox, \vbox or \vtop, in which case \ship@leftpage is invoked
-% after the opening {. \@leftpage is void, and \ship@leftpage invokes
-% \ship@@leftpage after the closing }, or
-% (ii) by a \box or \copy, in which case \ship@leftpage is invoked after
-% the full assignment. \@leftpage is not voide, and \ship@leftpage invokes
-% \ship@@leftpage immediately.
-\def\ship@leftpage{%
-  \ifvoid\@leftpage\aftergroup\ship@@leftpage\else\ship@@leftpage\fi}
-\def\ship@rightpage{%
-  \ifvoid\@rightpage\aftergroup\ship@@rightpage\else\ship@@rightpage\fi}
-%
-% \ship@@leftpage/\ship@@rightpage take the output box, and first make it
-% into a fully-size source page (with \make@halfpage) and then this is
-% centered horizontally and vertically in half of a target page (with
-% \make@@halfpage). Then they are shipped individually or together.
-\def\ship@@leftpage{\make@halfpage\@leftpage\ship@@@leftpage}
-\def\ship@@rightpage{\make@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage}
-\def\make@halfpage#1{%
-  \dp#1=\z@
-  \setbox#1=\vbox to\@sourceheight{%
-    \vskip \inv@sourcemag in
-    \vskip \voffset
-    \hbox to\@sourcewidth{\hskip\inv@sourcemag in\hskip\hoffset\box#1\hss}%
-    \vss}%
-  \make@@halfpage#1}
-%
-% The definition of \make@@halfpage depends on the target layout.
-\def\make@@halfsidebyside#1{%
-  \global\setbox#1=\vbox to\@targetheight{\vss
-    \hbox to.5\@targetwidth{\hss\box#1\hss}\vss}}
-\def\make@@halftopbottom#1{%
-  \global\setbox#1=\vbox to.5\@targetheight{\vss
-    \hbox to\@targetwidth{\hss\box#1\hss}\vss}}
-\def\make@@halfpage{\make@@halfsidebyside}
-%
-% The pages are generaly shipped in pairs:
-\def\ship@twoup{%
-  \begingroup
-    \voffset=-\inv@targetmag in
-    \hoffset=\voffset
-    \global\advance\@physicalpage by 1
-    \count\z@=\@physicalpage
-    \csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\make@fullpage
-  \endgroup}
-\let\ship@@@leftpage\relax
-\def\ship@@@rightpage{\ship@twoup}
-%
-% The definition of \make@fullpage depends on the layout:
-\def\make@fullsidebyside{%
-  \hbox{\box\@leftpage\pagesep@sidebyside\box\@rightpage}}
-\def\make@fulltopbottom{%
-  \vbox{\offinterlineskip\box\@leftpage\pagesep@topbottom\box\@rightpage}}
-\def\make@fullpage{\make@fullsidebyside}
-%
-% A vertical or horizontal rule can be inserted. These can be redefined
-% for other tricks:
-\def\pagesep@sidebyside{%
-  \begingroup
-    \advance\pageseplength by \pagesepoffset
-    \pagesepwidth=\inv@targetmag\pagesepwidth
-    \kern -.5\pagesepwidth
-    \vrule height \inv@targetmag\pageseplength
-           depth -\inv@targetmag\pagesepoffset
-           width \pagesepwidth
-    \kern -.5\pagesepwidth
-  \endgroup}
-\def\pagesep@topbottom{%
-  \begingroup
-    \pagesepwidth=\inv@targetmag\pagesepwidth
-    \vskip -.5\pagesepwidth
-    \moveright\inv@targetmag\pagesepoffset\hbox{%
-      \vrule height\pagesepwidth width\inv@targetmag\pageseplength}%
-    \vskip -.5\pagesepwidth
-  \endgroup}
-%
-% With the dvidvi layout, the pages are shipped individually:
-\def\ship@dvidvi#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \voffset=-\inv@targetmag in
-    \hoffset=\voffset
-    \csname &normal@shipout\endcsname\box#1%
-  \endgroup}
-%
-% With the booklet or Booklet layout, the pages are saved rather than
-% shipped.
-\begingroup
-\let\newbox\relax
-\gdef\save@booklet#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \globaldefs=1
-    \advance\bookletpage by 1
-    \expandafter\newbox\csname bookletbox\the\bookletpage\endcsname
-    \expandafter\setbox\csname bookletbox\the\bookletpage\endcsname\box#1%
-  \endgroup}
-\endgroup
-%
-% The pages are then printed at the end with the following macros:
-\def\make@bookletpage#1{%
-  \setbox\ifodd#1\@rightpage\else\@leftpage\fi=%
-    \expandafter\box\csname bookletbox\the#1\endcsname}
-\def\booklet@loop{%
-  \count\z@\rightpagenumber
-  \make@bookletpage\leftpagenumber
-  \make@bookletpage\rightpagenumber
-  \ship@twoup
-  \booklet@@loop}
-\def\booklet@@loop{%
-  \advance\rightpagenumber by 2
-  \advance\leftpagenumber by -2
-  \ifnum\leftpagenumber<1\else\expandafter\booklet@loop\fi}
-\def\Booklet@@loop{%
-  \advance\rightpagenumber by 1
-  \advance\leftpagenumber by -1
-  \ifnum\leftpagenumber<\rightpagenumber\else\expandafter\booklet@loop\fi}
-%
-% This one is easy:
-\def\twoupemptypage{\shipout\hbox{}}
-%
-% This clears a whole target page if there is a saved left page. Note that
-% this does not invoke the output routine; i.e., it is not like \clearpage
-% or \supereject. See \twoupclearpage and \twoupeject below.
-\def\twoup@eject{%
-  \if@leftpage\else
-    \global\setbox\@rightpage\hbox{}%
-    \make@@halfpage\@rightpage\ship@@@rightpage
-    \global\@leftpagetrue
-  \fi}
-%
-% This is the definition of \twoup@eject with the booklet option:
-\def\twoup@eject@booklet{%
-  \leftpagenumber\bookletpage
-  \advance\leftpagenumber by 3
-  \divide\leftpagenumber by 4
-  \multiply\leftpagenumber by 4
-  \rightpagenumber=1
-  \ifnum\leftpagenumber>\bookletpage
-    \setbox\@leftpage\hbox{}%
-    \make@@halfpage\@leftpage
-    \loop
-      \setbox\@rightpage\copy\@leftpage
-      \save@booklet\@rightpage
-    \ifnum\leftpagenumber>\bookletpage
-    \repeat
-  \fi
-  \booklet@loop}
-%
-% This modification is needed for \LaTeX in order to get the last page
-% printed out if the final page is a left page (the catcode business is
-% because \enddocument is \let to \bye in amstex):
-\begingroup
-\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax
-  \catcode`\>=14\else\catcode`\>=9\fi\relax
->>\gdef\twoupclearpage{\clearpage\twoup@eject}
->>\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument}
->>\xdef\enddocument{\noexpand\twoupclearpage\the\@temptokena}
-\endgroup
-%
-% For most other macro packages we could just leave be and all pages would
-% always be printed because of the way the \end primitive works (except that
-% TeX will go bonkers with the booklet layout). However,
-% sometimes a blank filler page would be printed *with* headings. We prefer
-% the filler page to be truly blank. To achieve this,  we hack the definition
-% of \end. This may cause problems with some macros.
-\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax
-  \let\twoup@@@end\end
-  \def\end{\twoup@eject\twoup@@@end}
-  \def\twoupeject{\par\vfil\supereject\twoup@eject}
-\fi
-%
-% This is one workaround for the page cross-references problem
-\def\TwoupWrites{%
-  \let\TwoupSaved@write\write
-  \let\TwoupSaved@read\read
-  \let\TwoupSaved@openout\openout
-  \let\TwoupSaved@closeout\closeout
-  \def\write{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@write}%
-  \def\read{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@read}%
-  \def\openout{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@openout}%
-  \def\closeout{\TwoupSaved@write-1{}\immediate\TwoupSaved@closeout}%
-  \let\TwoupWrites\relax}
-%
-% Defaults:
-\def\twouparticle{%
-  \target{\magstepminus1}{11in}{8.5in}%
-  \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}
-\def\twoupplain{%
-  \target{\magstepminus2}{11in}{8.5in}%
-  \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}
-\def\twouplegaltarget{%
-  \target{\magstepminus1}{14in}{8.5in}%
-  \source{\magstep0}{8.5in}{11in}}%
-\def\twouplandscape{%
-  \target{\magstepminus2}{8.5in}{11in}%
-  \source{\magstep0}{11in}{8.5in}%
-  \targetlayout{topbottom}}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname @latexerr\endcsname\relax
-  \twoupplain\else\twouparticle\fi
-\pagesepwidth 0pt
-\pageseplength 6.5in
-\pagesepoffset 1in
-%
-\expandafter\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax
-\endinput
-%% END 2up.tex/2up.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 2abe7e2f5ef..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,975 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN fancybox.sty
-%%
-%% With corrections and suggestions from:
-%%   - Marcin Wolinski <wolinski@melkor.mimuw.edu.pl>
-%%   - Heiko Oberdiek  <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de>
-%%
-\def\fileversion{1.3}
-\def\filedate{2000/09/19}
-% DG/SR modification begin - September 19, 2000
-% (suggested by Heiko Oberdiek <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de>)
-\@ifundefined{ProvidesPackage}{}{%
-  \ProvidesPackage{fancybox}[\filedate\space\fileversion]}
-% DG/SR modification end
-% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
-\providecommand\@begindvi{} % For rather old versions of LaTeX 2e
-% DG/SR modification end
-% DG/SR modification begin - Feb. 27, 1997
-% Now defined only in latex209.def
-\def\@lquote{\leavevmode{\kern\z@}`}
-% DG/SR modification end
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% DESCRIPTION:
-%%   fancybox.sty is a LaTeX style option, consisting of:
-%%   * Variants of \fbox: \shadowbox, \doublebox, \ovalbox, \Ovalbox.
-%%   * Helpful tools for using box macros.
-%%   * Extensive documentation about how to use box macros.
-%%   * Flexible verbatim macros.
-%%
-%% INSTALLATION:
-%%   Put this file where your TeX looks for inputs.
-%%
-%% DOCUMENTATION:
-%%  See fancybox.doc, which might be appended to this file.
-%%
-%% CODE:
-\expandafter\ifx\csname fb@framepage\endcsname\relax\else
-  \expandafter\endinput
-\fi
-\typeout{Style option: `fancybox' v\fileversion \space  <\filedate> (tvz)}
-
-\newbox\@fancybox
-\@ifundefined{@tempdimc}{\newdimen\@tempdimc}{}
-
-%% \shadowbox
-
-\newdimen\shadowsize
-\shadowsize 4pt
-
-\def\shadowbox{\VerbBox\@shadowbox}
-\def\@shadowbox#1{%
-  \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{\fbox{#1}}%
-  \leavevmode\vbox{%
-    \offinterlineskip
-    \dimen@=\shadowsize
-    \advance\dimen@ .5\fboxrule
-    \hbox{\copy\@fancybox\kern-.5\fboxrule\lower\shadowsize\hbox{%
-      \vrule \@height\ht\@fancybox \@depth\dp\@fancybox \@width\dimen@}}%
-    \vskip-\dimen@
-    \moveright\shadowsize\vbox{%
-      \hrule \@width\wd\@fancybox \@height\dimen@}}}
-
-% \fancyoval
-
-\def\cornersize{\@ifstar{\@cornersize}{\@@cornersize}}
-\def\@cornersize#1{%
-  \@tempdima=#1\relax
-  \edef\the@cornersize{\number\@tempdima sp}}
-\def\@@cornersize#1{%
-  \edef\the@cornersize{#1\noexpand\@tempdimb}}
-\cornersize{.5}
-
-% This is just a simple change to \oval, making use of the \cornersize
-% parameter instead of making the corner arcs are large as possible.
-
-\def\fancyoval(#1,#2){\@ifnextchar[{\fancy@oval(#1,#2)}{\fancy@oval(#1,#2)[]}}
-
-\def\fancy@oval(#1,#2)[#3]{%
-  \begingroup
-    \fancy@@oval{#1\unitlength}{#2\unitlength}{#3}%
-    \@put{-.5\wd\@tempboxa}{-.5\ht\@tempboxa}{\ht\@tempboxa=\z@\box\@tempboxa}%
-  \endgroup}
-
-\def\fancy@@oval#1#2#3{%
-  \boxmaxdepth \maxdimen
-  \@ovttrue \@ovbtrue \@ovltrue \@ovrtrue
-  \@tfor\@tempa :=#3\do{\csname @ov\@tempa false\endcsname}%
-  \@ovxx#1\relax
-  \advance\@ovxx-\@wholewidth
-  \@ovyy#2\relax
-  \advance\@ovyy-\@wholewidth
-  \@tempdimb \ifdim \@ovyy >\@ovxx \@ovxx\else \@ovyy \fi
-  \advance\@tempdimb-2\p@
-  \ifdim\@tempdimb>\the@cornersize\relax
-    \@tempdimb=\the@cornersize
-  \fi
-  \@getcirc\@tempdimb
-  \@ovro\ht\@tempboxa \@ovri\dp\@tempboxa
-  \@ovdx\@ovxx \advance\@ovdx-\@tempdima \divide\@ovdx \tw@
-  \@ovdy\@ovyy \advance\@ovdy-\@tempdima \divide\@ovdy \tw@
-  \@circlefnt
-  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{%
-    \if@ovr \@ovvert32\kern -\@tempdima \fi
-    \if@ovl \kern \@ovxx \@ovvert01\kern -\@tempdima \kern -\@ovxx \fi
-    \if@ovt \@ovhorz \kern -\@ovxx \fi
-    \if@ovb \raise \@ovyy \@ovhorz \fi}%
-  \advance\@ovdx\@ovro
-  \advance\@ovdy\@ovro
-  \advance\@ovxx\@wholewidth
-  \wd\@tempboxa=\@ovxx
-  \dp\@tempboxa=\z@}
-
-% \ovalbox
-
-\def\ovalbox{\VerbBox{\@ovalbox\thinlines}}
-\def\Ovalbox{\VerbBox{\@ovalbox\thicklines}}
-\def\@ovalbox#1#2{%
-  \begingroup
-    #1\relax
-    \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#2}}%
-    \@tempdimc\fboxsep \advance\@tempdimc\@wholewidth
-    \@tempdima\ht\@fancybox \advance\@tempdima\dp\@fancybox
-    \advance\@tempdima2\@tempdimc
-    \@tempdimb\wd\@fancybox \advance\@tempdimb2\@tempdimc
-    \fancy@@oval\@tempdimb\@tempdima{}%
-    \@tempdima\dp\@fancybox \advance\@tempdima\@tempdimc
-    \wd\@tempboxa=\z@
-    \leavevmode\hbox{%
-      \lower\@tempdima\box\@tempboxa
-      \kern\@tempdimc\box\@fancybox\kern\@tempdimc}%
-  \endgroup}
-
-% \doublebox
-
-\def\doublebox{\VerbBox\@doublebox}
-\def\@doublebox#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#1}}%
-    \fboxrule=.75\fboxrule
-    \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{\fbox{\box\@fancybox}}%
-    \fboxrule=2\fboxrule
-    \fboxsep=\fboxrule
-    \advance\fboxsep .5pt
-    \fbox{\box\@fancybox}%
-  \endgroup}
-
-% Frames for seminar.sty:
-
-\@ifundefined{newslideframe}{}{%
-  \newslideframe{shadow}{\shadowbox{#1}}
-  \newslideframe{double}{\doublebox{#1}}
-  \newslideframe{oval}{\ovalbox{#1}}
-  \newslideframe{Oval}{\Ovalbox{#1}}}
-
-% Sbox environment
-
-\newbox\@Sbox
-
-\def\Sbox{\global\setbox\@Sbox\hbox\bgroup\ignorespaces}
-
-\def\endSbox{%
-  \@testtrue\ifhmode\ifinner\@testfalse\fi\fi
-  \if@test\@latexerr{Misplaced \string\endSbox! Should be in LR mode}\@ehd\fi
-  \egroup}
-
-\def\TheSbox{%
-  \ifvoid\@Sbox
-    \@latexerr{\string\TheSbox\space is empty!}\@ehd
-  \else
-    \box\@Sbox
-  \fi}
-
-\def\beginsbox#1{\setbox#1\hbox\bgroup\ignorespaces}
-
-\def\endsbox{\endSbox}
-
-% \VerbBox
-
-\newtoks\do@VerbBox
-
-\def\VerbBox#1{%
-  \do@VerbBox{#1}%
-  \afterassignment\begin@VerbBox
-  \setbox\@fancybox=\hbox}
-\def\begin@VerbBox{\aftergroup\end@VerbBox}
-\def\end@VerbBox{\the\do@VerbBox{\box\@fancybox}}%
-
-% \Btrivlist
-
-\def\@Blistrestore{%
-  \let\par\relax
-  \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii
-  \lineskip\normallineskip \baselineskip\normalbaselineskip}
-
-\def\Btrivlist#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@Btrivlist{#1}}{\@Btrivlist{#1}[]}}
-\def\@Btrivlist#1[#2]{%
-  \@Blistrestore
-  \let\\=\@Btrivlistcr
-  \fb@beginvbox{#2}%
-  \halign\bgroup
-    \if#1l\else\@empty\hfil\fi
-    \ignorespaces##\unskip
-    \if#1r\@empty\else\hfil\fi\cr}
-\def\endBtrivlist{\crcr\egroup\egroup\if@pboxsw$\fi}
-
-\def\fb@beginvbox#1{%
-  \leavevmode
-  \@pboxswfalse
-  \if#1b\@empty\vbox\else\if#1t\@empty\vtop\else
-    \ifmmode\vcenter\else\@pboxswtrue$\vcenter\fi
-  \fi\fi\bgroup}
-
-\def\@Btrivlistcr{\@ifstar
-  {\@ifnextchar[{@@Btrivlistcr}{\cr}}{\@ifnextchar[{\@@Btrivlistcr}{\cr}}}
-\def\@@Btrivlistcr[#1]{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}}
-
-\def\Bcenter{\Btrivlist{c}}
-\def\endBcenter{\endBtrivlist}
-
-\def\Bflushleft{\Btrivlist{l}}
-\def\endBflushleft{\endBtrivlist}
-
-\def\Bflushright{\Btrivlist{r}}
-\def\endBflushright{\endBtrivlist}
-
-% \Blist
-
-\def\Blist#1#2{\@ifnextchar[{\@Blist{#1}{#2}}{\@Blist{#1}{#2}[]}}
-
-\def\@Blist#1#2[#3]{%
-  \ifnum\@listdepth>5
-    \@toodeep
-  \else
-    \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne
-  \fi
-  \itemindent\z@
-  \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname
-  \def\@itemlabel{#1}%
-  \let\makelabel\@mklab
-  \@nmbrlistfalse
-  \@Blistrestore
-  \let\\=\@Blistcr
-  \let\item\Bitem
-  \@Bitemswfalse
-  #2\relax
-  \fb@beginvbox{#3}%
-  \halign\bgroup
-    \ignorespaces##&\hskip\labelsep\ignorespaces##\unskip\hfil\cr}
-
-\def\endBlist{\endBtrivlist\global\advance\@listdepth\m@ne}
-
-\newif\if@Bitemsw
-
-\def\Bitem{\@ifnextchar({\@Bitemcr\Bitem@skip}{\@Bitemcr\@Bitem}}
-
-\def\@Bitemcr{%
-  \if@Bitemsw
-    \def\next{\cr\noalign{\vskip\itemsep}}%
-  \else
-    \def\next{\global\@Bitemswtrue}%
-  \fi
-  \next}
-
-\def\Bitem@skip(#1){\noalign{\vskip #1}\@Bitem}
-
-\def\@Bitem{\@ifnextchar[{\Bitem@label}{\Bitem@nolabel}}
-
-\def\Bitem@label[#1]{\makelabel{#1}&}
-
-\def\Bitem@nolabel{%
-  \if@nmbrlist
-    \expandafter\advance\csname c@\@listctr\endcsname1 \fi
-  \makelabel{\@itemlabel}%
-  &%
-  \if@nmbrlist\refstepcounter{\@listctr}\fi}
-
-\def\@Blistcr{\@ifstar
-  {\@ifnextchar[{@@Blistcr}{\cr&}}{\@ifnextchar[{\@@Blistcr}{\cr&}}}
-
-\def\@@Blistcr[#1]{\cr\noalign{\vskip #1}&}
-
-% \Bitemize
-
-\def\Bitemize{%
-  \ifnum\@itemdepth>3
-    \@toodeep
-  \else
-    \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
-  \fi
-  \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
-  \Blist{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{\def\makelabel####1{\hfil####1}}}
-\def\endBitemize{\endBlist}
-
-% \Bdescription
-
-\def\Bdescription{\Blist{}{\def\makelabel####1{\bf####1\hfil}}}
-\def\endBdescription{\endBlist}
-
-% \Benumerate
-
-\def\Benumerate{%
-  \ifnum\@enumdepth>3
-    \@toodeep
-  \else
-    \advance\@enumdepth\@ne
-  \fi
-  \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
-  \Blist{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}%
-    {\usecounter{\@enumctr}\def\makelabel####1{\hfil####1}}}
-\def\endBenumerate{\endBlist}
-
-% Beqnarray
-
-\def\Beqnarray{%
-  \stepcounter{equation}%
-  \let\@currentlabel\theequation
-  \def\@eqnnum{{\csname reset@font\endcsname\rm (\theequation)}}%
-  \global\@eqnswtrue\m@th
-  \global\@eqcnt\z@
-  \tabskip\@centering
-  \let\\\@eqncr
-  \vbox\bgroup
-    \halign\bgroup
-      \@eqnsel
-        \hskip\@centering
-        $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$%
-      &\global\@eqcnt\@ne
-        \hskip 2\arraycolsep
-        \hfil${##}$\hfil
-      &\global\@eqcnt\tw@
-        \hskip 2\arraycolsep
-        $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$%
-        \hfil
-        \tabskip\@centering
-      &\if@eqnsw\hskip 1em\fi
-        \hfil{##}\tabskip\z@
-      \cr}
-
-\def\endBeqnarray{%
-  \@@eqncr
-  \egroup
-  \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne
-  \egroup
-  \global\@ignoretrue}
-
-\@namedef{Beqnarray*}{\def\@eqncr{\nonumber\@seqncr}\Beqnarray}
-\@namedef{endBeqnarray*}{\nonumber\endBeqnarray}
-
-% \fb@outputage
-
-% Here we insert various hooks for rotating or framing the page.
-% Otherwise, it is the usual \@outputpage
-
-\def\fb@outputpage{%
-  \begingroup
-    \catcode`\ =10
-    \let\-\@dischyph
-    \let\'\@acci
-    \let\`\@accii
-    \let\=\@acciii
-    \if@specialpage
-      \global\@specialpagefalse\@nameuse{ps@\@specialstyle}%
-    \fi
-    \if@twoside
-      \ifodd\count\z@
-        \let\@thehead\@oddhead
-        \let\@thefoot\@oddfoot
-        \let\@themargin\oddsidemargin
-      \else
-        \let\@thehead\@evenhead
-        \let\@thefoot\@evenfoot
-        \let\@themargin\evensidemargin
-      \fi
-    \fi
-    \csname reset@font\endcsname
-    \normalsize
-    \baselineskip\z@
-    \lineskip\z@
-    \let\par\@@par
-    \ifx\this@fancypage\@empty\else
-      \this@fancypage
-      \gdef\this@fancypage{}%
-    \fi
-    \ifx\the@fancypage\@empty\else
-      \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\the@fancypage{\box\@outputbox}}%
-    \fi
-    \ifx\fb@@rotatepage\@empty\else
-      \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\fb@@rotatepage{\box\@outputbox}}%
-    \fi
-    \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
-      \@tempdima=\wd\@outputbox
-      \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to\@tempdima{%
-        \let\label\@gobble
-        \let\index\@gobble
-        \let\glossary\@gobble
-        \@thehead}%
-      \ht\@tempboxa\headheight
-      \dp\@tempboxa\z@
-      \box\@tempboxa
-      \vskip\headsep
-      \box\@outputbox
-      \baselineskip\footskip
-      \hbox to\@tempdima{%
-        \let\label\@gobble
-        \let\index\@gobble
-        \let\glossary\@gobble
-        \@thefoot}}
-    \ifx\the@@fancypage\@empty\else
-      \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\the@@fancypage{\box\@outputbox}}%
-    \fi
-    \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{%
-      \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1 \do@fancyput\fi
-      \vskip\topmargin
-      \moveright\@themargin\box\@outputbox}%
-    \ifx\fb@rotatepage\@empty\else
-       \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\lower\ht\@outputbox\box\@outputbox}%
-       \dp\@outputbox\z@
-       \wd\@outputbox\z@
-       \setbox\@outputbox\hbox{\fb@rotatepage{\box\@outputbox}}%
-       \expandafter\fb@setoffsets\fb@theoffsets
-    \fi
-% DG/SR modification begin - September 19, 2000
-% (suggested by Marcin Wolinski <wolinski@melkor.mimuw.edu.pl> and
-%  Heiko Oberdiek <oberdiek@ruf.uni-freiburg.de>)
-    \let\protect\noexpand
-% DG/SR modification end
-    \shipout\box\@outputbox
-    \global\@colht\textheight
-  \endgroup
-  \stepcounter{page}%
-  \let\firstmark\botmark}
-
-% \fancypage
-
-\def\the@fancypage{}
-\def\the@@fancypage{}
-\def\this@fancypage{}
-
-\def\fancypage#1#2{%
-% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
-  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
-% DG/SR modification end
-  \def\the@fancypage{#1}%
-  \def\the@@fancypage{#2}%
-  \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}}
-
-\def\thisfancypage#1#2{%
-% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
-  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
-% DG/SR modification end
-  \gdef\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}%
-  \gdef\this@fancypage{\def\the@fancypage{#1}\def\the@@fancypage{#2}}}
-
-% \fancyput
-
-% Token registers used to make it easier to put definitions in argument.
-% Boxes not processed until output so that contents can depend, e.g., on
-% current page or marks or whatever. This makes everything slightly more
-% complicated than one would expect.
-
-\newtoks\the@fancyput
-\newtoks\this@fancyput
-\def\fancyput@flag{-1}%
-
-% \fancyput@flag=-1 if no fancyput, 0 if regular fancyput, 1 if thisfancyput.
-
-\def\fancyput{%
-% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
-  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
-% DG/SR modification end
-  \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}
-  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@fancyput}{\@testfalse\@fancyput}}
-\def\@fancyput{\@ifnextchar({\@@fancyput}{\@@fancyput(\z@,\z@)}}
-\def\@@fancyput(#1,#2)#3{%
-  \if@test
-    \expandafter\the@fancyput\expandafter{\the\the@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
-  \else
-    \the@fancyput{\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
-  \fi
-  \gdef\fancyput@flag{\z@}}
-
-\def\thisfancyput{%
-% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
-  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
-% DG/SR modification end
-  \gdef\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}
-  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@thisfancyput}{\@testfalse\@thisfancyput}}
-\def\@thisfancyput{\@ifnextchar({\@@thisfancyput}{\@@thisfancyput(\z@,\z@)}}
-\def\@@thisfancyput(#1,#2)#3{%
-  \if@test
-    \ifnum\fancyput@flag=\z@
-      \expandafter\global\expandafter\this@fancyput\expandafter{%
-        \the\this@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
-    \else
-      \expandafter\global\expandafter\this@fancyput\expandafter{%
-        \the\the@fancyput\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \global\this@fancyput{\do{#1}{#2}{#3}}%
-  \fi
-  \gdef\fancyput@flag{1}}
-
-\def\do@fancyput{%
-  \def\do##1##2##3{\raise##2\hbox to\z@{\kern##1\relax##3\hss}}%
-  \setbox\@tempboxa=\hbox to\z@{%
-    \kern-\hoffset
-    \raise\voffset\hbox{%
-      \ifnum\fancyput@flag=\z@\the\the@fancyput\else\the\this@fancyput\fi}%
-    \hss}%
-  \ht\@tempboxa=\z@ \dp\@tempboxa=\z@
-  \box\@tempboxa
-  \gdef\fancyput@flag{\z@}%
-  \global\this@fancyput{}}
-
-% \Landscape
-
-\def\UsePageParameters{%
-  \clearpage
-  \global\@colht\textheight
-  \onecolumn}
-
-\def\fb@rotatepage{}
-
-
-\def\Landscape{\@ifstar{\@testtrue\@Landscape}{\@testfalse\@Landscape}}
-\def\@Landscape#1#2#3{%
-% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
-  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
-% DG/SR modification end
-  \clearpage
-  \def\fb@rotatepage{#3}%
-  \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}%
-  \@tempdima#1\relax
-  \@tempdimb#2\relax
-  \if@test
-    \edef\fb@theoffsets{{\voffset}{\hoffset}{\number\@tempdima sp}}%
-  \else
-    \edef\fb@theoffsets{{\hoffset}{\voffset}{\number\@tempdimb sp}}%
-  \fi
-  \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempdima
-  \advance\textwidth\@tempdimb
-  \advance\textheight-\@tempdimb
-  \UsePageParameters}
-\def\endLandscape{\clearpage\aftergroup\UsePageParameters}
-
-\def\fb@setoffsets#1#2#3{%
-  \@tempdima#1%
-  \advance#1#2%
-  #2#3
-  \advance#2-2in
-  \advance#2-\@tempdima}
-
-\@namedef{Landscape*}{\@testtrue\@Landscape}
-\@namedef{endLandscape*}{\endLandscape}
-
-% \LandScape
-
-\def\fb@@rotatepage{}
-
-\def\LandScape#1{%
-% DG/SR modification begin - May 16, 1997
-  \@begindvi                    % Need today by LaTeX 2e
-% DG/SR modification end
-  \clearpage
-  \def\fb@@rotatepage{#1}%
-  \def\@outputpage{\fb@outputpage}%
-  \@tempdima\textheight
-  \textheight\textwidth
-  \textwidth\@tempdima
-  \UsePageParameters}
-\def\endLandScape{\clearpage\aftergroup\UsePageParameters}
-
-% \GenericCaption
-
-\def\GenericCaption#1{%
-  \par
-  \begingroup
-    \@parboxrestore
-    \normalsize
-    \vskip 10\p@
-    \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#1}%
-    \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\hsize
-      #1\par
-    \else
-      \hbox to\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
-    \fi
-  \endgroup
-  \par}
-
-% \landfloat
-
-\def\landfloat#1#2{%
-  \gdef\curr@landfloat{#1}%
-  \gdef\float@rotation{#2}%
-  \begin{#1}[p]%
-    \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox\bgroup
-      \hsize\@colht
-      \@parboxrestore}
-\def\endlandfloat{%
-      \par\vskip\z@
-    \egroup
-    \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\float@rotation{\box\@tempboxa}}%
-    \centerline{\box\@tempboxa}%
-  \expandafter\end\expandafter{\curr@landfloat}}
-
-% \boxput
-
-\def\boxput{\@ifstar{\@testtrue\@boxput}{\@testfalse\@boxput}}
-\def\@boxput{\@ifnextchar({\@@boxput}{\@@boxput(0,0)}}
-\long\def\@@boxput(#1,#2)#3#4{%
-  \setbox\@fancybox\hbox{{#4}}%
-  \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox to\z@{\vss\hbox to\z@{\hss{#3}\hss}\vss}%
-  \@tempdima=#1\wd\@fancybox
-  \advance\@tempdima\wd\@fancybox
-  \divide\@tempdima 2
-  \ifcat a#2\relax
-    \@tempdimb=\z@
-  \else
-    \@tempdimb=.5\ht\@fancybox
-    \advance\@tempdimb.5\dp\@fancybox
-    \@tempdimc=\@tempdimb
-    \advance\@tempdimc-\dp\@fancybox
-    \@tempdimb=#2\@tempdimb
-    \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdimc
-  \fi
-  \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox to \z@{%
-    \if@test\kern-\wd\@fancybox\fi
-    \kern\@tempdima\raise\@tempdimb\box\@tempboxa\hss}%
-  \ht\@tempboxa=\z@ \dp\@tempboxa=\z@
-  \leavevmode
-  \if@test
-    \hbox{\box\@fancybox\box\@tempboxa}%
-  \else
-    \hbox{\box\@tempboxa\box\@fancybox}%
-  \fi}
-
-% \Vfootnotes
-
-\def\VerbatimFootnotes{\let\@footnotetext\V@footnotetext}
-
-\long\def\V@footnotetext{%
-  \afterassignment\V@@footnotetext
-  \let\@tempa}
-\def\V@@footnotetext{%
-  \insert\footins\bgroup
-  \csname reset@font\endcsname
-  \footnotesize
-  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
-  \splittopskip\footnotesep
-  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
-  \floatingpenalty \@MM
-  \hsize\columnwidth
-  \@parboxrestore
-  \edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
-  \@makefntext{}%
-  \rule{\z@}{\footnotesep}%
-  \bgroup
-  \aftergroup\V@@@footnotetext
-  \ignorespaces}
-\def\V@@@footnotetext{\strut\egroup}
-
-% Verbatim
-
-% The main idea is to separate the reading and formatting of the
-% verbatim listing. It's pretty simple.
-
-\def\Verbatim@Codes{%
-  \let\do\@makeother
-  \dospecials
-  \Verbatim@ObeyThings
-  \ThisVerbCodes\relax\gdef\ThisVerbCodes{}}
-
-\def\EveryVerbatimCodes{}
-
-% \Verbatim is redefined temporarilly in \Get@Verbatim to scan the
-% verbatim text. \Verbatim is used so that error messages are more
-% enlightening. \next checks whether \Verbatim found its argument,
-% and attempts to recover if not.
-%
-% Heuristically, if current environment is `foo' and argument of
-% \Get@Verbatim is \The@Verbatim, then definition of \Verbatim is
-%
-% \def\Verbatim#1^^M#2^^M\the\EndVerbatimTokens\end{foo}{%
-%  \xdef\The@Verbatim{\noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine#2}%
-%  \endgroup\end{foo}}
-%
-% \The@Verbatim is then equal to the verbatim text, with spaces
-% replaced by \Verbatim@Space, tabs replaced by \Verbatim@Tab,
-% and ` replaced by \@lquote. In addition, each line begins with
-% \Every@VerbatimLine, and each line but the last ends with
-% \Verbatim@Par. It is then possible to redefine these when formatting
-% the verbatim text. To insert each line as an argument to \foo, use
-%   \def\Every@VerbatimLine#1\Verbatim@Par{\foo{#1}}
-%   \The@Verbatim\Verbatim@Par
-%
-\newtoks\EndVerbatimTokens
-\begingroup
-  \catcode`\|=0
-  \catcode`\[=1
-  \catcode`\]=2
-  \catcode`\{=12
-  \catcode`\}=12
-  \catcode`\^^M=13%
-  \catcode`\\=12%
-  |gdef|Get@Verbatim#1[%
-    |begingroup%
-      |Verbatim@Codes|EveryVerbatimCodes%
-      |let|protect|noexpand%
-      |VerbatimEnvironment%
-      |edef|next[|noexpand|def|noexpand|Verbatim####1|noexpand^^M####2%
-        |noexpand^^M|the|EndVerbatimTokens\end{|@VerbEnvir}]%
-      |edef|endVerbatim[|noexpand|endgroup|noexpand|end[|@VerbEnvir]]%
-      |global|let|@VerbEnvir|relax%
-      |next[|@nil|xdef#1[|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##2]|endVerbatim]%
-      |def|next[|@ifnextchar|@nil[|@gobble]%     If \@nil is there, then
-        [|gdef#1[]|endVerbatim|end[document]]]%  \Verbatim found its argument.
-      |expandafter|next|Verbatim]%               Otherwise, try to recover.
-  |gdef|AltGet@Verbatim#1[%
-    |begingroup%
-      |Verbatim@Codes|EveryVerbatimCodes%
-      |def^^M##1^^M##2[%
-        |ifx|@nil##2|@empty|else%
-          |noexpand|Verbatim@Par|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##1%
-          |expandafter^^M|expandafter##2%
-        |fi]%
-      |let|protect|noexpand%
-      |VerbatimEnvironment%
-      |edef|next[|noexpand|def|noexpand|Verbatim####1|noexpand^^M####2%
-        \end{|@VerbEnvir}]%
-      |edef|endVerbatim[|noexpand|endgroup|noexpand|end[|@VerbEnvir]]%
-      |global|let|@VerbEnvir|relax%
-      |next[|@nil|xdef#1[|noexpand|Every@VerbatimLine##2^^M|@nil]|endVerbatim]%
-      |def|next[|@ifnextchar|@nil[|@gobble]%
-        [|gdef#1[]|endVerbatim|end[document]]]%
-      |expandafter|next|Verbatim]%
-|endgroup
-\def\AltGetVerbatim{\let\Get@Verbatim\AltGet@Verbatim}
-
-% It is enough to not use \begin or \end when defining new verbatim
-% environments, as the default is for \Get@Verbatim to look for the
-% end of the current environment, but using \VerbatimEnvironment
-% is easier to explain to users.
-
-\def\VerbatimEnvironment{%
-  \ifx\@VerbEnvir\relax\xdef\@VerbEnvir{\@currenvir}\fi}
-
-\let\@VerbEnvir\relax
-
-\def\The@VerbatimErr{%
-  \gdef\The@Verbatim{\@latexerr{Misplaced \string\end{Verbatim}}\@ehd}}
-\The@VerbatimErr
-
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\^^M=\active%
-\catcode`\ =\active%
-\catcode`\^^I=\active%
-\gdef\Verbatim@ObeyThings{%
-\catcode`\^^M=\active%
-\catcode`\ =\active%
-\catcode`\^^I=\active%
-\catcode``=\active%
-\def^^M{\noexpand\Verbatim@Par\noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine}%
-\def^^I{\noexpand\Verbatim@Tab}%
-\def {\noexpand\Verbatim@Space}%
-\Verbatim@NoLigs}%
-\gdef\Verbatim@DontObeyLines{\outer\def^^M{}}%
-\endgroup
-
-\def\SaveVerbatim{\@bsphack\Get@Verbatim}
-
-\def\endSaveVerbatim{\@esphack}
-
-{\catcode``13 \gdef\Verbatim@NoLigs{\def`{\noexpand\@lquote}}}
-
-\def\Verbatim@Prep{%
-  \frenchspacing
-  \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}%
-  \VerbatimFont
-  \EveryVerbatim
-  \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbatimLine
-  \def\Verbatim@Space{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbatimSpace}%
-  \def\Verbatim@Tab{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbatimTab}}%
-
-\def\Verb@Prep{%
-  \frenchspacing
-  \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}%
-  \VerbFont
-  \EveryVerb
-  \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbatimLine
-  \def\Verbatim@Space{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbSpace}%
-  \def\Verbatim@Tab{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\VerbTab}}%
-
-\def\Verbatim@Par{\leavevmode\null\@@par\penalty\interlinepenalty}
-
-% Parameter initialization:
-
-\def\VerbatimSpace{\ }
-
-{\catcode`\ =12\gdef\ttspace{{\tt }}}
-
-\def\VerbSpace{\ }
-
-\def\VerbatimTab{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }
-
-\def\VerbTab{\ }
-
-\def\EveryVerbatim{}
-
-\def\EveryVerb{}
-
-\def\ThisVerb{}
-
-\def\EveryVerbatimLine{}%
-
-\def\EveryVerbOutLine{}
-
-\def\VerbatimFont{\tt}
-
-\def\VerbFont{\tt}
-
-\def\VerbatimFuzz{2pt}%
-
-\def\EveryVerbatimCodes{}
-
-\def\EveryVerbCodes{}
-
-\def\EveryVerbOutCodes{}
-
-\def\ThisVerbCodes{}
-
-\def\Verbatim@List#1{%
-  \if@minipage\else\vskip\parskip\fi
-  \leftskip\@totalleftmargin
-  \@rightskip\@flushglue \rightskip\@rightskip
-  \parindent\z@
-  \parskip\z@
-  \parfillskip\@flushglue
-  \hfuzz\VerbatimFuzz\relax
-  \@@par
-  \global\@inlabelfalse  %Prevents vspace from being inserted when
-  \Verbatim@Prep         %first line exceeds \hsize.
-  #1%
-  \Verbatim@Par}%
-
-\def\UseVerbatim#1{%
-  \begingroup\trivlist\item[]\Verbatim@List{#1}\endtrivlist\endgroup}
-
-\def\Verbatim{\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim}
-\def\endVerbatim{\UseVerbatim\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr}
-
-\def\LUseVerbatim#1{%
-  \begingroup\list{}{}\item[]\Verbatim@List{#1}\endlist\endgroup}
-
-\def\LVerbatim{\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim}
-\def\endLVerbatim{\LUseVerbatim\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr}
-
-\def\BUseVerbatim{%
-  \@ifnextchar[{\@BUseVerbatim}{\@BUseVerbatim[]}}
-\def\@BUseVerbatim[#1]#2{%
-  \begingroup
-    \Verbatim@Prep
-    \let\Verbatim@Par\@Btrivlistcr
-    \@Btrivlist{l}[#1]%
-    #2%
-    \endBtrivlist
-  \endgroup}%
-
-\def\BVerbatim{%
-  \catcode`\^^M=13\relax
-  \@ifnextchar[{\@BVerbatim}{\@BVerbatim[]}}
-\def\@BVerbatim[#1]{\def\@tempa{[#1]}\Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim}
-\def\endBVerbatim{
-  \expandafter\@BUseVerbatim\@tempa\The@Verbatim\The@VerbatimErr}
-
-\newwrite\Verbatim@Outfile
-\def\VerbatimOut#1{%
-  \@bsphack
-  \begingroup
-    \immediate\openout\Verbatim@Outfile #1\relax
-    \def\EveryVerbatimCodes{\EveryVerbOutCodes}%
-    \Get@Verbatim\The@Verbatim}
-\def\endVerbatimOut{%
-    \Verbatim@ObeyThings
-    \def\Verbatim@Par{^^J}%
-    \def\Verbatim@Space{\space}%
-    \def\Verbatim@Tab{\space}%
-    \def\@lquote{\string`}%
-    \ThisVerb\relax\gdef\ThisVerb{}%
-    \let\Every@VerbatimLine\EveryVerbOutLine
-    \immediate\write\Verbatim@Outfile{\The@Verbatim}%
-    \immediate\closeout\Verbatim@Outfile
-  \endgroup
-  \The@VerbatimErr
-  \@esphack}
-
-% This one is a little tricky because:
-% * we want to ignore the ^^M at the end of the last line,
-% * we want to handle files that end with newline and files that don't
-% * we want comment characters to work properly,
-% * we want to expand each line before inserting \Every@VerbatimLine and
-%     \Verbatim@Par,
-%
-% \The@GVerbatim is used as scratch with global redefinition.
-\newread\Verbatim@Infile
-\def\Verbatim@Input#1#2{%
-  \begingroup
-    \Verbatim@Codes\EveryVerbatimCodes
-    \immediate\openin\Verbatim@Infile #1\relax
-    \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile
-      \@latexerr{No verbatim file #1}\@ehd
-    \else
-      \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine
-      \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile
-        \@latexerr{Verbatim file #1 is empty}\@ehd
-      \else
-        \let\The@Verbatim\The@GVerbatim
-        \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine
-        #2{\Verbatim@@Input}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-    \immediate\closein\Verbatim@Infile
- \endgroup}
-\def\Verbatim@@Input{%
-  \let\protect\noexpand
-  \edef\The@Verbatim{%
-    \noexpand\Every@VerbatimLine
-    \The@Verbatim
-    \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else\noexpand\Verbatim@Par\fi}%
-  \let\protect\relax
-  \The@Verbatim
-  \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else
-    \let\The@Verbatim\The@GVerbatim
-    \def\The@GVerbatim{}\Verbatim@NextLine
-    \expandafter\Verbatim@@Input
-  \fi}%
-\begingroup\catcode`\^^M=\active%
-\gdef\Verbatim@NextLine{%
-  \ifeof\Verbatim@Infile\else%
-    \immediate\read\Verbatim@Infile to\@tempa%
-    \expandafter\Verbatim@@NextLine\@tempa^^M\relax^^M\@nil%
-  \fi}%
-% #2 is empty if line ends in ^^M, #2=\relax otherwise.
-\gdef\Verbatim@@NextLine#1^^M#2^^M#3\@nil{%
-  \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\The@GVerbatim\expandafter{\The@GVerbatim#1}%
-  \ifx#2\@empty\@empty\else\expandafter\Verbatim@NextLine\fi}%
-\endgroup%
-
-\def\UseVerb#1{\begingroup\Verb@Prep#1\endgroup}
-
-\def\SaveVerb{\@ifnextchar[{\Save@Verb}{\Save@Verb[]}}
-
-\long\def\Save@Verb[#1]#2{%
-  \begingroup
-    \Verbatim@Codes\Verbatim@DontObeyLines\EveryVerbCodes
-    \Save@@Verb{#1}{#2}}
-
-\long\def\Save@@Verb#1#2#3{%
-  \let\protect\noexpand
-  \def\next{\@ifnextchar\@nil{\@gobble}{\endgroup}}%
-  \long\def\Verb##1#3{\@nil\xdef#2{##1}\endgroup#1}%
-  \expandafter\next\Verb}
-
-\def\Verb{\Save@Verb[\UseVerb{\The@Verbatim}]{\The@Verbatim}}
-
-\def\VerbatimInput#1{\begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#1}\UseVerbatim\endgroup}
-
-\def\LVerbatimInput#1{\begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#1}\LUseVerbatim\endgroup}
-
-\def\BVerbatimInput{\@ifnextchar[{\@BVerbatimInput}{\@BVerbatimInput[]}}
-\def\@BVerbatimInput[#1]#2{%
-  \begingroup\Verbatim@Input{#2}{\@BUseVerbatim[#1]}\endgroup}
-
-\endinput
-%% END fancybox.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 88f687e7bd7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,193 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN npsfont.sty
-%%
-\def\fileversion{v1.0}
-\def\filedate{91/11/20}
-%%
-%% Style option npsfont.sty, for use with LaTeX 2.09
-%%   and the New Font Selection Scheme.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1992, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% Copying of part or all of this file is allowed under the following
-%% conditions only:
-%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the file. Please
-%%     include the documentation when you do so.
-%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of the file, but only for personal
-%%     use or use within an organization.
-%% (3) You may copy fragments from the file, for personal use or for use
-%%     in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given
-%%     where credit is due.
-%%
-%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of
-%% this file or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for
-%% a nominal charge for copying etc.
-%%
-% DESCRIPTION:
-%
-% Defining new PostScript fonts with the New Font Selection Scheme is easy,
-% but these macros make it easier. They save on keystrokes, and most
-% importantly, they make it easy to change the file names used for fonts
-% because you only have to type the file name once instead of 12 times (for
-% the 12 standard LaTeX sizes). An optional argument lets you scale the fonts.
-%
-% These macros are substitutes for the NFSS's \new@fontshape command. For
-% information on the purpose of this command, and on how to select fonts that
-% are defined with it, see the documentation of the NFSS. If you don't have
-% the NFSS, it is available from
-%   rusmv1.rus.uni-stuttgart.de
-% in
-%   soft/tex/latex-style-supported/New-Font-Selection
-% and from
-%   ymir.claremont.edu
-% in
-%   [.anonymous.tex.inputs.latex-mainz]
-% The NFSS is undoubtably the best way to use PostScript fonts (or any non-
-% standard fonts) with LaTeX, and is well worth upgrading to.
-%
-% USAGE:
-%
-%   \newpsfont[<scaling>]{<family>}{<series>}{<shape>}{<filename>}
-%
-%   \newpsfamily[<scaling>]{<family>}{
-%     {<series 1>}{<shape 1>}{<filename 1>},
-%     {<series 2>}{<shape 2>}{<filename 2>},
-%                 . . .
-%     {<series n>}{<shape n>}{<filename n>}}
-%
-% The scaling argument is optional. Like the \new@fontshape command, these
-% commands can only be used in the preamble.
-%
-% EXAMPLE:
-%
-% Suppose the Helvetica-Oblique virtual font on your system has the name
-% phvro.vf. The following defines the <helvetica> family, <m>edium series, and
-% <it>alic shape to be the Helvetica-Oblique font, at the standard LaTeX
-% font sizes, scaled by .82:
-%
-%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{it}{phvro}
-%
-% This is equivalent to:
-%
-%   \new@fontshape{helvetica}{m}{it}{%
-%     <5>phvro at 4.1pt%
-%     <6>phvro at 4.92pt%
-%     <7>phvro at 5.74pt%
-%     <8>phvro at 6.56pt%
-%     <9>phvro at 7.38pt%
-%     <10>phvro at 8.2pt%
-%     <11>phvro at 8.979pt%
-%     <12>phvro at 9.84pt%
-%     <14>phvro at 11.808pt%
-%     <17>phvro at 14.1696pt%
-%     <20>phvro at 17.0068pt%
-%     <25>phvro at 20.4016pt}{}
-%
-% The following command sets up the standard Helvetica family:
-%
-%   \newpsfamily[.82]{helvetica}{%
-%     {m}{n}{phvr},                          %Helvetica
-%     {m}{it}{phvro},                        %Helvetica-Oblique
-%     {m}{sl}{phvro},                        %Helvetica-Oblique
-%     {bx}{n}{phvb},                         %Helvetica-Bold
-%     {bx}{it}{phvbo},                       %Helvetica-BoldOblique
-%     {bx}{sl}{phvbo}}                       %Helvetica-BoldOblique
-%
-% (Don't forget the commas.) It is equivalent to:
-%
-%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{n}{phvr}     %Helvetica
-%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{it}{phvro}   %Helvetica-Oblique
-%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{m}{sl}{phvro}   %Helvetica-Oblique
-%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{n}{phvb}    %Helvetica-Bold
-%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{it}{phvbo}  %Helvetica-BoldOblique
-%   \newpsfont[.82]{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{phvbo}  %Helvetica-BoldOblique
-%   \extra@def{helvetica}{}{}
-%
-% WHY SCALE FONTS?:
-%
-% Disclaimer: The suggestions that follow come from someone who doesn't know
-% anything about fonts.
-%
-% Mixing fonts that are not designed to be used together is not for purists,
-% but many of us do it anyway. Scaling the fonts can at least correct for
-% differences in the x-heights. This is important if you use Computer
-% Modern fonts for in-line math and some other fonts for text.
-%
-% To find out the x-height of the 10pt size of a font, load this style and
-% use the command
-%
-%   \showxheight{<filename>}
-%
-% E.g., \showxheight{phvr} and \showxheight{cmr10} displays
-%
-%   x-height of cmr10 at 10pt is 4.30554pt
-%   x-height of phvr at 10pt is 5.24998pt
-%
-% on the terminal. Scaling the Helvetica fonts by 4.30554/5.24990 = .82
-% gets the x-heights of these fonts in line. It is best to set the x-heights
-% the same for the medium weight, normal shaped fonts, and then scale the
-% rest of the fonts in the same family by the same amount.
-%
-% David Jones has a psfonts.sty that sets up the standard PostScript fonts,
-% all scaled so that the x-heights match that of the Computer Modern medium
-% roman font. It is available via anonymous ftp from theory.lcs.mit.edu in
-% /pub/dmjones.
-%
-% IMPLEMENTATION:
-%
-% \scale@stdsizes has at its argument a scaling factor. It uses \font@scale
-% to define \scaled@sizes to be the macro whose argument is the name of a
-% font, and which expands to the definitions of the standard \LaTeX{} sizes
-% for New Font Selection Schemes \new@fontshape command.
-%
-\message{\space\space\fileversion\space\space\filedate
-  \space\space<tvz>}
-\@ifundefined{new@psfontshape}{}{\endinput}
-\def\font@scale#1#2#3{\dimen@=#2\dimen@=#3\dimen@
-  \edef\scaled@sizes##1{\scaled@sizes{##1}<#1>##1 at\number\dimen@ sp}}
-\def\scale@stdsizes#1{%
-  \edef\scaled@sizes##1{}%
-  \font@scale{5}{5pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{6}{6pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{7}{7pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{8}{8pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{9}{9pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{10}{10pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{11}{10.95pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{12}{12pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{14}{14.4pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{17}{17.28pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{20}{20.74pt}{#1}%
-  \font@scale{25}{24.88pt}{#1}}
-\def\new@psfontshape#1#2#3#4{%
-  \new@fontshape{#1}{#2}{#3}{\scaled@sizes{#4}}{}}
-\def\new@psfont[#1]#2#3#4#5{%
-  \scale@stdsizes{#1}%
-  \new@psfontshape{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}}
-\def\newpsfont{%
-  \@ifnextchar [{\new@psfont}{\new@psfont[1]}}
-\def\newpsfamily{%
-  \@ifnextchar [{\new@psfamily}{\new@psfamily[1]}}
-\def\new@psfamily[#1]#2#3{%
-  \scale@stdsizes{#1}%
-  \@for\@tempa:=#3\do{%
-    \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\new@psfontshape{#2}\@tempa}
-    \@tempb}%
-  \extra@def{#2}{}{}}
-\def\showxheight#1{%
-  \font\@tempfont=#1 at 10pt%
-  \typeout{^^J x-height of #1 at 10pt is \the\fontdimen5\@tempfont}}
-% The commands are added to \@preamblecmds to save memory.
-\begingroup
-  \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}
-  \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds
-    \do\font@scale
-    \do\scale@stdsizes
-    \do\scaled@sizes
-    \do\new@psfontshape
-    \do\new@psfont
-    \do\newpsfont
-    \do\newpsfamily
-    \do\new@psfamily}
-\endgroup
-\endinput
-%% END npsfont.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index c71a539161f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,8 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN sem-a4.sty
-\def\paperwidth{210mm}
-\def\paperheight{297mm}
-\input sem-page.sty
-\slidewidth 222mm
-\slideheight 152mm
-\endinput
-%% END sem-a4.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index be12ee77b0f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN sem-page.sty
-\def\fileversion{1.0}
-\def\filedate{93/04/01}
-%%
-%% Contains the page parameters for the `seminar' LaTeX document style.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions.
-%%
-\def\slideleftmargin{.6in}
-\def\sliderightmargin{.6in}
-\def\slidetopmargin{.6in}
-\def\slidebottommargin{.6in}
-\ifarticle
-  \ifportrait
-    \twocolumn
-    \sloppy
-    \topmargin 0pt
-    \headheight 15pt
-    \headsep 25pt
-    \footskip 30pt
-    \footheight 15pt
-    \textheight\paperwidth\relax
-    \advance\textheight -1in
-    \advance\textheight -\headsep
-    \advance\textheight -\headheight
-    \advance\textheight -\footskip
-    \advance\textheight -\footheight
-    \advance\textheight -.5in
-    \textwidth\paperheight\relax
-    \advance\textwidth by -2in
-    \oddsidemargin 0pt
-    \evensidemargin 0pt
-    \leftmargini 2em
-    \leftmarginv .5em
-    \leftmarginvi .5em
-    \columnsep  40pt
-    \marginparwidth 0pt
-    \marginparsep 0pt
-  \else
-    \textwidth 5.5in
-    \oddsidemargin\paperwidth\relax
-    \advance\oddsidemargin -\textwidth
-    \divide\oddsidemargin 2
-    \advance\oddsidemargin -1in
-    \evensidemargin\oddsidemargin
-    \if@twoside
-      \advance\oddsidemargin -18pt
-      \advance\evensidemargin 18pt
-    \fi
-    \topmargin -20pt
-    \headheight 15pt
-    \headsep 25pt
-    \footskip 33pt
-    \footheight 15pt
-    \textheight\paperheight\relax
-    \advance\textheight -1in
-    \advance\textheight -\topmargin
-    \advance\textheight -\headsep
-    \advance\textheight -\headheight
-    \advance\textheight -\footskip
-    \advance\textheight -.5in
-  \fi
-\else
-  \oddsidemargin 0pt
-  \evensidemargin 0pt
-  \marginparwidth 0pt
-  \marginparsep 0pt
-  \ifportrait
-    \textwidth\paperwidth\relax
-    \textheight\paperheight\relax
-  \else
-    \textwidth\paperheight\relax
-    \textheight\paperwidth\relax
-  \fi
-  \advance\textwidth by -2in
-  \topmargin -1in
-  \headheight .5in
-  \headsep .5in
-  \advance\textheight by -2in
-  \footskip .75in
-  \footheight .25in
-\fi
-\endinput
-%% END sem-page.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 03a58cd842f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `semcolor.sty', version 1.01
-%%
-%% IMPORTANT NOTICE:
-%%
-%% semcolor.sty Copyright (C) 1993 Timothy Van Zandt
-%%
-%% This package may be distributed under the terms of the LaTeX Project 
-%% Public License, as described in lppl.txt in the base LaTeX distribution.
-%% Either version 1.0 or, at your option, any later version.
-%%
-\def\fileversion{1.01}
-\def\filedate{2004/05/18}
-%%
-%% LaTeX style option `semcolor.sty'.
-%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the `seminar' document style.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions.
-%%
-%% You must install the PSTricks package v0.9 or later to use semcolor.sty.
-%%
-\@ifundefined{SemcolorFrameOps}{}{\endinput}
-\typeout{Style Option: `semcolor' for doc style `seminar'
-  \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)}
-% RN modification begin -- 2004/05/04; Rolf.Niepraschk@ptb.de
-%\input{pstricks}
-\ProvidesFile{semcolor.sty}[\filedate\space v\fileversion\space (tvz)]
-\RequirePackage{pstricks}
-% RN modification end
-%
-% Set up the frame styles:
-\def\SemcolorFrameOps{\psset{%
-  fillstyle=none,%
-  linewidth=\slideframewidth,%
-  framesep=\slideframesep,%
-  cornersize=absolute,%
-  linearc=.5cm,%
-  shadowsize=2pt,%
-  shadowcolor=darkgray}}%
-\newslideframe{scplain}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psframebox{#1}}
-\newslideframe{scdouble}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psdblframebox{#1}}
-\newslideframe{scshadow}[\SemcolorFrameOps]{\psshadowbox{#1}}
-\slideframe{scplain}
-%
-% Rotation:
-\def\leftsliderotation#1{\rotateleft{#1}}
-\def\rightsliderotation#1{\rotateright{#1}}
-\sliderotation{left}
-%
-% Color:
-\addto@hook\after@slidepage{\pstVerb{0 setgray}}
-%
-% Overlays:
-\def\make@overlay#1{%
-  \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{%
-    \pst@initoverlay{#1}%
-    \pst@Verb{(0) BOL}%
-    \copy\@@slidebox
-    \pst@Verb{(all) BOL}}}
-\def\@overlay{\pst@overlay}
-\addto@hook\before@newslide{\def\curr@overlay{0}}
-\@ifundefined{overlaystrue}{}{\ifarticle\else\overlaystrue\layerstrue\fi}
-%
-\endinput
-%% END semcolor.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 3602d985d7e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,183 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN semhelv.sty
-\def\fileversion{1.4}
-\def\filedate{2000/05/08}
-%%
-%% LaTeX style option `semhelv.sty' for the `seminar' document class.
-%% For use with LaTeX2e.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1994, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%% See seminar.cls or seminar.doc for copying restrictions.
-%% Edited by Sebastian Rahtz <sebastian.rahtz@oucs.ox.ac.uk>
-%%   and Denis Girou <denis.girou@idris.fr>
-%% To use OT1-encoding 7t names
-%% ************************************************************************
-%% ****                        DESCRIPTION                             ****
-%% ************************************************************************
-%%
-% This file contains the external font information needed to load
-% the PostScript Helvetica fonts for use by seminar.cls.
-%
-% IMPORTANT:
-%   As distributed, the following font file names are assumed for the
-%   `standard' TeX encoding:
-%
-%     Helvetica              phvr7t
-%     Helvetica-Oblique      phvro7t
-%     Helvetica-Bold         phvb7t
-%     Helvetica-BoldOblique  phvbo7t
-%     Courier                pcrr7t
-%     Courier-Bold           pcrb7t
-%     Courier-Oblique        pcrro7t
-%     Courier-BoldOblique    pcrbo7t
-%
-%   With the NFSS2 and LaTeX2e, you can also use the CORK encoding. The
-%   assumed file names are as above, but with `8t' instead of `7t'
-%
-%   This means, e.g., that phvr7t.tfm or phvr7t.vf must be the name of the
-%   TeX .tfm or .vf (virtual font) file for the PostScript Helvetica font.
-%   See the documentation of your dvi-to-ps driver for information on using
-%   PostScript fonts.
-%
-% Fonts are scaled so that the x-heights match those of the cmr fonts;
-% this makes in-line math look acceptable.
-%
-% Note: The Courier font is not that great.
-%
-% Preliminaries:
-\csname semhelv@loaded\endcsname
-\let\semhelv@loaded\endinput
-\typeout{Style Option: `semhelv' for the `seminar' doc style
-  \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)}
-\typeout{Modified by Stefan (see source for details)}
-\@ifundefined{selectfont}
-  {\@seminarerr{`semhelv' style option can only be used
-    with the New Font Selection Scheme}\@eha\endinput}{}
-%
-% Font definitions.
-
-\expandafter\ifx\csname DeclareSizeFunction\endcsname\relax
-
-% FOR NFSS:
-
-\@ifundefined{newpsfamily}{\input{npsfont.sty}}{}%
-
-% See npsfont.sty for the definition of \newpsfamily.
-
-\newpsfamily[.82]{helvetica}{
-  {m}{n}{phvr7t},          %Helvetica
-  {m}{it}{phvro7t},        %Helvetica-Oblique
-  {m}{sl}{phvro7t},        %Helvetica-Oblique
-  {bx}{n}{phvb7t},         %Helvetica-Bold
-  {bx}{it}{phvbo7t},       %Helvetica-BoldOblique
-  {bx}{sl}{phvbo7t}}       %Helvetica-BoldOblique
-\newpsfamily[.985]{courier}{
-  {m}{n}{pcrr7t},          %Courier
-  {bx}{n}{pcrb7t},         %Courier-Bold
-  {m}{it}{pcrro7t},        %Courier-Oblique
-  {bx}{it}{pcrbo7t}}       %Courier-BoldOblique
-
-% Use fonts or use \slidefonts:
-\ifarticle
-  \renewcommand{\slidefonts}{%
-    \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}%
-    \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}%
-    \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}%
-    \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}%
-    \family\default@family\selectfont}
-\else
-  \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}%
-  \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}%
-  \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}%
-  \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}%
-  \family\default@family\selectfont
-\fi
-
-\else
-
-% FOR NFSS2 OR LATEX2E:
-
-\def\helv@scale{.82}
-
-\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{helvetica}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvr8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvro8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvrc8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvb8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvbo8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/m/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/n}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
-
-\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{helvetica}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvr7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvro7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvrc7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{n}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvb7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{it}{<->s*[\helv@scale]phvbo7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/m/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/n}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * helvetica/m/sc}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{helvetica}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * helvetica/b/it}{}%
-
-\def\courier@scale{.985}
-
-% DG/SR modification begin - May. 13, 1998
-% Update some names (phvrq -> phvr7t etc.)
-% DG/SR modification end
-
-\DeclareFontFamily{T1}{courier}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrr8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrro8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrrc8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrb8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrbo8t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/m/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * courier/b/n}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{T1}{courier}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
-
-\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{courier}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrr7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrro7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{sc}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrrc7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{n}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrb7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{it}{<->s*[\courier@scale]pcrbo7t}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/m/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{n}{<->ssub * courier/b/n}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{it}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{sc}{<->sub * courier/m/sc}{}%
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{courier}{bx}{sl}{<->ssub * courier/b/it}{}%
-
-% Use fonts or use \slidefonts:
-\ifarticle
-  \renewcommand{\slidefonts}{%
-    \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}%
-    \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}%
-    \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}%
-    \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}%
-    \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont}
-\else
-  \renewcommand{\default@family}{helvetica}%
-  \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{helvetica}%
-  \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{courier}%
-  \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{helvetica}%
-  \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont
-\fi
-
-\fi
-
-\endinput
-%% END semhelv.sty
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2 b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ecd0ab188f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,252 +0,0 @@
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -*- Mode: Latex -*- %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%% seminar.bg2 --- Corrections for compatibility problems and new bugs
-%%                 found in the Seminar package, waiting Seminar 98
-%%                 (see also the seminar.bug file in Seminar distribution)
-%%
-%%                 Disclaimer: this file is mine and doesn't engage TVZ!
-%% 
-%% Note: insert this file after \usepackage{graphicx} if you use Graphicx
-%%       and after \usepackage{longtable} if you use LongTable
-%% 
-%% Author          : Denis GIROU (CNRS/IDRIS - France) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr>
-%% Created the     : 1995
-%% Last mod. by    : Denis GIROU (CNRS/IDRIS - France) <Denis.Girou@idris.fr>
-%% Last mod. the   : Fri Jan  9 10:31:26 1998
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-
-\def\fileversion{1.6}
-\def\filedate{November 20, 1997}
-\typeout{seminar.bg2: various corrections for the Seminar document class added
-since seminar.bug (waiting Seminar 98)^^J%
-(Version \fileversion\space of <\filedate> (D.G.))}
-
-\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@}
-\catcode`\@=11
-
-% 1 - To correct a bug in the note environment
-%     (reported by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) - <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - 1995)
-\@savsf=1
-
-% 2 - To correct several bugs to generate a list of slides with subsection
-%     entries
-%     (reported by Denis Girou (CNRS/IDRIS) - <Denis.Girou@idris.fr> - Jul. 18, 1995)
-%   - To clear the subheading when a new heading is defined
-%     (reported by Axel Thimm - <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997)
-%   - To assure coherence between heading and subheading when used in header/footer,
-%     for article mode
-%     (reported by Axel Thimm - <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997)
-%   - Improvements (\refstepcounter and \@addtoreset) by Jeremy Gibbons
-%     <jgibbons@brookes.ac.uk> - Sep. 30, 1997
-
-% Used by the \slide@subheading macro but undefined
-\def\theslidesubsection{\theslidesection.\arabic{slidesubsection}}
-
-\def\slide@heading[#1]#2{%
-% Modification D.G. begin - Oct. 15, 1997
-%  \stepcounter{slidesection}%
-  \refstepcounter{slidesection}%
-  \@addtoreset{slidesubsection}{slidesection}
-% Modification D.G. end
-  \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@slide
-    {\the\c@slidesection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}%
-% Modification D.G. begin - May 30, 1997
-%  \gdef\theslideheading{#1}%
-% Modification D.G. end
-  \def\@tempa{#2}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
-    {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesection\endcsname\theslidesection}%
-      \makeslideheading{#2}}%
-  \fi
-% Modification D.G. begin - May 30, 1997
-  \gdef\theslideheading{#1}%
-% Modification D.G. end
-% Modification D.G. begin - Aug. 1, 1997
-  \gdef\theslidesubheading{}%
-% Modification D.G. end
-}
-
-\def\slide@subheading[#1]#2{%
-% Modification D.G. begin - Oct. 15, 1997
-%  \stepcounter{slidesection}%
-  \refstepcounter{slidesubsection}%
-% Modification D.G. end
-  \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@subslide
-    {\the\c@slidesubsection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}%
-% Modification D.G. begin - May 30, 1997
-%  \gdef\theslidesubheading{#1}%
-% Modification D.G. end
-  \def\@tempa{#2}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
-    {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesubsection\endcsname
-% Modification D.G. begin - Jul. 18, 1995
-%      \theslidesubsection}\makeslideheading{#2}}%
-      \theslidesubsection}\makeslidesubheading{#2}}%
-% Modification D.G. end
-  \fi
-% Modification D.G. begin - May 30, 1997
-  \gdef\theslidesubheading{#1}%
-% Modification D.G. end
-}
-
-% 3 - To correct a bug in the \slidecontents macro
-%     (reported by Denis Roegel (LORIA) - <Denis.Roegel@loria.fr> - Sep. 22, 1996)
-
-\long\def\@gobblethree #1#2#3{}
-
-\def\slide@contents{%
-  \def\l@slide##1##2##3{%
-% Modification Denis Roegel begin - Sep. 22, 1996
-%    \slide@cline{\slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}%
-%  \let\l@subslide\@gobbletwo
-% Modification Denis Roegel end
-    \slide@cline{\slidenumberline{##1}{##2}}{##3}}%
-  \let\l@subslide\@gobblethree
-  \@startlos}
-
-% 4 - To solve incompatibily between the Graphicx package and Seminar.
-%     The \espfslidesize Seminar macro work only with the old version of
-%     the EpsFig package, so with \includegraphics the PostScript files are
-%     always scaled without the possibility to leave them to there natural
-%     size. And also these files are not correctly scaled when we switch
-%     from normal to article mode under Seminar. So, we must redefined the
-%     \epsfslidesize macro of Seminar and modify few internal macros of
-%     Graphicx.
-%     (Note: I consider only the GraphicX package, not the GraphicS one)
-%     (reported by Karl Tombre (LORIA) - <Karl.Tombre@loria.fr> - and Denis Roegel
-%                  (LORIA) - <Denis.Roegel@loria.fr> - Jan. 16, 1997)
-
-\def\GraphicsNotScaled{%
-\ifx\Gin@viewport\undefined
-\else                           % Graphicx package detected
-\def\Gin@i{%
- \def\Gin@req@sizes{%
-% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 16, 1997
-   \Gin@nat@height=\inverseslidesmag\Gin@nat@height
-   \Gin@nat@width=\inverseslidesmag\Gin@nat@width
-% Modification Denis Girou end
-   \Gin@req@height\Gin@nat@height
-   \Gin@req@width\Gin@nat@width}%
- \@ifnextchar[\Gin@ii{\Gin@ii[]}}
-% Modification Denis Girou begin - Feb. 19, 1997
-%\define@key{Gin}{width}{\def\Gin@ewidth{#1}}
-%\define@key{Gin}{height}{\def\Gin@eheight{#1}}
-%\define@key{Gin}{totalheight}{%
-%\def\Gin@eresize{\totalheight}\def\Gin@eheight{#1}}
-\define@key{Gin}{width}{%
-\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@ewidth{\@tempdima}}
-\define@key{Gin}{height}{%
-\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@eheight{\@tempdima}}
-\define@key{Gin}{totalheight}{%
-\def\Gin@eresize{\totalheight}%
-\@tempdima=##1\@tempdima=\inverseslidesmag\@tempdima\def\Gin@eheight{\@tempdima}}
-% Modification Denis Girou end
-\fi}
-
-\def\epsfslidesize{%
-\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize
-% Modification Denis Girou begin - Feb. 19, 1997
-\GraphicsNotScaled}
-% Modification Denis Girou end
-
-% 5 - To solve incompatibily between the LongTable package and Seminar
-%     (reported by Bhaskar Manda (UIUC) - <bhaskar@or4.me.uiuc.edu> - May 7, 1997)
-%   - Problem in article format seen later
-%     (reported by Axel Thimm - <thimm@physik.fu-berlin.de> - June 5, 1997)
-
-% From seminar.cls
-\def\slide@outputLT{% (from \slide@output)
-  \@makeslide
-  \@testfalse
-  \ifnotesonly\else
-    \iflandscape
-      \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi
-    \else
-      \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \if@test
-    \reset@slideoutput
-% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 13, 1997
-%    \@@makeslide
-    \@@makeslideLT
-% Modification D.G. end
-    \process@slide
-  \fi
-  \refstepcounter{slide}}
-\def\@@makeslideLT{% (from \@@makeslide)
-  \overfullslide@warning
-  \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{%
-    \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax
-    \vbox to\slide@vsize{%
-% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 13, 1997
-    \box\@outputbox
-% Modification D.G. end
-    \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi
-    \unvbox\@slidebox
-    \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}%
-    \the\after@slidepage}%
-  \wd\@slidebox\textwidth}
-
-% From LongTable
-\def\LT@output{%
-  \ifnum\outputpenalty <-\@Mi
-    \ifnum\outputpenalty > -\LT@end@pen
-      \LT@err{floats and marginpars not allowed in a longtable}\@ehc
-    \else
-      \setbox\z@\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv}%
-      \ifdim \ht\LT@lastfoot>\ht\LT@foot
-        \dimen@\pagegoal
-        \advance\dimen@-\ht\LT@lastfoot
-        \ifdim\dimen@<\ht\z@
-          \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\z@\copy\LT@foot\vss}%
-          \@makecol
-% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 13, 1997
-%          \@outputpage
-          \slide@outputLT
-% Modification D.G. end
-          \setbox\z@\vbox{\box\LT@head}%
-        \fi
-      \fi
-      \global\@colroom\@colht
-      \global\vsize\@colht
-      \vbox
-        {\unvbox\z@\box\ifvoid\LT@lastfoot\LT@foot\else\LT@lastfoot\fi}%
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@cclv\copy\LT@foot\vss}%
-    \@makecol
-% Modification Denis Girou begin - May 13, 1997
-%    \@outputpage
-%    \global\vsize\@colroom % Work for slides, but not for notes...
-    \slide@outputLT
-% Modification D.G. end
-    \copy\LT@head
-  \fi}
-
-% We must adjust \textheight. Sometimes, you must increase it a little by
-% something like \addtolength{\textheight}{5mm}
-% But if you use slides like \begin{slide*}[15cm,10cm]
-% you must define locally \textheight=15cm
-\addtolength{\textheight}{-\headheight}
-
-% 6 - To allow automatic changes of language dependant labels,
-%     for instance by loading french.sty after Seminar
-%     (suggested by Bernard Gaulle (IDRIS) - <gaulle@idris.fr> - Nov. 20, 1997)
-% Modification Denis Girou begin - Nov. 20, 1997
-% From seminar.cls
-\def\slidename{Slide}
-\def\slidelabel{\bf\slidename{} \theslide}
-% From slidesec.sty
-\def\listslidename{List of Slides}%
-\def\listofslides{\section*{\listslidename%
-\@mkboth{\expandafter\MakeUppercase\listslidename}%
-        {\expandafter\MakeUppercase\listslidename}}%
-  \def\l@slide##1##2##3{%
-    \slide@undottedcline{\slidenumberline{##3}{##2}}{}}%
-  \let\l@subslide\l@slide
-  \@startlos}
-% Modification Denis Girou end
-
-\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax
-\endinput
-%% END seminar.bg2
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug
deleted file mode 100644
index 49b063fac58..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,197 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN seminar.bug
-% LAST MODIFIED: December 1997
-% The latest version of this file can be obtained from Princeton.EDU.
-
-% This file list some bugs and latebreaking news for seminar.sty,
-% version 1.0, released April 1, 1993.
-
-% 1. Typo in the user's guide: \espfslidesize should be \epsfslidesize.
-
-% 2. fancyheadings.sty does not work well with slides.
-%    WORKAROUND: Ignore the footnote in the User's Guide that discusses this.
-%    Instead:
-%
-%     - If you want the width of the header to be "\textwidth"
-%       (the usual state of affairs), then put
-%
-%          \renewcommand{\headwidth}{\textwidth}
-%
-%       in the preamble and do not change "\headwidth" after that.
-%
-%     - If you want to set the width to something else, then you have to scale
-%       it appropriately. E.g., use
-%
-%          \setslidelength{\headwidth}{<dim>}
-%
-%       or, if are using the "fancy" page style with both the article and
-%       slides formats, use
-%          \ifarticle
-%            \setartlength{\headwidth}{<dim1>}
-%          \else
-%            \setslidelength{\headwidth}{<dim2>}
-%          \fi
-
-% 3. Some people prefer that the headers/footers automatically adjust their
-%    size to the width of the framed slide (I don't, which I guess is why
-%    seminar.sty does not work this way.) I have added an option for this.
-%    Put the command
-%
-%      \autoslidemarginstrue
-%
-%    in the preamble. You must also input this file (seminar.bug), which
-%    contains the patch.
-
-% 4. The optional argument in \twoup[int] does not work with the
-%    portrait option and slides format.
-%    PATCH: Input this file.
-
-% 5. Slide labels can come out in the wrong size font.
-%    PATCH: Input this file.
-
-% 6. When \newslide is used inside a list environment, subsequent nested
-%    list environments can have the wrong line width.
-%    PATCH: Input this file.
-
-% 7. \overlaypagestyle and \layerpagestyle commands ignored.
-%    PATCH: Input this file, AFTER inputting semlayer.sty.
-
-% 8. boxedEPS.tex won't work inside slide environments (because seminar.sty
-%    erroneously modifies \read so that it is preceded by \immediate).
-%    PATCH: Input this file.
-
-%%%% PATCHES
-
-\edef\TheAtCode{\the\catcode`\@}
-\catcode`\@=11
-
-% 3.
-\newif\ifautoslidemargins
-\ifarticle\else
-  \def\output@slide{%
-    \begingroup
-      \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
-      \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
-      \setslidelength\@tempdima{%
-        \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}%
-      \setslidelength\@tempdimb{%
-        \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}%
-      \ifrotateheaders
-        \@ifrotateslide{%
-          \dimen@=\@tempdima
-          \@tempdima=\@tempdimb
-          \@tempdimb=\dimen@}%
-      \fi
-      % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight
-      % used for scratch:
-      % Some page styles like to know \textwidth:
-      \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin
-      \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin
-      \ifautoslidemargins
-        \textwidth=\wd\@slidebox
-        \oddsidemargin=\@tempdima
-        \advance\oddsidemargin-\textwidth
-        \divide\oddsidemargin 2
-      \else
-        \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin
-        \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin
-        \textwidth=\@tempdima
-        \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin
-        \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin
-      \fi
-      \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{%
-        \kern\oddsidemargin
-        \vbox to\@tempdimb{%
-          \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1
-            \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}%
-          \fi
-          \let\label\@gobble
-          \let\index\@gobble
-          \let\glossary\@gobble
-          \vbox to\headheight{%
-            \vfill
-            \hbox{%
-              \slideheadfont\relax\strut
-              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}%
-            \kern\z@}%
-          \vfill
-          \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}%
-          \vfill
-          \vbox to\footheight{%
-            \hbox{%
-              \slidefootfont\relax\strut
-              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}%
-            \vfill}}%
-        \hss}%
-      \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
-      \insert@specials
-      \shipout\box\@slidebox
-    \endgroup
-    \let\firstmark\botmark}
-  \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{}
-\fi
-
-% 4.
-\ifarticle\else
-  \ifportrait
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \printlandscapetrue
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}}
-  \fi
-\fi
-
-% 5.
-\def\reset@slideoutput{%
-  \let\par\@@par
-  \reset@font
-  \normalsize
-  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
-  \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}%
-  \catcode`\ =10
-  \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii}
-
-% 6.
-\def\extraslideheight#1{%
-  \@tempdima #1\relax
-  \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp}
-  \ifslide\set@slideheight\fi}
-\def\set@slideheight{%
-  \iflandscape
-    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
-  \else
-    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
-  \fi
-  \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}%
-  \textheight\vsize
-  \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax}
-\def\newslide{%
-  \par\penalty-\@M
-  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
-  \the\before@newslide}
-
-% 7. Must be input after semlayer.sty.
-\def\layer@prep{%
-  \ifarticle\else\pagestyle{\layer@pagestyle}\fi
-  \let\thepage\thelayer
-  \ifx\thelayerframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\thelayerframe\fi
-  \let\slidelabel\layerlabel}
-\def\overlay@prep{%
-  \ifarticle\else\pagestyle{\overlay@pagestyle}\fi
-  \let\thepage\theoverlay
-  \ifx\theoverlayframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\theoverlayframe\fi
-  \let\slidelabel\overlaylabel}
-
-\catcode`\@=\TheAtCode\relax
-\endinput
-%% END seminar.bug
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls
deleted file mode 100644
index e5a5ae22d29..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1207 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN seminar.cls
-%% LaTeX2e seminar class, derived by Sebastian Rahtz from
-%% `seminar.sty', generated on <1993/10/8>. Fixes from David Carlisle
-%% and Denis Girou.
-%%
-%\def\fileversion{1.0}
-%\def\filedate{1993/04/01}
-\def\fileversion{1.4}
-\def\filedate{1997/10/13}
-%%
-%% LaTeX document style `seminar', for use with LaTeX v2.09.
-%% This is a style for typesetting notes and slides.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% Copying of part or all of any file in the seminar.sty package
-%% is allowed under the following conditions only:
-%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the files. Please
-%%     include the documentation when you do so.
-%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of any file, but only for personal
-%%     use or use within an organization.
-%% (3) You may copy fragments from the files, for personal use or for use
-%%     in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given
-%%     where credit is due.
-%%
-%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of
-%% these files or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for
-%% a nominal charge for copying etc.
-%%
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\ProvidesClass{seminar}[\filedate, \fileversion]
-\typeout{%
-  Document Style: `seminar' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz)}
-\def\test@member#1#2{%
-  \edef\@tempg{,#2,#1,}%
-  \edef\@temph{####1,#1,}%
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@temph\@temph##2\@nil{%
-    \def\@tempg{##2}%
-    \ifx\@tempg\@empty\@testfalse\else\@testtrue\fi}%
-  \expandafter\@temph\@tempg\@nil}
-\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}}
-\@ifundefined{reset@font}{\def\reset@font{\normalsize\rm}}{}
-\def\@seminarerr#1#2{%
-  \edef\@tempc{#2}\expandafter\errhelp\expandafter{\@tempc}%
-  \typeout{^^JSeminar.sty error.\space\space\space
-    Type \space H <return> \space for immediate help.^^J}%
-  \errmessage{#1^^J}}
-\def\notslide@err#1{\message{Cannot use \string#1 in slide environments}}
-\def\new@slidebox{\alloc@4\box\chardef\insc@unt}
-\newdimen\slidewidth \slidewidth 8.5in
-\newdimen\slideheight \slideheight 6.3in
-\paperwidth 8.5in
-\paperheight 11in
-\def\addto@preamblecmds#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}%
-    \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds\do#1}%
-  \endgroup}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\addto@preamblecmds\do\@preamblecmds}
-\def\sem@temp#1{\@ifundefined{if#1}%
-  {\def\@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname}
-  \expandafter\@tempa\csname if#1\endcsname}{}}
-\sem@temp{article}{}
-\sem@temp{slidesonly}{}
-\sem@temp{notes}{}
-\sem@temp{notesonly}{}
-\sem@temp{notesonlystar}{}
-\sem@temp{portrait}{}
-\DeclareOption{article}{\articletrue}
-\DeclareOption{noxcomment}{\def\xcomment@hook{}}
-\DeclareOption{slidesonly}{\slidesonlytrue\notesfalse\notesonlyfalse}
-\DeclareOption{notes}{\notestrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesonlyfalse}
-\DeclareOption{notesonly}{\notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse}
-\DeclareOption{notesonly*}{%
-  \notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse\notesonlystartrue}
-\DeclareOption{portrait}{\portraittrue}
-\DeclareOption{a4}{%
-  \paperwidth 210mm
-  \paperheight 297mm
-  \slidewidth 222mm
-  \slideheight 152mm\relax}
-\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\ds@a4}%
-\DeclareOption{semrot}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semrot.sty}}}
-\DeclareOption{semhelv}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semhelv.sty}}}
-\DeclareOption{semcolor}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semcolor.sty}}}
-\DeclareOption{semlcmss}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semlcmss.sty}}}
-\DeclareOption{slidesec}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{slidesec.sty}}}
-\DeclareOption{semlayer}{\AtEndOfClass{\input{semlayer.sty}}}
-\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
-\ProcessOptions
-\ifnotesonly\else\notesonlystarfalse\fi
-\newdimen\footheight  % seminar.sty v1.0 uses it, but its not in LaTeX2e.
-% Don't want these changed by article.cls:
-\let\sem@paperheight\paperheight
-\let\sem@paperwidth\paperwidth
-\let\paperheight\footheight
-\let\paperwidth\footheight
-\LoadClass{article}
-\renewcommand\normalsize{%
-   \@setfontsize\normalsize\@xpt\@xiipt
-   \abovedisplayskip 10\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus5\p@
-   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus3\p@
-   \belowdisplayshortskip 6\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus3\p@
-   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-   \let\@listi\@slide@listi}
-\let\paperheight\sem@paperheight
-\let\paperwidth\sem@paperwidth
-\RequirePackage{sem-page}
-\newtoks\before@document
-\newtoks\after@document
-\let\xcomment@hook\relax
-\before@document{\endgroup\the\before@document\begingroup}
-\after@document{\the\after@document\xcomment@hook}
-\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\document}
-\edef\document{\the\before@document\the\@temptokena\the\after@document}
-\before@document{}
-\after@document{}
-\newtoks\before@enddocument
-\before@enddocument{\the\before@enddocument}
-\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument}
-\edef\enddocument{\the\before@enddocument\the\@temptokena}
-\before@enddocument{}
-\newif\ifprintlandscape
-\ifportrait
-  \ifarticle\printlandscapetrue\fi
-\else
-  \ifarticle\else\printlandscapetrue\fi
-\fi
-\addto@hook\before@document{\ifprintlandscape\printlandscape\fi}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\printlandscape}
-\def\printlandscape{\addto@hook\before@enddocument{%
-  \typeout{^^J%
-  *******************************************************^^J%
-  ***** !! PRINT THIS DOCUMENT IN LANDSCAPE MODE !! *****^^J%
-  *******************************************************}}}
-\def\slide{%
-  \NestedSlide@Error{slide}%
-  \landscapetrue
-  \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}
-\def\endslide{\end@slide}
-\@namedef{slide*}{%
-  \NestedSlide@Error{slide*}%
-  \landscapefalse
-  \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}%
-\@namedef{endslide*}{\end@slide}
-\newcounter{slide}
-\def\theslide{\arabic{slide}}
-\newcount\slide@count
-\newbox\@slidebox
-\newbox\not@slidebox
-\newif\ifslide
-\newif\iflandscape
-\def\@landscapeonly{0}
-\def\landscapeonly{\def\@landscapeonly{1}}
-\def\portraitonly{\def\@landscapeonly{-1}}
-\def\NestedSlide@Error#1{%
-  \ifslide
-    \endgroup
-    \@seminarerr{Nested slide environments. Perhaps missing
-      \string\end{\@currenvir}. May be fatal}\@ehd
-    \expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}%
-    \ifslide\expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}\fi
-    \begingroup
-    \def\@currenvir{#1}%
-  \fi}
-\def\begin@slide[#1,#2]{%
-  \slide@clearpage
-  \setlength\slidewidth{#1}%
-  \setlength\slideheight{#2}%
-  \begingroup
-    \ifarticle
-      \output{%
-        \advance\count@ 1
-        \global\setbox\not@slidebox\box\@cclv}%
-      \par\@@par\penalty-\@M
-    \fi
-    \output{\slide@output}%
-    \slidetrue
-    \ifarticle\global\slide@count=\z@\fi
-    \refstepcounter{slide}%
-    \ifnotesonlystar\xdef\first@slidemarker{\the\c@slide}\fi
-    \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
-    \ifarticle\else
-      \edef\page@textheight{\number\textheight sp}%
-      \edef\page@textwidth{\number\textwidth sp}%
-    \fi
-    \set@slidesize
-    \slidebox@restore
-    \the\slide@hook
-    \the\before@newslide
-    \everyslide}
-\def\end@slide{%
-    \par\penalty-\@M
-    \xdef\@tempg{\@currenvir}%
-  \endgroup
-  \ifslide
-    \@seminarerr{Perhaps missing `\string\end{\@tempg}',
-      \iffalse{\fi`\string}' or `\string\endgroup'}\@ehd
-    \def\next{\endgroup\ifslide\expandafter\next\fi}%
-    \next
-  \fi
-  \begingroup
-    \output{\setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv}%
-    \@@par\penalty-\@M
-  \endgroup
-  \global\advance\c@slide-1
-  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}{\@nameuse{saved@c@##1}}}%
-  \slide@reset
-  \ifarticle\outputloop@savedslides\fi
-  \the\after@slide}
-\let\slideclearpagetrue\relax
-\let\slideclearpagefalse\relax
-\ifarticle
-  \def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}
-  \ifnotes
-    \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}}
-    \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}}
-  \else
-    \ifnotesonly
-      \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}}
-      \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}}
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\else
-  \def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}
-\fi
-\newtoks\slide@hook
-\def\everyslide{}
-\newtoks\after@slide
-\def\slidebox@restore{%
-  \def\thepage{\theslide}%
-  \def\newpage{\newslide}%
-  \def\clearpage{\newslide}%
-  \def\thispagestyle##1{\notslide@err{\thispagestyle}}%
-  \pagestyle{\slide@pagestyle}%
-  \@twocolumnfalse
-  \def\twocolumn{\notslide@err{\twocolumn}}%
-  \def\onecolumn{\notslide@err{\onecolumn}}%
-  \def\marginpar##1{\notslide@err{\marginpar}}%
-  \def\thanks{\slidethanks}%
-  \def\maketitle{\slidemaketitle}%
-  \fix@floats
-  \fix@whatsits
-  \slide@footnotes
-  \def\do##1{\expandafter\xdef\csname
-   saved@c@##1\endcsname{\the\@nameuse{c@##1}}}%
-  \slide@reset
-  \topskip\z@ \maxdepth\z@
-  \slide@listparameters
-  \slidefonts
-  \def\baselinestretch{\slidestretch}%
-  \def\arraystretch{\slidearraystretch}%
-  \sem@ptsize{\slide@ptsize}}
-\def\date#1{\gdef\@date{#1}\gdef\thedate{#1}}
-\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}\gdef\theauthor{#1}}
-\def\title#1{\gdef\@title{#1}\gdef\thetitle{#1}}
-\date{\today}
-\let\slidethanks\thanks
-\def\thethanks{\@thanks}%
-\def\slidemaketitle{%
-  \par
-  \begin{center}\bf
-    {\large \thetitle}\par\vskip 1ex
-    \begin{tabular}[t]{c} \theauthor \end{tabular}\par\vskip 1ex
-    \thedate
-  \end{center}%
-  \thethanks\par}
-\def\fix@floats{%
-  \def\@xfloat##1[##2]{%
-    \expandafter\let\csname end##1\endcsname\end@float
-    \par\medskip\vbox\bgroup\def\@captype{##1}\parindent\z@
-    \ignorespaces}%
-  \def\end@float{\par\vskip\z@\egroup\medskip}%
-  \def\@dblfloat{\@float}\def\end@dblfloat{\end@float}%
-  \def\endfigure{\end@float}\def\endtable{\end@float}}
-\let\normal@write\write
-\let\normal@read\read
-\let\normal@openout\openout
-\let\normal@closeout\closeout
-% changed as per DPC 1997/09/16
-\def\fix@whatsits{%
-  \long\def \protected@write##1##2##3{%
-      \begingroup
-       ##2%
-       \let\protect\noexpand
-       \immediate\normal@write##1{##3}%
-      \endgroup
-      \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}%
-}
-% end change
-\newinsert\slide@footins
-\skip\slide@footins=\bigskipamount
-\count\slide@footins=1000
-\dimen\slide@footins=4in
-\def\theslidefootnote{\alph{footnote}}
-\def\slide@footnotes{%
-  \def\thefootnote{\theslidefootnote}%
-  \let\footins\slide@footins
-  \interfootnotelinepenalty\@M}
-\def\slidefonts{}
-\def\slidestretch{1.18}
-\def\slidearraystretch{1.2}
-\def\raggedslides{\@ifnextchar[{\@raggedslides}{\@raggedslides[1fil]}}
-\def\@raggedslides[#1]{%
-  \edef\slide@@rightskip{#1}%
-  \ifslide\slide@rightskip\fi}
-\def\slide@rightskip{%
-  \@rightskip\z@ plus \slide@@rightskip\relax \rightskip\@rightskip}
-\def\slide@@rightskip{1fil}
-\newcount\slide@listdepth
-\def\slide@listparameters{%
-  \let\@listdepth\slide@listdepth
-  \slide@listdepth\z@
-  \def\@listi{\slide@listi}%
-  \def\@listii{\slide@listii}%
-  \def\@listiii{\slide@listiii}%
-  \let\@listiv\relax\let\@listv\relax\let\@listvi\relax}
-\def\slide@listi{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmargini
-  \labelwidth\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \parsep\parskip \divide\parsep2
-  \partopsep\slidepartopsep\relax
-  \advance\partopsep-\parskip
-  \ifdim\partopsep<\z@\partopsep\z@\fi
-  \itemsep\slideitemsep\relax
-  \ifdim\parsep<\itemsep
-    \topsep\itemsep \advance\topsep-\parsep
-  \else
-    \itemsep\parsep \topsep\z@
-  \fi}
-\def\slide@listii{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \divide\itemsep2 \divide\parsep2
-  \divide\topsep2 \divide\partopsep2\relax}%
-\def\slide@listiii{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \itemsep \z@ \parsep\z@ \topsep\z@}%
-\def\slideleftmargini{1.8em}
-\def\slideleftmarginii{1.4em}
-\def\slideleftmarginiii{1em}
-\def\slidelabelsep{.5em}
-\def\slideitemsep{.8ex minus .2ex}
-\def\slidepartopsep{1ex minus .2ex}
-\newbox\saved@specials
-\def\save@slidespecials{%
-  \begingroup
-    \output{%
-      \global\setbox\saved@specials=\box\@cclv
-      \global\wd\saved@specials=\z@
-      \global\dp\saved@specials=\z@
-      \global\ht\saved@specials=\z@}%
-    \hbox{}\penalty-\@M
-    \global\let\saved@texttop\@texttop
-    \gdef\@texttop{%
-      \ifvoid\saved@specials\else\box\saved@specials\nointerlineskip\fi
-      \saved@texttop
-      \global\let\@texttop\saved@texttop}%
-  \endgroup}
-\addto@hook\after@document{\save@slidespecials}
-\ifarticle\else
-  \def\insert@specials{%
-    \ifvoid\saved@specials\else
-      \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\box\saved@specials\box\@slidebox}%
-    \fi
-    \global\let\insert@specials\relax}
-\fi
-\def\extraslideheight#1{%
-  \@tempdima #1\relax
-  \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp}
-  \ifslide\set@slidesize\fi}
-\extraslideheight{6pt}
-\def\set@slidesize{%
-  \iflandscape
-    \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
-    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
-  \else
-    \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
-    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
-  \fi
-  \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}%
-  \textheight\vsize
-  \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax
-  \textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\hsize\linewidth\hsize}
-\def\newslide{%
-  \par\penalty-\@M
-  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
-  \the\before@newslide
-  \set@slidesize}
-\newtoks\before@newslide
-\def\slide@reset{\do{footnote}}
-\def\slidereset#1{\def\slide@reset{}\addtoslidereset{#1}}
-\def\addtoslidereset#1{%
-  \edef\@tempa{#1}\expandafter\addto@slidereset\@tempa,\@nil,}
-\def\addto@slidereset#1,{%
-  \ifx\@nil#1\else
-    \@ifundefined{c@#1}%
-      {\@seminarerr{Counter `#1' not defined}\@ehd}%
-      {\expandafter\def\expandafter\slide@reset\expandafter{%
-        \slide@reset\do{#1}}}%
-    \expandafter\addto@slidereset
-  \fi}
-\def\slide@output{%
-  \@makeslide
-  \@testfalse
-  \ifnotesonly\else
-    \iflandscape
-      \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi
-    \else
-      \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \if@test
-    \reset@slideoutput
-    \@@makeslide
-    \process@slide
-  \fi
-  \refstepcounter{slide}}
-\def\reset@slideoutput{%
-  \let\par\@@par
-  \reset@font
-  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
-  \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}%
-  \catcode`\ =10
-  \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii}
-\newif\ifcenterslides
-\centerslidestrue
-\providecommand\@begindvi{} % added 1997/04/15 SPQR, to cope with very
-                            % old LaTeXs
-\def\@makeslide{%
-  \setbox\@slidebox\vbox{%
-    \@begindvi % added 1997/04/15 SPQR
-    \unvbox\@cclv
-    \ifvoid\slide@footins\else
-      \vskip\skip\slide@footins
-      \footnoterule
-      \unvbox\slide@footins
-    \fi
-    \vskip\z@}}
-\def\@@makeslide{%
-  \overfullslide@warning
-  \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{%
-    \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax
-    \vbox to\slide@vsize{%
-    \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi
-    \unvbox\@slidebox
-    \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}%
-    \the\after@slidepage}%
-  \wd\@slidebox\textwidth}
-\def\overfullslide@warning{%
-  \dimen@\ht\@slidebox
-  \advance\dimen@-\slide@vsize\relax
-  \ifdim\dimen@>\slidefuzz\relax
-    \@warning{Slide \theslide\space overfull by \the\dimen@}%
-  \fi}
-\def\slidefuzz{2pt}
-\newtoks\after@slidepage
-\newif\ifrotateheaders
-\def\sliderotation#1{\@ifundefined{semsr@#1}%
-  {\@latexerr{Slide rotation `#1' not defined.}\@eha}%
-  {\@nameuse{semsr@#1}}}
-\def\semsr@left{%
-  \def\rotate@slide{%
-    \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\leftsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}}
-\def\semsr@right{%
-  \def\rotate@slide{%
-    \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\rightsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}}
-\def\semsr@none{\let\rotate@slide\relax}
-\sliderotation{none}
-\def\leftsliderotation#1{%
-  \@seminarerr{\string\leftsliderotation\space has not been defined}%
-  \@ehd}
-\let\rightsliderotation\leftsliderotation
-\def\@ifrotateslide#1{%
-  \ifx\rotate@slide\relax\else
-    \iflandscape\ifportrait#1\fi\else\ifportrait\else#1\fi\fi
-  \fi}
-\def\process@slide{%
-  \slideframewidth=\inverseslidesmag\slideframewidth
-  \slideframesep=\inverseslidesmag\slideframesep
-  \fboxrule\slideframewidth
-  \fboxsep\slideframesep
-  \ifarticle
-    \@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide
-  \else
-    \ifrotateheaders\else\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
-  \fi
-  \process@@slide}
-\def\process@@slide{\finish@slide\output@slide}
-\def\finish@slide{%
-  \theslideframe
-  \add@slidelabel\slidelabel}
-\ifarticle
-  \def\output@slide{%
-    \global\advance\slide@count1
-    \@ifundefined{slidebox@\the\slide@count}%
-      {{\globaldefs=1\expandafter
-        \new@slidebox\csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname}}{}%
-    \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname
-      slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname\box\@slidebox}
-\else
-  \def\output@slide{%
-    \begingroup
-      \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
-      \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
-      \setslidelength\@tempdima{%
-        \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}
-      \setslidelength\@tempdimb{%
-        \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}
-      \ifrotateheaders
-        \@ifrotateslide{%
-          \dimen@=\@tempdima
-          \@tempdima=\@tempdimb
-          \@tempdimb=\dimen@}
-      \fi
-      % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight
-      % used for scratch:
-      \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin
-      \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin
-      \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin
-      \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin
-      % Some page styles like to know \textwidth:
-      \textwidth=\@tempdima
-      \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin
-      \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin
-      \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{%
-        \kern\oddsidemargin
-        \vbox to\@tempdimb{%
-          \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1
-            \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}%
-          \fi
-          \let\label\@gobble
-          \let\index\@gobble
-          \let\glossary\@gobble
-          \vbox to\headheight{%
-            \vfill
-            \hbox{%
-              \slideheadfont\relax\strut
-              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}%
-            \kern\z@}%
-          \vfill
-          \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}%
-          \vfill
-          \vbox to\footheight{%
-            \hbox{%
-              \slidefootfont\relax\strut
-              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}%
-            \vfill}}%
-        \hss}%
-      \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
-      \insert@specials
-      \shipout\box\@slidebox
-    \endgroup
-    \let\firstmark\botmark}
-  \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{}
-\fi
-\newskip\slidesep
-\slidesep\intextsep
-\ifarticle
-  \def\fps@fslide{htbp}
-  \def\ftype@fslide{32}
-  \def\float@savedslide{%
-    \begingroup\@float{fslide}%
-      \centerline{\box\@slidebox}%
-    \end@float\endgroup}%
-  \@namedef{float*@savedslide}{%
-    \begingroup\@dblfloat{fslide}%
-      \centerline{\box\@slidebox}%
-    \end@dblfloat\endgroup}%
-  \def\center@slide{\hbox{%
-    \kern-\@totalleftmargin
-    \hbox to \columnwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}}}%
-  \def\onepercol@savedslide{%
-    \vbox to .996\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak}%
-  \def\twopercol@savedslide{%
-    \dimen@.5\textheight
-    \advance\dimen@-\slidesep
-    \ifdim\ht\@slidebox>\dimen@
-      \onepercol@savedslide
-    \else
-      \vbox to .498\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak
-    \fi}
-  \def\here@savedslide{%
-    \addvspace\slidesep\center@slide\addvspace\slidesep}
-  \@namedef{here*@savedslide}{%
-    \goodbreak \hrule \@height\z@ \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak
-    \center@slide
-    \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak \hrule\@height\z@ \goodbreak}
-\fi
-\ifarticle
-  \def\slideplacement#1{\@ifundefined{#1@savedslide}%
-    {\@seminarerr{Slide placement `#1' undefined}\@ehd}%
-    {\expandafter\let\expandafter\output@savedslide
-      \csname #1@savedslide\endcsname}}
-\else
-  \def\slideplacement#1{}
-\fi
-\ifarticle
-  \ifnotes
-    \ifportrait
-      \slideplacement{float}
-    \else
-      \slideplacement{float*}
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \ifportrait
-      \slideplacement{onepercol}
-    \else
-      \slideplacement{twopercol}
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-\ifarticle
-  \def\outputloop@savedslides{%
-    \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth
-    \ifvoid\not@slidebox\else
-      \dimen@=\dp\not@slidebox
-      \unvbox\not@slidebox
-      \hrule height\z@
-      \prevdepth\dimen@
-      \penalty\z@
-    \fi
-    \edef\slide@@count{\the\slide@count\relax}%
-    \slide@count\z@
-    \loop
-    \ifnum\slide@count<\slide@@count
-      \advance\slide@count1
-      \expandafter\setbox\expandafter\@slidebox\expandafter\box
-        \csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname
-      \output@savedslide
-    \repeat
-    \ifnotesonlystar\make@slidemarker\fi}
-\fi
-\def\make@slidemarker{%
-  \addvspace\slidesep
-  \moveleft\@totalleftmargin
-  \vbox{%
-    \hsize\columnwidth
-    \hrule height 1pt
-    \kern 8pt
-    \hbox to \columnwidth{%
-      \hss
-      \LARGE\bf\the@slidemarker
-      \hss}%
-    \kern 8pt
-    \hrule height 1pt}%
-  \addvspace\slidesep}
-\def\the@slidemarker{%
-  Slide%
-  \ifnum\c@slide=\first@slidemarker\else
-    s {\c@slide\first@slidemarker\relax\theslide} --\fi
-  { }\theslide}%
-\ifarticle
-  \let\c@note\c@page
-  \def\p@note{\p@page}
-  \def\thenote{\thepage}
-\else
-  \newcounter{note}
-  \def\thenote{\theslide-\arabic{note}}
-  \def\thepage{\thenote}
-  \addto@hook\after@slide{\setcounter{note}{1}}
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@outputpage\expandafter{%
-    \@outputpage\stepcounter{note}}
-\fi
-\ifarticle\else
-  \let\c@page\c@slide
-  \countdef\c@slide=0
-  \c@slide=0
-  \c@page=1
-\fi
-\ifarticle
-  \let\truepagenumbers\relax
-\else
-  \def\truepagenumbers{%
-    \let\c@slide\c@page
-    \countdef\c@page=0
-    \c@page=1
-    \c@slide=0
-    \let\truepagenumbers\relax}
-\fi
-\addto@preamblecmds{\truepagenumbers}
-\newdimen\slideframewidth \slideframewidth 4pt
-\newdimen\slideframesep \slideframesep .3in
-\def\newslideframe#1{%
-  \@ifnextchar[{\@newslideframe{#1}}{\@newslideframe{#1}[]}}
-\def\@newslideframe#1[#2]{%
-  \@namedef{semsfops@#1}{#2}%
-  \@namedef{semsf@#1}##1}
-\newslideframe{plain}{\fbox{#1}}
-\def\slideframe{\@slideframe{slide}}
-\def\@slideframe#1{%
-  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@@slideframe{#1}}{\@testfalse\@@slideframe{#1}}}
-\def\@@slideframe#1{%
-  \@ifnextchar[{\@@@slideframe{#1}}{\@@@slideframe{#1}[]}}
-\def\@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{%
-  \def\@tempa{none}%
-  \def\@tempb{#3}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-    \@namedef{the#1frame}{\relax}%
-  \else
-    \ifx\@tempb\@empty
-      \@namedef{the#1frame}{}%
-    \else
-      \@ifundefined{semsf@#3}%
-        {\@seminarerr{Slide frame `#3' undefined}\@eha}%
-        {\if@test
-          \@@@@slideframe{#1}[#2]{#3}%
-        \else
-          \@namedef{the#1frame}{\setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{%
-            \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}#2\@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}%
-        \fi}%
-     \fi
-   \fi}
-\def\@@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname the#1frame\endcsname
-  \edef\next{%
-    \noexpand\def\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1frame\endcsname}%
-  \expandafter\next\expandafter{\@tempa
-    \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{%
-      \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}%
-      #2%
-      \@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}}%
-\slideframe{plain}
-\def\slidestyle#1{\@ifundefined{ss@#1}%
-  {\@seminarerr{Slide style `#1' undefined}\@eha}%
-  {\@nameuse{ss@#1}}}
-\def\ss@empty{\let\add@slidelabel\@gobble}
-\def\ss@left{\def\add@slidelabel##1{%
-  \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{%
-    \vbox to \ht\@slidebox{\vss
-    \hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 15pt}%
-    \vss}\box\@slidebox}}}
-\def\ss@bottom{\def\add@slidelabel##1{%
-  \setbox\@slidebox=\vbox{\copy\@slidebox\vskip 9pt
-    \hbox to\wd\@slidebox{\hss##1\hss}}}}%
-\ifarticle
-  \ifportrait\slidestyle{bottom}\else\slidestyle{left}\fi
-\else
-  \slidestyle{empty}
-\fi
-\def\slidelabel{\bf Slide \theslide}
-\def\newpagestyle#1#2#3{%
-  \expandafter\newcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{%
-    \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-    \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}}
-\def\renewpagestyle#1#2#3{%
-  \expandafter\renewcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{%
-    \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-    \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}}
-\def\@ifgoodps#1{%
-  \@ifundefined{ps@#1}{\@seminarerr{Page style `#1' undefined}\@eha}}
-\def\slidepagestyle#1{%
-  \@ifgoodps{#1}%
-    {\ifslide\pagestyle{#1}\else\edef\slide@pagestyle{#1}\fi}}
-\def\ps@{}
-\slidepagestyle{}
-\ifarticle
-  \def\ps@align{}
-\else
-  \def\ps@align{%
-    \def\@oddhead{\thepage\hfil+}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-    \def\@oddfoot{+\hfil+}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
-\fi
-\def\slideheadfont{\scriptsize}
-\def\slidefootfont{\scriptsize}
-\def\magstep#1{\ifcase#1 \@m\or 1200\or 1440\or 1728\or
-  2074\or 2488\or 2986\or 3583\or 4300\or 5160\fi\relax}
-\def\magstepminus#1{%
-  \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax}
-\def\@magstep#1{%
-  \ifnum#1<\z@\magstepminus{-#1}\else\magstep#1\fi}
-{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12
-  \gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}}
-\def\invert@mag#1{\@tempdima=1000pt
-  \divide\@tempdima by #1\relax
-  \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@tempdima#1}
-\def\@slidesmag#1{%
-  \@tempcnta=#1\relax%
-  \ifnum\@tempcnta>0
-    \edef\inverseslidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
-    \invert@mag\inverseslidesmag
-    \ifarticle\else\mag\@tempcnta\fi
-  \else
-    \@seminarerr{\string\@slidesmag\space argument must be an
-      integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha
-  \fi}
-\def\@articlemag#1{%
-  \@tempcnta=#1\relax%
-  \ifnum\@tempcnta>0
-    \edef\inverseartmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
-    \invert@mag\inverseartmag
-    \ifarticle\mag\@tempcnta\fi
-  \else
-    \@seminarerr{\string\articlemag\space argument must be an
-      integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha
-  \fi}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\@slidesmag\do\@articlemag}
-\newdimen\semin
-\newdimen\semcm
-\def\@semmagerr#1{%
-  \@seminarerr{\string#1 argument must be an integer
-    between -5 and 9}\@eha}
-\def\slidesmag#1{%
-  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
-  \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6
-    \ifnum\@tempcnta<10
-      \edef\the@slidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
-      \@slidesmag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}%
-    \else
-      \@semmagerr\slidesmag
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \@semmagerr\slidesmag
-  \fi
-  \setslidelength\semin\seminlength
-  \setslidelength\semcm\semcmlength}
-\def\seminlength{1in}
-\def\semcmlength{1cm}
-\def\articlemag#1{%
-  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
-  \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6
-    \ifnum\@tempcnta<10
-      \edef\the@articlemag{\the\@tempcnta}%
-      \@articlemag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}%
-    \else
-      \@semmagerr\articlemag
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \@semmagerr\articlemag
-  \fi}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\slidesmag\do\articlemag}
-\def\setslidelength#1#2{%
-  #1=#2\relax
-  #1=\inverseslidesmag#1}%
-\def\addtoslidelength#1#2{%
-  \dimen@=#2\relax
-  \advance#1 by \inverseslidesmag\dimen@}
-\def\setartlength#1#2{%
-  #1=#2\relax
-  #1=\inverseartmag#1}
-\def\addtoartlength#1#2{%
-  \dimen@=#2\relax
-  \advance#1 by \inverseartmag\dimen@}
-\def\slide@epsfsize#1#2{%
-  \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt
-    \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt
-      \inverseslidesmag#1%
-    \else
-      0pt
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \inverseslidesmag\epsfxsize
-  \fi
-  \epsfysize
-  \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt
-    \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt
-      \inverseslidesmag#2%
-    \else
-      0pt
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \inverseslidesmag\epsfysize
-  \fi}
-\def\epsfslidesize{\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize}
-\slidesmag{4}
-\articlemag{0}
-\def\do@pageparameters{%
-  \do\oddsidemargin
-  \do\evensidemargin
-  \do\marginparwidth
-  \do\marginparsep
-  \do\topmargin
-  \do\headheight
-  \do\headsep
-  \do\textheight
-  \do\textwidth
-  \do\topskip
-  \do\footskip
-  \do\footheight}
-\ifarticle
-  \def\scale@pageparameters{%
-    \begingroup
-      \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseartmag##1\relax}%
-      \do@pageparameters
-    \endgroup}
-\else
-  \def\scale@pageparameters{%
-    \begingroup
-      \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseslidesmag##1\relax}%
-      \do@pageparameters
-    \endgroup}
-\fi
-\addto@hook\before@document{\scale@pageparameters}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\scale@pageparameters\do\do@pageparameters}
-\def\allversions{}
-\let\endallversions\relax
-\@namedef{allversions*}{\@bsphack\globaldefs=1}
-\@namedef{endallversions*}{\@esphack}
-\def\slide@list{slide,slide*,allversions,allversions*}
-\def\addtoslidelist#1{\xdef\slide@list{\slide@list,#1}}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\addtoslidelist}
-\ifslidesonly
-  \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{\@@input xcomment.sty }{}
-  \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}
-  \newxcomment[]{note}
-\else
-  \def\note{\@bsphack}%
-  \def\endnote{\@esphack}%
-\fi
-\def\noxcomment{\def\xcomment@hook{}}
-\def\os@list{}
-\newif\if@os
-\def\onlyslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@ostrue
-  \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\onlyslides\space argument
-    contains undefined references}}}
-\def\notslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@osfalse
-  \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\notslides\space argument
-    contains undefined references}}}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\onlyslides\do\notslides}
-\addto@hook\after@document{%
-  \ifx\os@list\@empty\else\os@expandlist\fi}
-\def\os@expandlist{%
-  \let\os@@warning\relax
-  \begingroup
-    \def\ref##1{\@ifundefined{r@##1}{?}%
-      {\noexpand\@car\@nameuse{r@##1}\noexpand\@nil}}%
-    \edef\@tempd{\os@list}%
-    \xdef\os@list{}%
-    \@for\@tempc:=\@tempd
-      \do{\expandafter\os@expandrange\@tempc-:-:\@nil}%
-    \os@@warning
-  \endgroup
-  \let\os@expandrange\relax
-  \let\os@checknum\relax
-  \let\os@expandlist\relax}
-\def\os@expandrange#1-#2-#3\@nil{%
-  \def\@tempa{?}\def\@tempb{#1}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-    \let\os@@warning\os@warning
-  \else
-    \@tempcnta=#1\relax
-    \def\@tempb{#2}%
-    \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-      \let\os@@warning\os@warning
-    \else
-      \def\@tempa{:}%
-      \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-        \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \else
-        \@tempcntb=#2\relax
-      \fi
-      \advance\@tempcnta by -1
-      \advance\@tempcntb by 1
-      \ifx\os@list\@empty
-        \xdef\os@list{\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}%
-      \else
-        \xdef\os@list{\os@list,\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi}
-\def\os@test{%
-  \@testtrue
-  \iflandscape
-    \ifnum\@landscapeonly=-1 \@testfalse\fi
-  \else
-    \ifnum\@landscapeonly=1 \@testfalse\fi
-  \fi
-  \if@test
-    \ifx\os@list\@empty\else
-      \if@os\@testfalse\fi
-      \@for\@tempa:=\os@list\do{\expandafter\os@testrange\@tempa\@nil}%
-    \fi
-  \fi}
-\def\os@testrange#1+#2\@nil{%
-  \ifnum\c@slide>#1
-    \ifnum\c@slide<#2
-      \if@os\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi
-    \fi
-  \fi}
-\def\onlynotestoo{%
-  \ifnotes\@testtrue\else\ifnotesonly\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi\fi
-  \if@test
-    \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{%
-      \edef\sem@temp{\the\catcode`\@}%
-      \catcode`\@=11
-      \@@input xcomment.sty
-      \catcode`\@=\sem@temp\relax}{}%
-    \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}%
-    \addto@hook\after@slide\onlynotes@too
-  \fi}
-\def\onlynotes@too{%
-  \os@test
-  \if@test\gdef\do@end{}\else\gdef\do@end{\xc@begin}\fi}
-\addto@preamblecmds\onlynotestoo
-\def\ptsize#1{%
-  \@ifundefined{#1@semptsize}%
-    {\@seminarerr{\string\ptsize\space `#1' not valid.}\@eha}%
-    {\ifslide
-      \sem@ptsize{#1}\large\normalsize
-    \else
-      \edef\slide@ptsize{#1}%
-    \fi}}
-\edef\slide@ptsize{1\@ptsize}%
-\def\slidefontsizes{\ptsize} %For backwards compatibility??
-\def\slide@setsize#1#2#3#4{%
-  \@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-  \set@slideskip{#2}}
-\def\slide@@setsize#1#2#3#4{%
-  \slide@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\slidedisplayskips}
-\def\set@slideskip#1{%
-  \normallineskiplimit=#1
-  \advance\normallineskiplimit-\normalbaselineskip
-  \multiply\normallineskiplimit-1
-  \normallineskiplimit\slideskip\normallineskiplimit
-  \ifdim\normallineskiplimit<1pt\normallineskiplimit=1pt\fi
-  \normallineskip=\normallineskiplimit
-    minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit
-  \dimen@=\normalbaselineskip
-  \normalbaselineskip=\dimen@ minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit
-  \normalbaselines}
-\def\slideskip{.75}
-\def\slideshrink{.25}
-\def\slidedisplayskips{%
-  \abovedisplayskip 1.75ex minus .35ex
-  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-  \abovedisplayshortskip .2ex minus .2ex
-  \belowdisplayshortskip 1ex minus .2ex}
-\def\sem@ptsize#1{%
-  \@nameuse{#1@semptsize}%
-  \large\normalsize
-  \leftmargini\slideleftmargini\relax
-  \leftmarginii\slideleftmarginii\relax
-  \leftmarginiii\slideleftmarginiii\relax
-  \labelsep\slidelabelsep\relax
-  \parskip\slideparskip\relax
-  \parindent\slideparindent\relax
-  \slide@rightskip
-  \slide@listi
-  \skip\footins\slidefootins\relax
-  \footnotesep\slidefootnotesep\relax}
-\def\slidefootins{2ex minus .8ex}
-\def\slidefootnotesep{1.2ex}
-\def\slideparindent{\z@}
-\def\slideparskip{1ex minus .2ex}
-\@namedef{8@semptsize}{%
-  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}}
-\@namedef{9@semptsize}{%
-  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}}
-\@namedef{10@semptsize}{%
-  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}}
-\@namedef{11@semptsize}{%
-  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}}
-\@namedef{12@semptsize}{%
-  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
-  \let\Huge\huge}
-\@namedef{14@semptsize}{%
-  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
-  \let\huge\LARGE
-  \let\Huge\LARGE}
-\@namedef{17@semptsize}{%
-  \def\normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
-  \let\LARGE\Large
-  \let\huge\Large
-  \let\Huge\Large}
-\def\twoup{\@ifnextchar[{\@twoup}{\@twoup[0]}}
-\ifarticle
-  \ifportrait
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \targetlayout{topbottom}%
-        \printlandscapefalse
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}}
-  \else
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \if@twoside
-          \targetlayout{twosided}%
-        \fi
-        \printlandscapetrue
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}}
-  \fi
-\else
-  \ifportrait
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \advance\@tempcnta by -3
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \printlandscapetrue
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}}
-  \else
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \targetlayout{topbottom}%
-        \printlandscapefalse
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmargerr\slidesmag}}%
-  \fi
-\fi
-\def\@semtwoupmagerr#1{%
-  \@seminarerr{\string#1 must come before \string\twoup}\@eha}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\twoup\do\@twoup}
-\openin1 seminar.con
-\ifeof1\else\closein1 \relax\@@input seminar.con\fi
-\endinput
-%%
-%% END `seminar.cls'.
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 4b92372424a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1172 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN seminar.sty
-%%
-%% This is file `seminar.sty', generated
-%% on <1993/4/2> with the docstrip utility (2.0r).
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% seminar.doc
-%%
-\def\fileversion{1.0}
-\def\filedate{93/04/01}
-%%
-%% LaTeX document style `seminar', for use with LaTeX v2.09.
-%% This is a style for typesetting notes and slides.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% Copying of part or all of any file in the seminar.sty package
-%% is allowed under the following conditions only:
-%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the files. Please
-%%     include the documentation when you do so.
-%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of any file, but only for personal
-%%     use or use within an organization.
-%% (3) You may copy fragments from the files, for personal use or for use
-%%     in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given
-%%     where credit is due.
-%%
-%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of
-%% these files or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for
-%% a nominal charge for copying etc.
-%%
-\@ifundefined{@seminarerr}{}{\endinput}
-\typeout{%
-  Document Style: `seminar' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz)}
-\def\test@member#1#2{%
-  \edef\@tempg{,#2,#1,}%
-  \edef\@temph{####1,#1,}%
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@temph\@temph##2\@nil{%
-    \def\@tempg{##2}%
-    \ifx\@tempg\@empty\@testfalse\else\@testtrue\fi}%
-  \expandafter\@temph\@tempg\@nil}
-\def\addto@hook#1#2{#1\expandafter{\the#1#2}}
-\@ifundefined{reset@font}{\def\reset@font{\normalsize\rm}}{}
-\def\@seminarerr#1#2{%
-  \edef\@tempc{#2}\expandafter\errhelp\expandafter{\@tempc}%
-  \typeout{^^JSeminar.sty error.\space\space\space
-    Type \space H <return> \space for immediate help.^^J}%
-  \errmessage{#1^^J}}
-\def\notslide@err#1{Cannot use \string#1 in slide environments}
-\def\new@slidebox{\alloc@4\box\chardef\insc@unt}
-\newdimen\slidewidth \slidewidth 8.5in
-\newdimen\slideheight \slideheight 6.3in
-\@ifundefined{paperwidth}{\def\paperwidth{8.5in}}{}
-\@ifundefined{paperheight}{\def\paperheight{11in}}{}
-\def\addto@preamblecmds#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}%
-    \xdef\@preamblecmds{\@preamblecmds\do#1}%
-  \endgroup}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\addto@preamblecmds\do\@preamblecmds}
-\def\sem@temp#1{\@ifundefined{if#1}%
-  {\def\@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname}
-  \expandafter\@tempa\csname if#1\endcsname}{}}
-\sem@temp{article}{}
-\sem@temp{slidesonly}{}
-\sem@temp{notes}{}
-\sem@temp{notesonly}{}
-\sem@temp{notesonlystar}{}
-\sem@temp{portrait}{}
-\def\ds@article{\articletrue}
-\def\ds@slidesonly{\slidesonlytrue\notesfalse\notesonlyfalse}
-\def\ds@notes{\notestrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesonlyfalse}
-\def\ds@notesonly{\notesonlytrue\slidesonlyfalse\notesfalse}
-\@namedef{ds@notesonly*}{\ds@notesonly\notesonlystartrue}
-\def\ds@portrait{\portraittrue}
-\@namedef{ds@a4}{%
-  \def\paperwidth{210mm}
-  \def\paperheight{297mm}
-  \slidewidth 222mm
-  \slideheight 152mm\relax}
-\@@input article.sty
-\ifnotesonly\else\notesonlystarfalse\fi
-\@@input sem-page.sty
-\newtoks\before@document
-\newtoks\after@document
-\let\xcomment@hook\relax
-\before@document{\endgroup\the\before@document\begingroup}
-\after@document{\the\after@document\xcomment@hook}
-\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\document}
-\edef\document{\the\before@document\the\@temptokena\the\after@document}
-\before@document{}
-\after@document{}
-\newtoks\before@enddocument
-\before@enddocument{\the\before@enddocument}
-\expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\enddocument}
-\edef\enddocument{\the\before@enddocument\the\@temptokena}
-\before@enddocument{}
-\newif\ifprintlandscape
-\ifportrait
-  \ifarticle\printlandscapetrue\fi
-\else
-  \ifarticle\else\printlandscapetrue\fi
-\fi
-\addto@hook\before@document{\ifprintlandscape\printlandscape\fi}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\printlandscape}
-\def\printlandscape{\addto@hook\before@enddocument{%
-  \typeout{^^J%
-  *******************************************************^^J%
-  ***** !! PRINT THIS DOCUMENT IN LANDSCAPE MODE !! *****^^J%
-  *******************************************************}}}
-\def\slide{%
-  \NestedSlide@Error{slide}%
-  \landscapetrue
-  \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}
-\def\endslide{\end@slide}
-\@namedef{slide*}{%
-  \NestedSlide@Error{slide*}%
-  \landscapefalse
-  \@ifnextchar[{\begin@slide}{\begin@slide[\slidewidth,\slideheight]}}%
-\@namedef{endslide*}{\end@slide}
-\newcounter{slide}
-\def\theslide{\arabic{slide}}
-\newcount\slide@count
-\newbox\@slidebox
-\newbox\not@slidebox
-\newif\ifslide
-\newif\iflandscape
-\def\@landscapeonly{0}
-\def\landscapeonly{\def\@landscapeonly{1}}
-\def\portraitonly{\def\@landscapeonly{-1}}
-\def\NestedSlide@Error#1{%
-  \ifslide
-    \endgroup
-    \@seminarerr{Nested slide environments. Perhaps missing
-      \string\end{\@currenvir}. May be fatal}\@ehd
-    \expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}%
-    \ifslide\expandafter\end\expandafter{\@currenvir}\fi
-    \begingroup
-    \def\@currenvir{#1}%
-  \fi}
-\def\begin@slide[#1,#2]{%
-  \slide@clearpage
-  \setlength\slidewidth{#1}%
-  \setlength\slideheight{#2}%
-  \begingroup
-    \ifarticle
-      \output{%
-        \advance\count@ 1
-        \global\setbox\not@slidebox\box\@cclv}%
-      \par\@@par\penalty-\@M
-    \fi
-    \output{\slide@output}%
-    \slidetrue
-    \ifarticle\global\slide@count=\z@\fi
-    \refstepcounter{slide}%
-    \ifnotesonlystar\xdef\first@slidemarker{\the\c@slide}\fi
-    \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
-    \ifarticle\else
-      \edef\page@textheight{\number\textheight sp}%
-      \edef\page@textwidth{\number\textwidth sp}%
-    \fi
-    \set@slidesize
-    \slidebox@restore
-    \the\slide@hook
-    \the\before@newslide
-    \everyslide}
-\def\end@slide{%
-    \par\penalty-\@M
-    \xdef\@tempg{\@currenvir}%
-  \endgroup
-  \ifslide
-    \@seminarerr{Perhaps missing `\string\end{\@tempg}',
-      \iffalse{\fi`\string}' or `\string\endgroup'}\@ehd
-    \def\next{\endgroup\ifslide\expandafter\next\fi}%
-    \next
-  \fi
-  \begingroup
-    \output{\setbox\@tempboxa\box\@cclv}%
-    \@@par\penalty-\@M
-  \endgroup
-  \global\advance\c@slide-1
-  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}{\@nameuse{saved@c@##1}}}%
-  \slide@reset
-  \ifarticle\outputloop@savedslides\fi
-  \the\after@slide}
-\let\slideclearpagetrue\relax
-\let\slideclearpagefalse\relax
-\ifarticle
-  \def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}
-  \ifnotes
-    \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}}
-    \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}}
-  \else
-    \ifnotesonly
-      \def\slideclearpagetrue{\def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}}
-      \def\slideclearpagefalse{\def\slide@clearpage{\par\penalty\z@}}
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\else
-  \def\slide@clearpage{\clearpage}
-\fi
-\newtoks\slide@hook
-\def\everyslide{}
-\newtoks\after@slide
-\def\slidebox@restore{%
-  \def\thepage{\theslide}%
-  \def\newpage{\newslide}%
-  \def\clearpage{\newslide}%
-  \def\thispagestyle{\notslide@err{\thispagestyle}}%
-  \pagestyle{\slide@pagestyle}%
-  \@twocolumnfalse
-  \def\twocolumn{\notslide@err{\twocolumn}}%
-  \def\onecolumn{\notslide@err{\onecolumn}}%
-  \def\marginpar{\notslide@err{\marginpar}}%
-  \def\thanks{\slidethanks}%
-  \def\maketitle{\slidemaketitle}%
-  \fix@floats
-  \fix@whatsits
-  \slide@footnotes
-  \def\do##1{\expandafter\xdef\csname
-   saved@c@##1\endcsname{\the\@nameuse{c@##1}}}%
-  \slide@reset
-  \topskip\z@ \maxdepth\z@
-  \slide@listparameters
-  \slidefonts
-  \def\baselinestretch{\slidestretch}%
-  \def\arraystretch{\slidearraystretch}%
-  \sem@ptsize{\slide@ptsize}}
-\def\date#1{\gdef\@date{#1}\gdef\thedate{#1}}
-\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}\gdef\theauthor{#1}}
-\def\title#1{\gdef\@title{#1}\gdef\thetitle{#1}}
-\date{\today}
-\let\slidethanks\thanks
-\def\thethanks{\@thanks}%
-\def\slidemaketitle{%
-  \par
-  \begin{center}\bf
-    {\large \thetitle}\par\vskip 1ex
-    \begin{tabular}[t]{c} \theauthor \end{tabular}\par\vskip 1ex
-    \thedate
-  \end{center}%
-  \thethanks\par}
-\def\fix@floats{%
-  \def\@xfloat##1[##2]{%
-    \expandafter\let\csname end##1\endcsname\end@float
-    \par\medskip\vbox\bgroup\def\@captype{##1}\parindent\z@
-    \ignorespaces}%
-  \def\end@float{\par\vskip\z@\egroup\medskip}%
-  \def\@dblfloat{\@float}\def\end@dblfloat{\end@float}%
-  \def\endfigure{\end@float}\def\endtable{\end@float}}
-\let\normal@write\write
-\let\normal@read\read
-\let\normal@openout\openout
-\let\normal@closeout\closeout
-\def\fix@whatsits{%
-  \def\write{\immediate\normal@write}%
-  \def\read{\immediate\normal@read}%
-  \def\openout{\immediate\normal@openout}%
-  \def\closeout{\immediate\normal@closeout}}
-\newinsert\slide@footins
-\skip\slide@footins=\bigskipamount
-\count\slide@footins=1000
-\dimen\slide@footins=4in
-\def\theslidefootnote{\alph{footnote}}
-\def\slide@footnotes{%
-  \def\thefootnote{\theslidefootnote}%
-  \let\footins\slide@footins
-  \interfootnotelinepenalty\@M}
-\def\slidefonts{}
-\def\slidestretch{1.18}
-\def\slidearraystretch{1.2}
-\def\raggedslides{\@ifnextchar[{\@raggedslides}{\@raggedslides[1fil]}}
-\def\@raggedslides[#1]{%
-  \edef\slide@@rightskip{#1}%
-  \ifslide\slide@rightskip\fi}
-\def\slide@rightskip{%
-  \@rightskip\z@ plus \slide@@rightskip\relax \rightskip\@rightskip}
-\def\slide@@rightskip{1fil}
-\newcount\slide@listdepth
-\def\slide@listparameters{%
-  \let\@listdepth\slide@listdepth
-  \slide@listdepth\z@
-  \def\@listi{\slide@listi}%
-  \def\@listii{\slide@listii}%
-  \def\@listiii{\slide@listiii}%
-  \let\@listiv\relax\let\@listv\relax\let\@listvi\relax}
-\def\slide@listi{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmargini
-  \labelwidth\leftmargini \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \parsep\parskip \divide\parsep2
-  \partopsep\slidepartopsep\relax
-  \advance\partopsep-\parskip
-  \ifdim\partopsep<\z@\partopsep\z@\fi
-  \itemsep\slideitemsep\relax
-  \ifdim\parsep<\itemsep
-    \topsep\itemsep \advance\topsep-\parsep
-  \else
-    \itemsep\parsep \topsep\z@
-  \fi}
-\def\slide@listii{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \divide\itemsep2 \divide\parsep2
-  \divide\topsep2 \divide\partopsep2\relax}%
-\def\slide@listiii{%
-  \leftmargin\leftmarginiii
-  \labelwidth\leftmarginiii \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
-  \itemsep \z@ \parsep\z@ \topsep\z@}%
-\def\slideleftmargini{1.8em}
-\def\slideleftmarginii{1.4em}
-\def\slideleftmarginiii{1em}
-\def\slidelabelsep{.5em}
-\def\slideitemsep{.8ex minus .2ex}
-\def\slidepartopsep{1ex minus .2ex}
-\newbox\saved@specials
-\def\save@slidespecials{%
-  \begingroup
-    \output{%
-      \global\setbox\saved@specials=\box\@cclv
-      \global\wd\saved@specials=\z@
-      \global\dp\saved@specials=\z@
-      \global\ht\saved@specials=\z@}%
-    \hbox{}\penalty-\@M
-    \global\let\saved@texttop\@texttop
-    \gdef\@texttop{%
-      \ifvoid\saved@specials\else\box\saved@specials\nointerlineskip\fi
-      \saved@texttop
-      \global\let\@texttop\saved@texttop}%
-  \endgroup}
-\addto@hook\after@document{\save@slidespecials}
-\ifarticle\else
-  \def\insert@specials{%
-    \ifvoid\saved@specials\else
-      \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\box\saved@specials\box\@slidebox}%
-    \fi
-    \global\let\insert@specials\relax}
-\fi
-\def\extraslideheight#1{%
-  \@tempdima #1\relax
-  \edef\X@SlideHeight{\number\@tempdima sp}
-  \ifslide\set@slidesize\fi}
-\extraslideheight{6pt}
-\def\set@slidesize{%
-  \iflandscape
-    \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
-    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
-  \else
-    \hsize=\inverseslidesmag\slideheight
-    \vsize=\inverseslidesmag\slidewidth
-  \fi
-  \edef\slide@vsize{\number\vsize sp}%
-  \textheight\vsize
-  \advance\vsize\X@SlideHeight\relax
-  \textwidth\hsize\columnwidth\hsize\linewidth\hsize}
-\def\newslide{%
-  \par\penalty-\@M
-  \def\do##1{\setcounter{##1}\z@}\slide@reset
-  \the\before@newslide
-  \set@slidesize}
-\newtoks\before@newslide
-\def\slide@reset{\do{footnote}}
-\def\slidereset#1{\def\slide@reset{}\addtoslidereset{#1}}
-\def\addtoslidereset#1{%
-  \edef\@tempa{#1}\expandafter\addto@slidereset\@tempa,\@nil,}
-\def\addto@slidereset#1,{%
-  \ifx\@nil#1\else
-    \@ifundefined{c@#1}%
-      {\@seminarerr{Counter `#1' not defined}\@ehd}%
-      {\expandafter\def\expandafter\slide@reset\expandafter{%
-        \slide@reset\do{#1}}}%
-    \expandafter\addto@slidereset
-  \fi}
-\def\slide@output{%
-  \@makeslide
-  \@testfalse
-  \ifnotesonly\else
-    \iflandscape
-      \ifnum\@landscapeonly>-1 \os@test\fi
-    \else
-      \ifnum\@landscapeonly<1 \os@test\fi
-    \fi
-  \fi
-  \if@test
-    \reset@slideoutput
-    \@@makeslide
-    \process@slide
-  \fi
-  \refstepcounter{slide}}
-\def\reset@slideoutput{%
-  \let\par\@@par
-  \reset@font
-  \def\baselinestretch{1}%
-  \@nameuse{1\@ptsize @semptsize}%
-  \catcode`\ =10
-  \let\-\@dischyph \let\'\@acci \let\`\@accii \let\=\@acciii}
-\newif\ifcenterslides
-\centerslidestrue
-\def\@makeslide{%
-  \setbox\@slidebox\vbox{%
-    \unvbox\@cclv
-    \ifvoid\slide@footins\else
-      \vskip\skip\slide@footins
-      \footnoterule
-      \unvbox\slide@footins
-    \fi
-    \vskip\z@}}
-\def\@@makeslide{%
-  \overfullslide@warning
-  \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{%
-    \vfuzz=\slidefuzz\relax
-    \vbox to\slide@vsize{%
-    \ifcenterslides\vskip\z@ plus .0001fil \fi
-    \unvbox\@slidebox
-    \vskip\z@ plus .0001fil}%
-    \the\after@slidepage}%
-  \wd\@slidebox\textwidth}
-\def\overfullslide@warning{%
-  \dimen@\ht\@slidebox
-  \advance\dimen@-\slide@vsize\relax
-  \ifdim\dimen@>\slidefuzz\relax
-    \@warning{Slide \theslide\space overfull by \the\dimen@}%
-  \fi}
-\def\slidefuzz{2pt}
-\newtoks\after@slidepage
-\newif\ifrotateheaders
-\def\sliderotation#1{\@ifundefined{semsr@#1}%
-  {\@latexerr{Slide rotation `#1' not defined.}\@eha}%
-  {\@nameuse{semsr@#1}}}
-\def\semsr@left{%
-  \def\rotate@slide{%
-    \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\leftsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}}
-\def\semsr@right{%
-  \def\rotate@slide{%
-    \setbox\@slidebox\hbox{\rightsliderotation{\box\@slidebox}}}}
-\def\semsr@none{\let\rotate@slide\relax}
-\sliderotation{none}
-\def\leftsliderotation#1{%
-  \@seminarerr{\string\leftsliderotation\space has not been defined}%
-  \@ehd}
-\let\rightsliderotation\leftsliderotation
-\def\@ifrotateslide#1{%
-  \ifx\rotate@slide\relax\else
-    \iflandscape\ifportrait#1\fi\else\ifportrait\else#1\fi\fi
-  \fi}
-\def\process@slide{%
-  \slideframewidth=\inverseslidesmag\slideframewidth
-  \slideframesep=\inverseslidesmag\slideframesep
-  \fboxrule\slideframewidth
-  \fboxsep\slideframesep
-  \ifarticle
-    \@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide
-  \else
-    \ifrotateheaders\else\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
-  \fi
-  \process@@slide}
-\def\process@@slide{\finish@slide\output@slide}
-\def\finish@slide{%
-  \theslideframe
-  \add@slidelabel\slidelabel}
-\ifarticle
-  \def\output@slide{%
-    \global\advance\slide@count1
-    \@ifundefined{slidebox@\the\slide@count}%
-      {{\globaldefs=1\expandafter
-        \new@slidebox\csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname}}{}%
-    \expandafter\global\expandafter\setbox\csname
-      slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname\box\@slidebox}
-\else
-  \def\output@slide{%
-    \begingroup
-      \hoffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
-      \voffset=-\inverseslidesmag in
-      \setslidelength\@tempdima{%
-        \ifportrait\paperwidth\else\paperheight\fi}
-      \setslidelength\@tempdimb{%
-        \ifportrait\paperheight\else\paperwidth\fi}
-      \ifrotateheaders
-        \@ifrotateslide{%
-          \dimen@=\@tempdima
-          \@tempdima=\@tempdimb
-          \@tempdimb=\dimen@}
-      \fi
-      % \oddsidemargin, \evensidemargin, \headheight, \footheight
-      % used for scratch:
-      \setslidelength\oddsidemargin\slideleftmargin
-      \setslidelength\evensidemargin\sliderightmargin
-      \setslidelength\headheight\slidetopmargin
-      \setslidelength\footheight\slidebottommargin
-      % Some page styles like to know \textwidth:
-      \textwidth=\@tempdima
-      \advance\textwidth-\oddsidemargin
-      \advance\textwidth-\evensidemargin
-      \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox to \@tempdima{%
-        \kern\oddsidemargin
-        \vbox to\@tempdimb{%
-          \ifnum\fancyput@flag>-1
-            \hbox{\kern-\oddsidemargin\do@fancyput}%
-          \fi
-          \let\label\@gobble
-          \let\index\@gobble
-          \let\glossary\@gobble
-          \vbox to\headheight{%
-            \vfill
-            \hbox{%
-              \slideheadfont\relax\strut
-              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddhead}}%
-            \kern\z@}%
-          \vfill
-          \hbox to\textwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}%
-          \vfill
-          \vbox to\footheight{%
-            \hbox{%
-              \slidefootfont\relax\strut
-              \hbox to\textwidth{\@oddfoot}}%
-            \vfill}}%
-        \hss}%
-      \ifrotateheaders\@ifrotateslide\rotate@slide\fi
-      \insert@specials
-      \shipout\box\@slidebox
-    \endgroup
-    \let\firstmark\botmark}
-  \@ifundefined{fancyput@flag}{\def\fancyput@flag{-1}}{}
-\fi
-\newskip\slidesep
-\slidesep\intextsep
-\ifarticle
-  \def\fps@fslide{htbp}
-  \def\ftype@fslide{32}
-  \def\float@savedslide{%
-    \begingroup\@float{fslide}%
-      \centerline{\box\@slidebox}%
-    \end@float\endgroup}%
-  \@namedef{float*@savedslide}{%
-    \begingroup\@dblfloat{fslide}%
-      \centerline{\box\@slidebox}%
-    \end@dblfloat\endgroup}%
-  \def\center@slide{\hbox{%
-    \kern-\@totalleftmargin
-    \hbox to \columnwidth{\hss\box\@slidebox\hss}}}%
-  \def\onepercol@savedslide{%
-    \vbox to .996\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak}%
-  \def\twopercol@savedslide{%
-    \dimen@.5\textheight
-    \advance\dimen@-\slidesep
-    \ifdim\ht\@slidebox>\dimen@
-      \onepercol@savedslide
-    \else
-      \vbox to .498\textheight{\vss\center@slide\vss}\goodbreak
-    \fi}
-  \def\here@savedslide{%
-    \addvspace\slidesep\center@slide\addvspace\slidesep}
-  \@namedef{here*@savedslide}{%
-    \goodbreak \hrule \@height\z@ \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak
-    \center@slide
-    \nobreak \vskip\slidesep \nobreak \hrule\@height\z@ \goodbreak}
-\fi
-\ifarticle
-  \def\slideplacement#1{\@ifundefined{#1@savedslide}%
-    {\@seminarerr{Slide placement `#1' undefined}\@ehd}%
-    {\expandafter\let\expandafter\output@savedslide
-      \csname #1@savedslide\endcsname}}
-\else
-  \def\slideplacement#1{}
-\fi
-\ifarticle
-  \ifnotes
-    \ifportrait
-      \slideplacement{float}
-    \else
-      \slideplacement{float*}
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \ifportrait
-      \slideplacement{onepercol}
-    \else
-      \slideplacement{twopercol}
-    \fi
-  \fi
-\fi
-\ifarticle
-  \def\outputloop@savedslides{%
-    \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth
-    \ifvoid\not@slidebox\else
-      \dimen@=\dp\not@slidebox
-      \unvbox\not@slidebox
-      \hrule height\z@
-      \prevdepth\dimen@
-      \penalty\z@
-    \fi
-    \edef\slide@@count{\the\slide@count\relax}%
-    \slide@count\z@
-    \loop
-    \ifnum\slide@count<\slide@@count
-      \advance\slide@count1
-      \expandafter\setbox\expandafter\@slidebox\expandafter\box
-        \csname slidebox@\the\slide@count\endcsname
-      \output@savedslide
-    \repeat
-    \ifnotesonlystar\make@slidemarker\fi}
-\fi
-\def\make@slidemarker{%
-  \addvspace\slidesep
-  \moveleft\@totalleftmargin
-  \vbox{%
-    \hsize\columnwidth
-    \hrule height 1pt
-    \kern 8pt
-    \hbox to \columnwidth{%
-      \hss
-      \LARGE\bf\the@slidemarker
-      \hss}%
-    \kern 8pt
-    \hrule height 1pt}%
-  \addvspace\slidesep}
-\def\the@slidemarker{%
-  Slide%
-  \ifnum\c@slide=\first@slidemarker\else
-    s {\c@slide\first@slidemarker\relax\theslide} --\fi
-  { }\theslide}%
-\ifarticle
-  \let\c@note\c@page
-  \def\p@note{\p@page}
-  \def\thenote{\thepage}
-\else
-  \newcounter{note}
-  \def\thenote{\theslide-\arabic{note}}
-  \def\thepage{\thenote}
-  \addto@hook\after@slide{\setcounter{note}{1}}
-  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@outputpage\expandafter{%
-    \@outputpage\stepcounter{note}}
-\fi
-\ifarticle\else
-  \let\c@page\c@slide
-  \countdef\c@slide=0
-  \c@slide=0
-  \c@page=1
-\fi
-\ifarticle
-  \let\truepagenumbers\relax
-\else
-  \def\truepagenumbers{%
-    \let\c@slide\c@page
-    \countdef\c@page=0
-    \c@page=1
-    \c@slide=0
-    \let\truepagenumbers\relax}
-\fi
-\addto@preamblecmds{\truepagenumbers}
-\newdimen\slideframewidth \slideframewidth 4pt
-\newdimen\slideframesep \slideframesep .3in
-\def\newslideframe#1{%
-  \@ifnextchar[{\@newslideframe{#1}}{\@newslideframe{#1}[]}}
-\def\@newslideframe#1[#2]{%
-  \@namedef{semsfops@#1}{#2}%
-  \@namedef{semsf@#1}##1}
-\newslideframe{plain}{\fbox{#1}}
-\def\slideframe{\@slideframe{slide}}
-\def\@slideframe#1{%
-  \@ifstar{\@testtrue\@@slideframe{#1}}{\@testfalse\@@slideframe{#1}}}
-\def\@@slideframe#1{%
-  \@ifnextchar[{\@@@slideframe{#1}}{\@@@slideframe{#1}[]}}
-\def\@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{%
-  \def\@tempa{none}%
-  \def\@tempb{#3}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-    \@namedef{the#1frame}{\relax}%
-  \else
-    \ifx\@tempb\@empty
-      \@namedef{the#1frame}{}%
-    \else
-      \@ifundefined{semsf@#3}%
-        {\@seminarerr{Slide frame `#3' undefined}\@eha}%
-        {\if@test
-          \@@@@slideframe{#1}[#2]{#3}%
-        \else
-          \@namedef{the#1frame}{\setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{%
-            \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}#2\@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}%
-        \fi}%
-     \fi
-   \fi}
-\def\@@@@slideframe#1[#2]#3{%
-  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname the#1frame\endcsname
-  \edef\next{%
-    \noexpand\def\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#1frame\endcsname}%
-  \expandafter\next\expandafter{\@tempa
-    \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{{%
-      \@nameuse{semsfops@#3}%
-      #2%
-      \@nameuse{semsf@#3}{\box\@slidebox}}}}}%
-\slideframe{plain}
-\def\slidestyle#1{\@ifundefined{ss@#1}%
-  {\@seminarerr{Slide style `#1' undefined}\@eha}%
-  {\@nameuse{ss@#1}}}
-\def\ss@empty{\let\add@slidelabel\@gobble}
-\def\ss@left{\def\add@slidelabel##1{%
-  \setbox\@slidebox=\hbox{%
-    \vbox to \ht\@slidebox{\vss
-    \hbox to 0pt{\hss##1\hskip 15pt}%
-    \vss}\box\@slidebox}}}
-\def\ss@bottom{\def\add@slidelabel##1{%
-  \setbox\@slidebox=\vbox{\copy\@slidebox\vskip 9pt
-    \hbox to\wd\@slidebox{\hss##1\hss}}}}%
-\ifarticle
-  \ifportrait\slidestyle{bottom}\else\slidestyle{left}\fi
-\else
-  \slidestyle{empty}
-\fi
-\def\slidelabel{\bf Slide \theslide}
-\def\newpagestyle#1#2#3{%
-  \expandafter\newcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{%
-    \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-    \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}}
-\def\renewpagestyle#1#2#3{%
-  \expandafter\renewcommand\csname ps@#1\endcsname{%
-    \def\@oddhead{#2}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-    \def\@oddfoot{#3}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}}
-\def\@ifgoodps#1{%
-  \@ifundefined{ps@#1}{\@seminarerr{Page style `#1' undefined}\@eha}}
-\def\slidepagestyle#1{%
-  \@ifgoodps{#1}%
-    {\ifslide\pagestyle{#1}\else\edef\slide@pagestyle{#1}\fi}}
-\def\ps@{}
-\slidepagestyle{}
-\ifarticle
-  \def\ps@align{}
-\else
-  \def\ps@align{%
-    \def\@oddhead{\thepage\hfil+}\let\@evenhead\@oddhead
-    \def\@oddfoot{+\hfil+}\let\@evenfoot\@oddfoot}
-\fi
-\def\slideheadfont{\scriptsize}
-\def\slidefootfont{\scriptsize}
-\def\magstep#1{\ifcase#1 \@m\or 1200\or 1440\or 1728\or
-  2074\or 2488\or 2986\or 3583\or 4300\or 5160\fi\relax}
-\def\magstepminus#1{%
-  \ifcase#1 \@m\or 833\or 694\or 579\or 482\or 401\fi\relax}
-\def\@magstep#1{%
-  \ifnum#1<\z@\magstepminus{-#1}\else\magstep#1\fi}
-{\catcode`\p=12\catcode`\t=12
-  \gdef\@@inv@@mag#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}}
-\def\invert@mag#1{\@tempdima=1000pt
-  \divide\@tempdima by #1\relax
-  \expandafter\@@inv@@mag\the\@tempdima#1}
-\def\@slidesmag#1{%
-  \@tempcnta=#1\relax%
-  \ifnum\@tempcnta>0
-    \edef\inverseslidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
-    \invert@mag\inverseslidesmag
-    \ifarticle\else\mag\@tempcnta\fi
-  \else
-    \@seminarerr{\string\@slidesmag\space argument must be an
-      integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha
-  \fi}
-\def\@articlemag#1{%
-  \@tempcnta=#1\relax%
-  \ifnum\@tempcnta>0
-    \edef\inverseartmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
-    \invert@mag\inverseartmag
-    \ifarticle\mag\@tempcnta\fi
-  \else
-    \@seminarerr{\string\articlemag\space argument must be an
-      integer equal to 1000 times the magnification}\@eha
-  \fi}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\@slidesmag\do\@articlemag}
-\newdimen\semin
-\newdimen\semcm
-\def\@semmagerr#1{%
-  \@seminarerr{\string#1 argument must be an integer
-    between -5 and 9}\@eha}
-\def\slidesmag#1{%
-  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
-  \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6
-    \ifnum\@tempcnta<10
-      \edef\the@slidesmag{\the\@tempcnta}%
-      \@slidesmag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}%
-    \else
-      \@semmagerr\slidesmag
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \@semmagerr\slidesmag
-  \fi
-  \setslidelength\semin\seminlength
-  \setslidelength\semcm\semcmlength}
-\def\seminlength{1in}
-\def\semcmlength{1cm}
-\def\articlemag#1{%
-  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
-  \ifnum\@tempcnta>-6
-    \ifnum\@tempcnta<10
-      \edef\the@articlemag{\the\@tempcnta}%
-      \@articlemag{\@magstep\@tempcnta}%
-    \else
-      \@semmagerr\articlemag
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \@semmagerr\articlemag
-  \fi}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\slidesmag\do\articlemag}
-\def\setslidelength#1#2{%
-  #1=#2\relax
-  #1=\inverseslidesmag#1}%
-\def\addtoslidelength#1#2{%
-  \dimen@=#2\relax
-  \advance#1 by \inverseslidesmag\dimen@}
-\def\setartlength#1#2{%
-  #1=#2\relax
-  #1=\inverseartmag#1}
-\def\addtoartlength#1#2{%
-  \dimen@=#2\relax
-  \advance#1 by \inverseartmag\dimen@}
-\def\slide@epsfsize#1#2{%
-  \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt
-    \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt
-      \inverseslidesmag#1%
-    \else
-      0pt
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \inverseslidesmag\epsfxsize
-  \fi
-  \epsfysize
-  \ifdim\epsfysize=0pt
-    \ifdim\epsfxsize=0pt
-      \inverseslidesmag#2%
-    \else
-      0pt
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \inverseslidesmag\epsfysize
-  \fi}
-\def\epsfslidesize{\let\epsfsize\slide@epsfsize}
-\slidesmag{4}
-\articlemag{0}
-\def\do@pageparameters{%
-  \do\oddsidemargin
-  \do\evensidemargin
-  \do\marginparwidth
-  \do\marginparsep
-  \do\topmargin
-  \do\headheight
-  \do\headsep
-  \do\textheight
-  \do\textwidth
-  \do\topskip
-  \do\footskip
-  \do\footheight}
-\ifarticle
-  \def\scale@pageparameters{%
-    \begingroup
-      \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseartmag##1\relax}%
-      \do@pageparameters
-    \endgroup}
-\else
-  \def\scale@pageparameters{%
-    \begingroup
-      \def\do##1{\global##1=\inverseslidesmag##1\relax}%
-      \do@pageparameters
-    \endgroup}
-\fi
-\addto@hook\before@document{\scale@pageparameters}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\scale@pageparameters\do\do@pageparameters}
-\def\allversions{}
-\let\endallversions\relax
-\@namedef{allversions*}{\@bsphack\globaldefs=1}
-\@namedef{endallversions*}{\@esphack}
-\def\slide@list{slide,slide*,allversions,allversions*}
-\def\addtoslidelist#1{\xdef\slide@list{\slide@list,#1}}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\addtoslidelist}
-\ifslidesonly
-  \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{\@@input xcomment.sty }{}
-  \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}
-  \newxcomment[]{note}
-\else
-  \def\note{\@bsphack}%
-  \def\endnote{\@esphack}%
-\fi
-\def\noxcomment{\def\xcomment@hook{}}
-\def\os@list{}
-\newif\if@os
-\def\onlyslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@ostrue
-  \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\onlyslides\space argument
-    contains undefined references}}}
-\def\notslides#1{\def\os@list{#1}\@osfalse
-  \def\os@warning{\@warning{\string\notslides\space argument
-    contains undefined references}}}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\onlyslides\do\notslides}
-\addto@hook\after@document{%
-  \ifx\os@list\@empty\else\os@expandlist\fi}
-\def\os@expandlist{%
-  \let\os@@warning\relax
-  \begingroup
-    \def\ref##1{\@ifundefined{r@##1}{?}%
-      {\noexpand\@car\@nameuse{r@##1}\noexpand\@nil}}%
-    \edef\@tempd{\os@list}%
-    \xdef\os@list{}%
-    \@for\@tempc:=\@tempd
-      \do{\expandafter\os@expandrange\@tempc-:-:\@nil}%
-    \os@@warning
-  \endgroup
-  \let\os@expandrange\relax
-  \let\os@checknum\relax
-  \let\os@expandlist\relax}
-\def\os@expandrange#1-#2-#3\@nil{%
-  \def\@tempa{?}\def\@tempb{#1}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-    \let\os@@warning\os@warning
-  \else
-    \@tempcnta=#1\relax
-    \def\@tempb{#2}%
-    \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-      \let\os@@warning\os@warning
-    \else
-      \def\@tempa{:}%
-      \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-        \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \else
-        \@tempcntb=#2\relax
-      \fi
-      \advance\@tempcnta by -1
-      \advance\@tempcntb by 1
-      \ifx\os@list\@empty
-        \xdef\os@list{\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}%
-      \else
-        \xdef\os@list{\os@list,\the\@tempcnta+\the\@tempcntb}%
-      \fi
-    \fi
-  \fi}
-\def\os@test{%
-  \@testtrue
-  \iflandscape
-    \ifnum\@landscapeonly=-1 \@testfalse\fi
-  \else
-    \ifnum\@landscapeonly=1 \@testfalse\fi
-  \fi
-  \if@test
-    \ifx\os@list\@empty\else
-      \if@os\@testfalse\fi
-      \@for\@tempa:=\os@list\do{\expandafter\os@testrange\@tempa\@nil}%
-    \fi
-  \fi}
-\def\os@testrange#1+#2\@nil{%
-  \ifnum\c@slide>#1
-    \ifnum\c@slide<#2
-      \if@os\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi
-    \fi
-  \fi}
-\def\onlynotestoo{%
-  \ifnotes\@testtrue\else\ifnotesonly\@testtrue\else\@testfalse\fi\fi
-  \if@test
-    \@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{%
-      \edef\sem@temp{\the\catcode`\@}%
-      \catcode`\@=11
-      \@@input xcomment.sty
-      \catcode`\@=\sem@temp\relax}{}%
-    \def\xcomment@hook{\@xcomment{@@@}{\slide@list}}%
-    \addto@hook\after@slide\onlynotes@too
-  \fi}
-\def\onlynotes@too{%
-  \os@test
-  \if@test\gdef\do@end{}\else\gdef\do@end{\xc@begin}\fi}
-\addto@preamblecmds\onlynotestoo
-\def\ptsize#1{%
-  \@ifundefined{#1@semptsize}%
-    {\@seminarerr{\string\ptsize\space `#1' not valid.}\@eha}%
-    {\ifslide
-      \sem@ptsize{#1}\large\normalsize
-    \else
-      \edef\slide@ptsize{#1}%
-    \fi}}
-\edef\slide@ptsize{1\@ptsize}%
-\def\slidefontsizes{\ptsize} %For backwards compatibility??
-\def\slide@setsize#1#2#3#4{%
-  \@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
-  \set@slideskip{#2}}
-\def\slide@@setsize#1#2#3#4{%
-  \slide@setsize{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}\slidedisplayskips}
-\def\set@slideskip#1{%
-  \normallineskiplimit=#1
-  \advance\normallineskiplimit-\normalbaselineskip
-  \multiply\normallineskiplimit-1
-  \normallineskiplimit\slideskip\normallineskiplimit
-  \ifdim\normallineskiplimit<1pt\normallineskiplimit=1pt\fi
-  \normallineskip=\normallineskiplimit
-    minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit
-  \dimen@=\normalbaselineskip
-  \normalbaselineskip=\dimen@ minus \slideshrink\normallineskiplimit
-  \normalbaselines}
-\def\slideskip{.75}
-\def\slideshrink{.25}
-\def\slidedisplayskips{%
-  \abovedisplayskip 1.75ex minus .35ex
-  \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
-  \abovedisplayshortskip .2ex minus .2ex
-  \belowdisplayshortskip 1ex minus .2ex}
-\def\sem@ptsize#1{%
-  \@nameuse{#1@semptsize}%
-  \large\normalsize
-  \leftmargini\slideleftmargini\relax
-  \leftmarginii\slideleftmarginii\relax
-  \leftmarginiii\slideleftmarginiii\relax
-  \labelsep\slidelabelsep\relax
-  \parskip\slideparskip\relax
-  \parindent\slideparindent\relax
-  \slide@rightskip
-  \slide@listi
-  \skip\footins\slidefootins\relax
-  \footnotesep\slidefootnotesep\relax}
-\def\slidefootins{2ex minus .8ex}
-\def\slidefootnotesep{1.2ex}
-\def\slideparindent{\z@}
-\def\slideparskip{1ex minus .2ex}
-\@namedef{8@semptsize}{%
-  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}}
-\@namedef{9@semptsize}{%
-  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{17pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{20pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}}
-\@namedef{10@semptsize}{%
-  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{8pt}\viipt\@viipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}}
-\@namedef{11@semptsize}{%
-  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{11pt}\ixpt\@ixpt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\Huge{\slide@setsize\Huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}}
-\@namedef{12@semptsize}{%
-  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{7pt}\vipt\@vipt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
-  \let\Huge\huge}
-\@namedef{14@semptsize}{%
-  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
-  \let\huge\LARGE
-  \let\Huge\LARGE}
-\@namedef{17@semptsize}{%
-  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\small{\slide@@setsize\small{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{14.5pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\slide@setsize\scriptsize{13.6pt}\xipt\@xipt}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{30pt}\xxvpt\@xxvpt}%
-  \let\LARGE\Large
-  \let\huge\Large
-  \let\Huge\Large}
-\def\twoup{\@ifnextchar[{\@twoup}{\@twoup[0]}}
-\ifarticle
-  \ifportrait
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \targetlayout{topbottom}%
-        \printlandscapefalse
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}}
-  \else
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@articlemag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -2\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \if@twoside
-          \targetlayout{twosided}%
-        \fi
-        \printlandscapetrue
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Article magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\articlemag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\articlemag}}
-  \fi
-\else
-  \ifportrait
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \advance\@tempcnta by -3
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \printlandscapetrue
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmagerr\slidesmag}}
-  \else
-    \def\@twoup[#1]{%
-      \@tempcnta=\the@slidesmag\relax
-      \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta
-      \advance\@tempcntb by #1\relax
-      \advance\@tempcntb by -3\relax
-      \ifnum\@tempcntb>-6\relax
-        \@@input 2up.tex
-        \source{\@magstep\@tempcnta}{\paperheight}{\paperwidth}%
-        \target{\@magstep\@tempcntb}{\paperwidth}{\paperheight}%
-        \targetlayout{topbottom}%
-        \printlandscapefalse
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Slides magnification is too low for
-          \string\twoup\space to handle}\@eha
-      \fi
-      \def\slidesmag##1{\@semtwoupmargerr\slidesmag}}%
-  \fi
-\fi
-\def\@semtwoupmagerr#1{%
-  \@seminarerr{\string#1 must come before \string\twoup}\@eha}
-\addto@preamblecmds{\twoup\do\@twoup}
-\openin1 seminar.con
-\ifeof1\else\closein1 \relax\@@input seminar.con\fi
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `seminar.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index a428d3796e9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,146 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN semlayer.sty
-%%
-%% This is file `semlayer.sty', generated
-%% on <1993/4/2> with the docstrip utility (2.0r).
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% semlayer.doc
-%%
-\def\fileversion{1.0}
-\def\filedate{93/04/01}
-%%
-%% LaTeX style option `semlayer.sty'.
-%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the `seminar' document style.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions.
-%%
-\addto@hook\before@newslide{%
-  \global\def\overlay@list{}%
-  \setcounter{overlay}{0}}
-\newbox\@@slidebox
-\def\process@@slide{%
-  \ifx\overlay@list\@empty
-    \finish@slide
-    \output@slide
-  \else
-    \setbox\@@slidebox\box\@slidebox
-    \make@overlay{0}%
-    \finish@slide
-    \output@slide
-    {\let\theoverlay\theslide\layer@loop{0}}%
-    \overlay@loop
-  \fi}
-\def\overlay@loop{%
-  \begingroup
-    \overlay@prep
-    \c@overlay=1
-    \@whilenum\c@overlay<10
-      \do{%
-        \test@member{\the\c@overlay}{\overlay@list}%
-        \if@test
-          \make@overlay{\the\c@overlay}%
-          \finish@slide
-          \output@slide
-        \fi
-        \layer@loop{\the\c@overlay}%
-        \advance\c@overlay by 1}%
-  \endgroup}
-\def\layer@loop#1{%
-  \begingroup
-    \layer@prep
-    \@for\currlayer:=\layer@list\do{%
-    \test@member{#1-\currlayer}{\overlay@list}%
-      \if@test
-        \make@overlay{#1-\currlayer}%
-        \finish@slide
-        \output@slide
-      \fi}%
-  \endgroup}
-\def\layer@prep{%
-  \ifarticle\pagestyle{\layer@pagestyle}\fi
-  \let\thepage\thelayer
-  \ifx\thelayerframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\thelayerframe\fi
-  \let\slidelabel\layerlabel}
-\def\overlay@prep{%
-  \ifarticle\pagestyle{\overlay@pagestyle}\fi
-  \let\thepage\theoverlay
-  \ifx\theoverlayframe\@empty\else\let\theslideframe\theoverlayframe\fi
-  \let\slidelabel\overlaylabel}
-\def\layerframe{\@slideframe{layer}}
-\def\overlayframe{\@slideframe{overlay}}
-\def\thelayerframe{}
-\def\theoverlayframe{}
-\def\overlaylabel{\bf Overlay \theoverlay}
-\def\layerlabel{\bf Layer \thelayer}
-\newcounter{overlay}
-\def\theoverlay{\theslide-\alph{overlay}}
-\def\currlayer{}
-\def\thelayer{\theoverlay-\currlayer}
-\newif\ifoverlays
-\newif\iflayers
-\@ifundefined{@overlay}%
-  {\let\@overlay\relax}%
-  {\ifarticle\else\overlaystrue\layerstrue\fi}
-\def\nooverlays@err{%
-  \@seminarerr{You need to use additional macros for overlays,
-    e.g., semcolor.sty}\@ehd
-  \global\overlaysfalse
-  \global\layersfalse}
-\@ifundefined{@overlay}{}{}
-\def\overlay#1{%
-  \ifoverlays\ifx\@overlay\relax\nooverlays@err\fi\fi
-  \ifslide
-    \@tempcnta=#1
-    \@testfalse
-    \ifnum\@tempcnta>-1 \ifnum\@tempcnta<10 \@testtrue\fi\fi
-    \if@test
-      \c@overlay=\@tempcnta
-      \ifnum\c@overlay=0
-        \advance\c@slide by -1
-        \refstepcounter{slide}%
-      \else
-        \advance\c@overlay by -1
-        \refstepcounter{overlay}%
-        \ifoverlays
-          \xdef\overlay@list{\overlay@list,\the\c@overlay}%
-        \fi
-      \fi
-      \ifoverlays
-        \@overlay{\the\c@overlay}%
-      \fi
-    \else
-      \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space argument must be
-        an integer between 0 and 9}\@eha
-    \fi
-  \else
-    \@seminarerr{\string\overlay\space can only be used
-      in slide environments}\@eha
-  \fi
-  \ignorespaces}
-\def\colorlayers#1{%
-  \edef\@tempc{#1}%
-  \edef\layer@list{\layer@list,#1}%
-  \def\@tempa##1{%
-    \@namedef{##1}{%
-      \iflayers\ifx\@overlay\relax\nooverlays@err\fi\fi
-      \ifslide
-        \iflayers
-          \xdef\overlay@list{\overlay@list,\the\c@overlay-##1}%
-          \@overlay{\the\c@overlay-##1}%
-        \fi
-      \else
-        \@seminarerr{Color layer `##1' can only be used in
-          slide environments}\@eha
-      \fi}}
-  \@for\@tempb:=\@tempc\do{%
-    \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempb}}}
-\def\layer@list{}
-\def\overlaypagestyle#1{\@ifgoodps{#1}{\edef\overlay@pagestyle{#1}}}
-\def\layerpagestyle#1{\@ifgoodps{#1}{\edef\layer@pagestyle{#1}}}
-\overlaypagestyle{}
-\layerpagestyle{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `semlayer.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 81cf69dae7f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN semlcmss.sty
-\def\fileversion{1.0 (2e)}
-\def\filedate{94/02/01}
-%%
-%% LaTeX style option `semlcmss.sty' for the `seminar' document style.
-%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the New Font Selection Scheme (1 or 2)
-%% or (some day) with LaTeX2e.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1994, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions.
-%%
-%% This file contains the external font information needed to load

-%% the SliTeX sans serif fonts for use by seminar.sty.

-%%
-\csname semlcmss@loaded\endcsname
-\let\semlcmss@loaded\endinput
-\typeout{Style Option: `semlcmss' \fileversion\space <\filedate> (tvz)}
-\@ifundefined{selectfont}
-  {\@seminarerr{`semlcmss' style option can only be used
-    with the New Font Selection Scheme}\@eha\endinput}{}
-%
-\expandafter\ifx\csname DeclareSizeFunction\endcsname\relax
-
-% First, the font definitions:
-\new@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{n}{%

-  <5>lcmss8 scaled 695%

-  <6>lcmss8 scaled 833%

-  <7>lcmss8 scaled 913%

-  <8>lcmss8 %
-  <9>lcmss8 scaled 1095%
-  <10>lcmss8 scaled 1200%

-  <11>lcmss8 scaled 1314%

-  <12>lcmss8 scaled 1440%

-  <14>lcmss8 scaled 1727%

-  <17>lcmss8 scaled 2074%

-  <20>lcmss8 scaled 2488%

-  <25>lcmss8 scaled 2986%

-  }{}

-\extra@def{lcmss}{}{}

-%
-\new@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{it}{%

-  <5>lcmssi8 scaled 695%

-  <6>lcmssi8 scaled 833%

-  <7>lcmssi8 scaled 913%

-  <8>lcmssi8 %
-  <9>lcmssi8 scaled 1095%
-  <10>lcmssi8 scaled 1200%

-  <11>lcmssi8 scaled 1314%

-  <12>lcmssi8 scaled 1440%

-  <14>lcmssi8 scaled 1727%

-  <17>lcmssi8 scaled 2074%

-  <20>lcmssi8 scaled 2488%

-  <25>lcmssi8 scaled 2986%

-  }{}

-\extra@def{lcmss}{}{}

-\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{m}{sl}{lcmss}{m}{it}
-%
-\new@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{n}{%

-  <5>lcmssb8 scaled 695%

-  <6>lcmssb8 scaled 833%

-  <7>lcmssb8 scaled 913%

-  <8>lcmssb8 %
-  <9>lcmssb8 scaled 1095%
-  <10>lcmssb8 scaled 1200%

-  <11>lcmssb8 scaled 1314%

-  <12>lcmssb8 scaled 1440%

-  <14>lcmssb8 scaled 1727%

-  <17>lcmssb8 scaled 2074%

-  <20>lcmssb8 scaled 2488%

-  <25>lcmssb8 scaled 2986%

-  }{}

-\extra@def{cmssb}{}{}
-\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{it}{lcmss}{bx}{n}
-\subst@fontshape{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{lcmss}{bx}{n}
-
-%
-% Now define \slidefonts:
-\ifarticle
-  \def\slidefonts{%
-    \def\default@family{lcmss}%
-    \def\rmdefault{lcmss}%
-    \def\sfdefault{lcmss}%
-    \family\default@family\selectfont}
-\else
-    \def\default@family{lcmss}%
-    \def\rmdefault{lcmss}%
-    \def\sfdefault{lcmss}%
-    \family\default@family\selectfont
-\fi
-
-\else
-
-\DeclareFontFamily{OT1}{lcmss}{}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{n}{
-  <5>s*[1.1120]lcmss8

-  <6>s*[1.1107]lcmss8

-  <7>s*[1.0434]lcmss8

-  <8>lcmss8
-  <9>s*[0.9733]lcmss8
-  <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmss8}{}

-
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{
-  <5>s*[1.1120]lcmssi8

-  <6>s*[1.1107]lcmssi8

-  <7>s*[1.0434]lcmssi8

-  <8>lcmssi8
-  <9>s*[0.9733]lcmssi8
-  <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmssi8}{}

-
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{
-  <5>s*[1.1120]lcmssb8

-  <6>s*[1.1107]lcmssb8

-  <7>s*[1.0434]lcmssb8

-  <8>lcmssb8
-  <9>s*[0.9733]lcmssb8
-  <10><10.95><12><14.4><17.28><20.74><24.88>s*[0.96]lcmssb8}{}

-
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{m}{it}{<-> ssub * lcmss/m/sl }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{<-> sub * lcmss/bx/n }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{OT1}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{<-> sub * lcmss/bx/n }{}
-
-% Now define \slidefonts:
-\ifarticle
-  \def\slidefonts{%
-    \def\default@family{lcmss}%
-    \def\rmdefault{lcmss}%
-    \def\sfdefault{lcmss}%
-    \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont}
-\else
-    \def\default@family{lcmss}%
-    \def\rmdefault{lcmss}%
-    \def\sfdefault{lcmss}%
-    \fontfamily\default@family\selectfont
-\fi
-
-\fi
-
-% Now set up a few things for seminar.sty:
-% These fonts are intended to be used with the 10pt font size
-% declarations (and \magstep4), slightly modified:
-\ptsize{10}\slidesmag{4}\articlemag{0}
-\@namedef{10@semptsize}{%
-  \def\@normalsize{\slide@@setsize\normalsize{12pt}\xpt\@xpt}%
-  \def\small{\footnotesize}%
-  \def\footnotesize{\slide@@setsize\footnotesize{9.5pt}\viiipt\@viiipt}%
-  \def\scriptsize{\footnotesize}%
-  \def\tiny{\slide@setsize\tiny{6pt}\vpt\@vpt}%
-  \def\large{\slide@setsize\large{14pt}\xiipt\@xiipt}%
-  \def\Large{\slide@setsize\Large{18pt}\xivpt\@xivpt}%
-  \def\LARGE{\slide@setsize\LARGE{22pt}\xviipt\@xviipt}%
-  \def\huge{\slide@setsize\huge{25pt}\xxpt\@xxpt}%
-  \def\Huge{\huge}}
-\def\semlcmss@warning#1{%
-  \@warning{Can't use `\string#1' with the semlcmss option!}}
-\def\ptsize#1{\semlcmss@warning\ptsize}
-\def\slidesmag#1{\semlcmss@warning\slidesmag}
-\def\articlemag#1{\semlcmss@warning\articlemag}
-
-\endinput
-%% END semlcmss.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semrot.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semrot.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index dbaa0162aee..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semrot.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN sem-rot.sty
-\def\fileversion{1.0}
-\def\filedate{93/04/01}
-%%
-%% LaTeX style option `semrot.sty'.
-%% For use with LaTeX v2.09 and the `seminar' document style.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1993, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%% See seminar.sty or seminar.doc for copying restrictions.
-%%
-%% The following is just an interface for seminar.sty:
-\def\leftsliderotation#1{\@rotate[l]{#1}}
-\def\rightsliderotation#1{\@rotate[r]{#1}}
-\sliderotation{left}
-%%
-%% And the rest is rotate.sty, as distributed with Rokicki's dvips.
-%%
-%   These macros allow you to rotate or flip a \TeX\ box.  Very useful for
-%   sideways tables or upsidedown answers.
-%
-%   To use, create a box containing the information you want to rotate.
-%   (An hbox or vbox will do.)  Now call \@rotr\boxnum to rotate the
-%   material and create a new box with the appropriate (flipped) dimensions.
-%   \@rotr rotates right, \@rotl rotates left, \@rotu turns upside down, and
-%   \@rotf flips.  These boxes may contain other rotated boxes.
-%
-\newdimen\@rotdimen
-\newbox\@rotbox
-
-\def\@vspec#1{\special{ps:#1}}%  passes #1 verbatim to the output
-\def\@rotstart#1{\@vspec{gsave currentpoint currentpoint translate
-   #1 neg exch neg exch translate}}% #1 can be any origin-fixing transformation
-\def\@rotfinish{\@vspec{currentpoint grestore moveto}}% gets back in synch
-%
-%   First, the rotation right. The reference point of the rotated box
-%   is the lower right corner of the original box.
-%
-\def\@rotr#1{\@rotdimen=\ht#1\advance\@rotdimen by\dp#1%
-   \hbox to\@rotdimen{\hskip\ht#1\vbox to\wd#1{\@rotstart{90 rotate}%
-   \box#1\vss}\hss}\@rotfinish}
-%
-%   Next, the rotation left. The reference point of the rotated box
-%   is the upper left corner of the original box.
-%
-\def\@rotl#1{\@rotdimen=\ht#1\advance\@rotdimen by\dp#1%
-   \hbox to\@rotdimen{\vbox to\wd#1{\vskip\wd#1\@rotstart{270 rotate}%
-   \box#1\vss}\hss}\@rotfinish}%
-%
-%   Upside down is simple. The reference point of the rotated box
-%   is the upper right corner of the original box. (The box's height
-%   should be the current font's xheight, \fontdimen5\font,
-%   if you want that xheight to be at the baseline after rotation.)
-%
-\def\@rotu#1{\@rotdimen=\ht#1\advance\@rotdimen by\dp#1%
-   \hbox to\wd#1{\hskip\wd#1\vbox to\@rotdimen{\vskip\@rotdimen
-   \@rotstart{-1 dup scale}\box#1\vss}\hss}\@rotfinish}%
-%
-%   And flipped end for end is pretty ysae too. We retain the baseline.
-%
-\def\@rotf#1{\hbox to\wd#1{\hskip\wd#1\@rotstart{-1 1 scale}%
-   \box#1\hss}\@rotfinish}%
-%
-%   Now the user interface for LaTeX:  \rotate[type]{text} where
-%   ``type'' is `l' for left, `r' for right, `u' for upside-down, or
-%   `f' for flip.  `l' is the default.
-%
-\def\rotate{\@ifnextchar[{\@rotate}{\@rotate[l]}}
-\def\@rotate[#1]#2{\setbox\@rotbox=\hbox{#2}\@nameuse{@rot#1}\@rotbox}
-\endinput
-%% END sem-rot.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/slidesec.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/slidesec.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 81abef8d08e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/slidesec.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,200 +0,0 @@
-%% BEGIN slidesec.sty
-\def\fileversion{v0.9}
-\def\filedate{92/05/07}
-%%
-%% Style option slidesec.sty, for use with LaTeX 2.09 or SliTeX.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1992, by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% Copying of part or all of this file is allowed under the following
-%% conditions only:
-%% (1) You may freely distribute unchanged copies of the file. Please
-%%     include the documentation when you do so.
-%% (2) You may modify a renamed copy of the file, but only for personal
-%%     use or use within an organization.
-%% (3) You may copy fragments from the file, for personal use or for use
-%%     in a macro package for distribution, as long as credit is given
-%%     where credit is due.
-%%
-%% You are NOT ALLOWED to take money for the distribution or use of
-%% this file or modified versions or fragments thereof, except for
-%% a nominal charge for copying etc.
-%%
-% DISCLAIMER:
-%
-% Someone who actually uses something like this should rewrite it.
-%
-% DESCRIPTION:
-%
-% This file contains macros for sections, headings, tables of contents,
-% and lists of slides, for slides. It can probably be used with your
-% favorite LaTeX slide package (e.g., seminar.sty).
-% However:
-%%   If the counter used to keep track of slides is not  slide  ,
-%%   then change the following line:
-\def\@SCTR{\theslide}
-%%
-% ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS:
-%
-% The idea comes from Young U. Ryu's lslides.sty.
-%
-% USAGE:
-%
-% \slideheading[#1]{#2}
-%  * Analogous to \section.
-%  * [#1] is optional; \slideheading{#1} is same as \slideheading[#1]{#2}.
-%  * Advances slidesection counter.
-%  * Sets \theslideheading to #1; can be used, e.g., in headers and footers.
-%  * Adds #1 to slide contents file.
-%  * If #2 is non-empty, invokes \makeslideheading{#2} to make a heading.
-%    Default definition of \makeslideheading is
-%       \begin{center}\large\bf #2 \end{center}
-%    but you can redefine this to suit your tastes.
-%
-% \slidesubheading[#1]{#2}
-%  * Analogous to \subsection.
-%  * Like \slideheading, but add "sub" to all the names.
-%
-% \slideheading and \slidesubheading are meant to be used at most once in
-% a slide, but this is not a binding restriction.
-%
-% You may want to define abbreviated forms. E.g.,
-%   \newcommand{heading}{\slideheading}
-%   \newcommand{subheading}{\slidesubheading}
-%
-% \listofslides
-%  * Analogous to \listoftables.
-%
-% \slidecontents
-%  * Analogous to \tableofcontents
-%
-% \Slidecontents
-%  * List \slidecontents, but puts some check marks and stuff to
-%    indicate what you have covered so far and what is coming up.
-%    Meant to be used in the middle of a presentation.
-%
-% To change fonts and otherwise customize what you get from \listofslides,
-% \slidecontents, and \Slidecontents, you have to hack at the definitions
-% of these macros.
-%
-% BUGS:
-%
-% These macros have not been tested very much.
-%
-% IMPLEMENTATION:
-%
-\@ifundefined{@startlos}{}{\endinput}
-\typeout{File `slidesec.sty' \fileversion\space\space
-  \filedate\space\space <tvz>}
-%
-% If we use \@starttoc{los} to read in \jobname.los, then its contents
-% are destroyed and we can't read it again. \@startlos is like \@starttoc,
-% but it sets the flae \los@flag to 1, and then we add a few commands
-% to \enddocument that open \filename.los if \los@flag=1.
-%
-\def\los@flag{0}%
-\def\@startlos{%
-  \begingroup\makeatletter\@input{\jobname.los}\endgroup
-  \gdef\los@flag{1}\global\@nobreakfalse}
-\newtoks\@temptokenb
-\@temptokena{%
-  \ifnum\los@flag=1\if@filesw
-    \newwrite\tf@los\immediate\openout\tf@los\jobname.los\relax
-  \fi\fi}
-\expandafter\@temptokenb\expandafter{\enddocument}
-\edef\enddocument{\the\@temptokena\the\@temptokenb}
-%
-\newcounter{slidesection}
-\newcounter{slidesubsection}
-\def\theslidesection{\arabic{slidesection}}
-\def\thesubslidesection{\theslidesection.\arabic{subslidesection}}
-%
-\def\slideheading{\@dblarg\slide@heading}%
-\def\slide@heading[#1]#2{%
-  \stepcounter{slidesection}%
-  \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@slide
-    {\the\c@slidesection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}%
-  \gdef\theslideheading{#1}%
-  \def\@tempa{#2}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
-    {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesection\endcsname\theslidesection}%
-      \makeslideheading{#2}}%
-  \fi}
-\def\slidesubheading{\@dblarg\slide@subheading}
-\def\slide@subheading[#1]#2{%
-  \stepcounter{slidesection}%
-  \addtocontents{los}{\protect\l@subslide
-    {\the\c@slidesubsection}{\ignorespaces#1}{\@SCTR}}%
-  \gdef\theslidesubheading{#1}%
-  \def\@tempa{#2}%
-  \ifx\@tempa\@empty\else
-    {\edef\@currentlabel{\csname p@slidesubsection\endcsname
-      \theslidesubsection}\makeslideheading{#2}}%
-  \fi}
-\def\theslideheading{}\def\theslidesubheading{}
-%
-\def\makeslideheading#1{%
-  \begin{center}\large\bf #1\end{center}}
-\def\makeslidesubheading{\makeslideheading}
-%
-\def\@undottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{\vskip \z@ plus .2pt
-  \bgroup
-    \leftskip #2\relax \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
-    \interlinepenalty\@M
-    \leavevmode
-    \@tempdima #3\relax \advance\leftskip \@tempdima
-    \hbox{}\hskip -\leftskip
-    #4\par
-  \egroup}
-\def\slide@dottedcline{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
-\def\slide@undottedcline{\@undottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
-\def\slide@cline{\slide@dottedcline}
-%
-\def\slidenumberline#1{\hbox to\@tempdima{\hss#1\hskip 1em}}
-%
-\def\listofslides{\section*{List of Slides%
-  \@mkboth{LIST OF SLIDES}{LIST OF SLIDES}}%
-  \def\l@slide##1##2##3{%
-    \slide@undottedcline{\slidenumberline{##3}{##2}}{}}%
-  \let\l@subslide\l@slide
-  \@startlos}
-%
-\def\slidecontents{\@ifstar%
-  {\def\slide@cline{\slide@undottedcline}\slide@contents}%
-  {\def\slide@cline{\slide@dottedcline}\slide@contents}}
-\def\slide@contents{%
-  \def\l@slide##1##2##3{%
-    \slide@cline{\slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}%
-  \let\l@subslide\@gobbletwo
-  \@startlos}
-%
-\def\Slidecontents{\@ifstar%
-  {\def\slide@cline{\slide@undottedcline}\Slide@contents}%
-  {\def\slide@cline{\slide@dottedcline}\Slide@contents}}
-\def\Slide@contents{%
-  \def\l@slide##1##2##3{%
-    \ifcase\lslide@flag
-      \message{##1 ** \the\c@slidesection}
-      \ifnum##1>\c@slidesection
-        \def\lslide@flag{1}{\large\slide@cline{%
-          \slidenumberline{$\Rightarrow\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}%
-      \else
-        {\large\slide@cline{%
-          \slidenumberline{$\surd\;\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}%
-      \fi
-    \or
-      \def\lslide@flag{2}{\large\slide@cline{%
-        \slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}%
-    \or
-      {\large\slide@cline{%
-        \slidenumberline{$\bullet$}{##2}}{##3}}%
-    \fi}%
-  \def\l@subslide##1##2##3{%
-    \ifnum\lslide@flag=1
-      \@undottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}{##2}{}%
-    \fi}%
-  \def\lslide@flag{0}%
-  \@startlos}
-%
-\endinput
-%% END slidesec.sty
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/xcomment.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/xcomment.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index a117aced289..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/xcomment.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,182 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `xcomment.sty', generated
-%% on <1993/2/17> with the docstrip utility (2.0r).
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% xcomment.doc
-%%
-\def\fileversion{1.2}
-\def\filedate{93/02/12}
-%%
-%% Style option `xcomment' for use with LaTeX v2.09.
-%% This is a style for comment and "inverse" comment environments.
-%%
-%% COPYRIGHT 1992, 1993 by Timothy Van Zandt, Timothy.VAN-ZANDT@insead.edu
-%%
-%% Input file:                  xcomment.sty.
-%% Documented code:             xcomment.doc.
-%% For printing documentation:  xcomment.tex.
-%%
-%% You may find xcomment.doc and xcomment.tex appended to xcomment.sty.
-%%
-%% For Licensing info, see sem-read.me
-%%
-\@ifundefined{xcomment@@@}{}{\endinput}
-\typeout{Style-Option: `xcomment' v\fileversion \space <\filedate> (tvz) }
-\def\newxcomment{\@ifnextchar [{\@newxcommentwitharg}%
-  {\@newxcomment}}
-\def\@newxcomment#1{%
-  \expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname##1{\@xcomment{#1}{##1}}}%
-\def\@newxcommentwitharg[#1]#2{%
-  \expandafter\def\csname #2\endcsname{\@xcomment{#2}{#1}}}
-\newxcomment{xcomment}
-\def\envirsep{\par}
-\def\rescanfile#1{\def\@rescanfile{#1}}
-\rescanfile{\jobname.tmp}
-\def\norescanfile{\let\@rescanfile\relax}
-\def\@nofloat#1{\hrule height\z@\nobreak\vfill\vbox\bgroup\def\@captype{#1}}
-\def\end@nofloat{\egroup\nobreak\vfill\nobreak\hrule height\z@\medbreak}
-\def\nofloat#1{\@for\@tempa:=#1\do{\@namedef{#1}{\@nofloat{#1}}%
-  \@namedef{end#1}{\end@nofloat}}}
-\def\xc@makeother#1{%
-  \ifnum\the\catcode`#1=0\catcode`#112%
-  \else \ifnum\the\catcode`#1=1\catcode`#112%
-    \else \ifnum\the\catcode`#1=2\catcode`#112%
-      \else \ifnum\the\catcode`#1=6\catcode`#112%
-  \fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
-\newwrite\tokout
-\newread\tokin
-\def\rescan#1{%
-  \ifx\@rescanfile\relax\else
-    \ifx\@rescanfile\@empty #1{}\else
-      \immediate\openout\tokout=\@rescanfile
-      \immediate\write\tokout{{\the#1}\relax}%
-      \immediate\closeout\tokout
-      \openin\tokin=\@rescanfile
-      \read\tokin to\@tempd
-      \closein\tokin
-      \expandafter#1\@tempd%
-  \fi\fi}
-\def\@xcomment#1#2{%
-  \ifx\@preamblecmds\@notprerr
-    \def\xc@csname{#1}%
-    \edef\xc@envirlist{#2}%
-    \ifx\xc@envirlist\@empty \@bsphack \else
-      \begingroup
-      \def\@envirsep{}%
-      \@ifundefined{normal@begin}{\let\normal@begin\begin}{}%
-      \@ifundefined{normal@end}{\let\normal@end\end}{}%
-      \def\begin##1{\do@begin{##1}\normal@begin{##1}}%
-      \def\end##1{\normal@end{##1}\do@end}%
-      \def\do@begin##1{\@ifundefined{##1}{}{\def\do@end{}}}%
-      \let\do@end\xc@begin
-    \fi
-    \let\next\xc@begin
-  \else
-    \expandafter\@temptokena\expandafter{\document\@xcomment{@@@}{#2}}%
-    \edef\document{\the\@temptokena}%
-    \let\next\relax
-  \fi
-  \next}
-\def\end@xcomment{\ifx\xc@envirlist\@empty \@esphack \else \endgroup \fi}%
-\def\xc@begin{%
-  \begingroup
-    \let\do\xc@makeother
-    \dospecials
-    \ifx\xcommentchar\@empty\else
-      \expandafter\catcode\expandafter`\xcommentchar=14
-    \fi
-    \catcode`\^^M\active
-    \xcomment@}
-\def\xcommentchar{\%}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\!=12
-\catcode`\[=12
-\catcode`\]=12
-\catcode`\"=12
-\lccode`\!=`\\
-\lccode`\[=`\{
-\lccode`\]=`\}
-\lccode`\"=`\%
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\lccode`\~=`\^^M
-\lowercase{
-  \gdef\xcomment@#1~{\xcomment@@#1\@nnil!\@nil}
-  \gdef\xcomment@@#1!{\xcomment@@@}
-  \gdef\xcomment@@@#1\@nil{%
-    \def\@tempa{#1}%
-    \ifx\@tempa\@empty
-      \let\next\xcomment@
-    \else
-      \def\next{\xcomment@@#1\@nil}%
-      \@testtrue
-      \xc@checkbegin#1\relax begin[]\relax\relax
-      \if@test
-        \xc@checkend#1\relax end[]\relax\relax
-        \if@test
-          \xc@checkinput#1\relax input[]\relax\relax
-          \if@test
-            \xc@checkinclude#1\relax include[]\relax\relax
-            \if@test
-              \xc@checkendinput#1\relax endinputss\relax\relax
-    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
-    \next}
-  \gdef\xc@checkbegin#1begin[#2]#3\relax#4\relax{%
-    \def\@tempa{#1}%
-    \ifx\@tempa\@empty
-      \def\@tempa{#2}%
-      \@for\@tempb:=\xc@envirlist\do{%
-        \ifx\@tempa\@tempb\def\next{\xc@end{#2}#3\@nil}\fi}%
-    \fi}
-  \gdef\xc@checkend#1end[#2]#3\relax#4\relax{%
-    \def\@tempa{#1}%
-    \ifx\@tempa\@empty
-      \@testfalse
-      \def\@tempa{#2}\def\@tempb{document}%
-      \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
-        \def\next{\endgroup\end@xcomment\end{document}}%
-      \else
-        \ifx\@tempa\xc@csname
-          \def\next{\end@@xcomment{#2}#3\@nil}%
-    \fi\fi\fi}
-  \gdef\xc@checkinput#1input[#2]#3\relax#4\relax{%
-    \def\@tempa{#1}%
-    \ifx\@tempa\@empty
-      \def\next{\expandafter\xcomment@\@@input #2 \xcomment@@#3\@nil}%
-      \@testfalse
-    \fi}
-  \gdef\xc@checkendinput#1endinput#2#3\relax#4\relax{%
-    \def\@tempa{#1}%
-    \ifx\@tempa\@empty\ifcat\noexpand#2a\relax\else
-      \let\next\endinput
-    \fi\fi}
-  \gdef\xc@checkinclude#1include[#2]#3\relax#4\relax{%
-    \def\@tempa{#1}%
-    \ifx\@tempa\@empty
-      \def\next{%
-        \global\let\xc@savedinput\@@input
-        \def\@@input{%
-          \global\let\@@input\xc@savedinput
-          \expandafter\xcomment@\@@input}%
-        \include{#2}%
-        \global\let\@@input\xc@savedinput
-        \xcomment@@#3\@nil}%
-      \@testfalse
-    \fi}
-  \gdef\end@@xcomment#1#2\@nnil!\@nil{%
-    \endgroup
-    \toks@{#2 }\rescan{\toks@}%
-    \edef\next{\noexpand\end@xcomment\noexpand\end{#1}\the\toks@}%
-    \next}%
-  \gdef\xc@end#1#2\@nnil!\@nil{%
-    \endgroup
-    \@envirsep \let\@envirsep\envirsep
-    \toks@{#2 }\rescan{\toks@}%
-    \edef\next{\noexpand\normal@begin{#1}\the\toks@}%
-    \next}%
-  }%  END OF LOWERCASE
-\endgroup
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `xcomment.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/seminar.tpm b/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/seminar.tpm
deleted file mode 100644
index 33df37d9b1c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tpm/seminar.tpm
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-<!DOCTYPE rdf:RDF SYSTEM "../../support/tpm.dtd">
-<rdf:RDF xmlns:rdf="http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#" xmlns:TPM="http://texlive.dante.de/">
-  <rdf:Description about="http://texlive.dante.de/texlive/Package/seminar.zip">
-    <TPM:Name>seminar</TPM:Name>
-    <TPM:Type>Package</TPM:Type>
-    <TPM:Date>2006/01/21 00:25:32</TPM:Date>
-    <TPM:Version></TPM:Version>
-    <TPM:Creator>rahtz</TPM:Creator>
-    <TPM:Title>Overhead slides.</TPM:Title>
-    <TPM:Description>
-A class that produces overhead slides (transparencies), with many
-facilities.
-Seminar is also the basis of other packages, such as
-prosper.
-[description copied from TeX Catalogue]
-    </TPM:Description>
-    <TPM:Author>Timothy Van Zandt</TPM:Author>
-    <TPM:Size>629809</TPM:Size>
-    <TPM:License></TPM:License>
-    <TPM:Build/>
-    <TPM:RunFiles size="175161">
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/2up.tex
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/fancybox.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/npsfont.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-a4.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/sem-page.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semcolor.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semhelv.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bg2
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.bug
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.cls
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/seminar.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlayer.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semlcmss.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/semrot.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/slidesec.sty
-texmf-dist/tex/latex/seminar/xcomment.sty
-texmf-dist/tpm/seminar.tpm
-    </TPM:RunFiles>
-    <TPM:DocFiles size="454648">
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/2up.doc
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/fancybox.doc
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/read-me.2e
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/readme.pst
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-read.me
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.ind
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.pdf
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/sem-user.tex
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp1.tex
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/semsamp2.tex
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-code.sty
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-hax.sty
-texmf-dist/doc/latex/seminar/tvz-user.sty
-    </TPM:DocFiles>
-    <TPM:Provides>Package/seminar</TPM:Provides>
-  </rdf:Description>
-</rdf:RDF>
-